EMQuest 399783 A

Antenna Measurement Software
EMQuest EMQ100
Users Manual
ETS-Lindgren, August 2006 Revision A, Part # 399783

EMQuestEMQ100 Antenna Pattern Measurement Software
ETS-Lindgren reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve functioning
or design. Although the information in this document has been carefully reviewed and is believed
to be reliable, ETS-Lindgren does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of
any product or circuit described herein; nor does it convey any license under its patent rights nor
the rights of others. All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Copyright 2006 by ETS-Lindgren L.P. All Rights Reserved. No part of this document may be
copied by any means without written permission from ETS-Lindgren L.P.
Revision Description Date

A Initial Release August, 2006
Internet Address
http://www.ETS-Lindgren.com
USA
1301 Arrow Point Drive, Cedar Park, TX 78613 USA
P O Box 80589, Austin, TX 78708-0589 USA
Tel: +1.512.531.6400
Fax: +1.512.531-6500
Email: info@ETS-Lindgren.com
Finland
Mekaanikontie 1, 27510, Eura, Finland
Tel: +358.2.838.330
Fax: +358.2.865.1233
Email: info@ETS-Lindgren.eu.com
Japan
4-2-6, Kohinata
Bunkyo-ku, Tokyo 112-0006 Japan
Tel: +81.3.3813.7100
Fax: +81.3.3813.8068
Email: info@ETS-Lindgren.co.jp
China
B507A Technology Fortune Center
No. 8 Xue Qing Road
Haidian District
Beijing Postcode: 100083 China
Tel: +86.010.827.30877
Fax: +86.010.827.55307
Email: info@ETS-Lindgren.net
ETS-Lindgren, August 2006

Rev. A, P#399783
Table of Contents
1 Introduction to EMQuest 1
2 Help File Organization 3
3 Introduction 5
3.1 Graphing and Report Generation ....................................................... 6
3.2 Test Packages.................................................................................... 6
3.3 Equipment Drivers .............................................................................. 7
4 Getting Started 9
4.1 Installation .......................................................................................... 9
4.1.1 License Certificates ...................................................................... 9
4.2 Registration ...................................................................................... 11
4.3 Equipment Setup .............................................................................. 12
4.4 Test Parameters ............................................................................... 13
4.5 Running a Test ................................................................................. 14
4.6 Output Templates ............................................................................. 15
5 EMQuest Revision History 17
5.1 Changes to Version 1.06 Since Version 1.05................................... 17
5.3 Changes to Version 1.03 since Version 1.02 ................................... 34
6 Tips of the Day 43
7 License, Copyright, and Warranty 47

7.1 EMQuest License Agreement .......................................................... 47
7.1.1 License Agreement..................................................................... 47
7.1.2 Acceptance ................................................................................. 47
7.1.3 License Types............................................................................. 47
7.2 Uses Permitted ................................................................................. 48
7.3 Uses Not Permitted .......................................................................... 48
7.4 Upgrades and Revisions .................................................................. 49
7.5 Preliminary Releases........................................................................ 49
7.6 General ............................................................................................. 49
7.6.1 Limited Warranty......................................................................... 50
7.6.2 Limitation of Liability ................................................................... 50
7.6.3 Copyright Statement................................................................... 51
8 Menus and Controls 53
8.1 Main Menu ........................................................................................ 53
8.1.1 Main Menu Submenus................................................................ 65

Rev. A, P#399783
8.1.1.1 Graph Component............................................................. 65

8.1.1.2 Exporting and Copying...................................................... 65
8.1.2 Graph Control Bar....................................................................... 66
8.1.3 Graph Settings Dialog ................................................................ 69
8.2 Data Table Component .................................................................... 75
8.2.1 Exporting and Copying ............................................................... 75
8.2.1.1 Viewing All Data vs. Selected Points ................................ 76
8.3 Document Editor/Report Generator.................................................. 76
8.3.1 Template Editor .......................................................................... 76
8.4 Data File Window ............................................................................. 77
8.4.1 Test Parameters Page................................................................ 77
8.4.2 Graph Page ................................................................................ 79
8.4.3 Table Page ................................................................................. 79
8.4.4 Measurement Progress Page..................................................... 79
8.5 Equipment Control Panel.................................................................. 80
8.5.1 Equipment Configurations .......................................................... 81
8.5.2 Ancillary Configurations .............................................................. 81
8.5.3 Equipment Configuration Pane................................................... 82
9 Licensing and Registration 83
9.1 Entering License Certificates............................................................ 83
9.1.1 Entering Registration Information ............................................... 83
9.2 Submitting Registration Information ................................................. 85
10 Tools 87
10.1 Options Dialog .................................................................................. 87
10.2 Tabular Data Graphing Tool ............................................................. 91
11 Measurements 93
11.1 Generic Test Parameters ................................................................. 93
11.1.1 IUT Panes................................................................................. 93
11.1.2 Operator/Comments Pane........................................................ 94
11.1.3 Frequency Range Pane............................................................ 95
11.1.4 Corrections Pane ...................................................................... 97
11.1.5 Paths Pane ............................................................................... 98
11.1.6 Output Pane.............................................................................. 99
11.1.7 Notification Pane..................................................................... 100
11.1.8 Ancillary Equipment Pane ...................................................... 101
11.2 Batch Tests..................................................................................... 102
11.2.1 Running Batch Tests Using EMQuest Introduction ................ 102
11.2.2 Configuring a Batch Test ........................................................ 103
11.2.2.1 Individual Test Setup..................................................... 103
11.2.2.2 Parameters.................................................................... 103
11.2.2.3 Running a Batch Test.................................................... 104
11.2.3 Batch Select Pane, Batch Test Measurements...................... 104
11.3 Pattern Measurement ..................................................................... 105
11.3.1 Pattern Measurement Basics Introduction ............................. 105

Rev. A, P#399783
11.3.2 Measurement Techniques ...................................................... 106

11.3.2.1 Method 1: Conical Sections ......................................... 108
11.3.2.2 Method 2: Great Circle ................................................. 109
11.3.2.3 Comparison of Methods ................................................ 111
11.3.2.4 Two-Axis PositionersThe Best of Both Worlds.......... 112
11.3.2.5 3-D Patterns .................................................................. 113
11.3.2.6 Near-Field Versus Far-Field Measurements................. 113
11.3.2.7 Converting from Near Field to Far Field........................ 115
11.3.2.8 Range Calibration ......................................................... 116
11.3.2.9 Friis Transmission Equation.......................................... 118
11.3.2.10 Total Radiated Power.................................................. 120
11.3.2.11 Range Calibration, Part 2............................................ 122
11.3.2.12 Accounting for VSWR ................................................. 124
11.3.2.13 Gain, Directivity, Efficiency, and EIRP ........................ 126
11.3.2.14 Applying the Range Calibration .................................. 129
11.3.2.15 Other Antenna Properties ........................................... 130
11.3.2.16 Reversing the Flow Total Isotropic Power Received131
11.3.2.17 CTIA Requirements..................................................... 135
11.3.2.18 Numerical Considerations ........................................... 136
11.3.2.19 Summary..................................................................... 143
12 Making Pattern Measurements Using EMQuest 145
12.1 Introduction..................................................................................... 145
12.2 Pattern Measurement Test Types .................................................. 145
12.2.1 Scalar Pattern Measurements ................................................ 146
12.2.2 Vector Pattern Measurements................................................ 146
12.2.3 Sensitivity Pattern Measurements .......................................... 146
12.2.4 Throughput Pattern Measurements........................................ 147
12.2.5 Configuring a Pattern Test...................................................... 147
12.2.5.1 Hardware Setup ............................................................ 147
12.2.5.2 Parameters.................................................................... 148
12.3 Mobile Phone Testing..................................................................... 152
12.4 CTIA Testing................................................................................... 155
12.5 Running a Pattern Test................................................................... 156
13 Post Processing 157
13.1 Test Parameters ............................................................................. 161
13.1.1 Parameters Pane, Single-Axis Single-Polarization Pattern Measurement
161
13.1.2 Parameters Pane, Single-Axis Dual-Polarization Pattern Measurement
167
13.1.3 Parameters Pane, Two-Axis Single-Polarization Pattern Measurement
172
13.1.4 Parameters Pane, Two-Axis Dual-Polarization Pattern Measurement
180
13.1.5 Parameters Pane, Single-Axis Sensitivity Pattern Measurement187

Rev. A, P#399783
13.1.5.1 Parameters Pane, Two-Axis Sensitivity Pattern Measurement 190

13.1.6 Parameters Pane, Single-Axis Throughput Pattern Measurement 195
13.1.7 Parameters Pane, Two-Axis Throughput Pattern Measurement198
13.1.8 Parameters Pane, Single-Axis Vector Pattern Measurement 202
13.1.9 Parameters Pane, Two-Axis Vector Pattern Measurement ... 207
13.1.10 Equipment Pane, Pattern Measurement Test ...................... 213
13.1.11 Correction Preferences Frame, Radiated Patterns .............. 214
13.1.12 Correction Preferences Frame, Sensitivity Patterns ............ 215
13.1.13 Corrections Pane, Vector Pattern Tests............................... 217
14 Response Measurement 219
14.1 Making Response Measurements using EMQuest ........................ 219
14.1.1 Introduction ............................................................................. 219
14.1.2 Configuring a Response Test ................................................. 220
14.1.2.1 Hardware Setup ............................................................ 220
14.1.2.2 Parameters.................................................................... 220
14.1.2.3 Running a Response Test ............................................ 222
14.1.2.4 Parameters Pane, Response Measurement................. 223
14.1.2.5 Equipment Pane, Response Measurement .................. 224
14.1.2.6 Parameters Pane, Time Dependent Response Measurement 225
14.1.2.7 Parameters Pane, Communication Tester Frequency Response
Measurement.................................................................................. 228
14.2 Equipment ...................................................................................... 229
14.2.1 Equipment Types.................................................................... 229
14.3 Communication Testers.................................................................. 233
14.3.1 Agilent 8960............................................................................ 233
14.3.2 Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 .................................................. 233
14.3.2.1 Tips for using the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 ............ 233
14.3.2.2 Band Handoffs .............................................................. 237
14.3.2.3 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 AMPS 237
14.3.2.4 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 CDMA 239
14.3.2.5 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 CDMA 2000
244
14.3.2.6 Network ......................................................................... 250
14.3.2.7 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 GSM 251
14.3.2.8 Measurement Optimization ........................................... 255
14.3.2.9 P/T Measurement.......................................................... 259
14.3.2.10 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 TDMA 265
14.3.2.11 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 WCDMA
266
14.3.2.12 Measurement Optimization ......................................... 271
14.3.2.13 Signaling ..................................................................... 273
14.3.2.14 Establish Call Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200.... 275
14.3.3 Initiating a Call ........................................................................ 276
14.3.4 Aborting a Call Attempt........................................................... 277
14.3.5 Exercise Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 ....................... 277

Rev. A, P#399783
14.3.6 Exercise Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 CDMA............ 278

14.3.7 Exercise Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 CDMA 2000 .. 279
14.3.8 Exercise Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 GSM .............. 280
14.3.9 Exercise Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 WCDMA ........ 282
14.4 Positioners ...................................................................................... 284
14.4.1 ETS-Lindgren Model 2090 Positioner..................................... 284
14.4.1.1 Positioner Ancillary Frame ............................................ 284
14.4.1.2 Positioner Equipment Frame ........................................ 285
14.4.1.3 Positioner Exercise Dialog ............................................ 286
14.4.2 ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth Positioner ..... 290
14.4.2.1 Ancillary Parameter Frame, ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty
Azimuth Positioner.......................................................................... 290
14.4.2.2 Configuration Settings, ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth
Positioner 291
14.4.2.3 Exercise Dialog, ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth
Positioner 292
14.4.2.4 Equipment Parameters, ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth
Positioner 295
14.5 Power Meters ................................................................................. 296
14.5.1 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz NRVD Power Meter296
14.6 Network Analyzers.......................................................................... 298
14.6.1 Configuration Settings, Generic Network Analyzer ................ 298
14.6.2 Advantest R376x Series ......................................................... 300
14.6.2.1 Configuration Settings, Advantest R376x Series.......... 300
14.6.2.2 Equipment Parameters, Advantest R376x Series ........ 302
14.6.2.3 Trace Information settings, including: ........................... 302
14.6.2.4 IF Bandwidth/Sweep Time settings, including: ............. 303
14.6.3 Agilent/HP 8510...................................................................... 306
14.6.3.1 Configuration Settings, Agilent 8510............................. 306
14.6.3.2 Equipment Parameters, Agilent 8510 ........................... 308
14.6.3.3 Trace Information Settings, including:........................... 309
14.6.4 Agilent/HP 872X Series .......................................................... 313
14.6.5 Agilent/HP 875X Series .......................................................... 319
14.6.6 Agilent ENA Series ................................................................. 325
14.6.6.1 Configuration Parameters, Agilent ENA Series ............ 325
14.6.6.2 Equipment Parameters, Agilent ENA Series................. 327

Rev. A, P#399783
14.6.7 Agilent PNA Series ................................................................. 332

14.6.7.1 Configuration Settings, Agilent PNA Series .................. 332
14.6.7.2 Equipment Parameters, Agilent PNA Series................. 333
14.6.8 Rohde & Schwarz ZVC, ZVR, ZVM, ZVK Series ................... 338
14.6.8.1 Configuration Settings, Rohde & Schwarz ZVC, ZVR, ZVM, ZVK
Series 338
14.6.8.2 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz ZVC, ZVR, ZVM, ZVK
Series 341
14.6.9 Rohde & Schwarz ZVA, ZVB, ZVT Series.............................. 347
14.6.9.1 Configuration Settings, Rohde & Schwarz ZVA, ZVB, ZVT Series
347
14.6.9.2 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz ZVA, ZVB, ZVT Series
350
14.7 Spectrum Analyzers ....................................................................... 354
14.7.1 Equipment Parameters, Spectrum Analyzers ........................ 354
14.7.2 Configuration Settings, Agilent 85XX Spectrum Analyzers .... 362
14.7.3 Configuration Settings, Rohde & Schwarz FSP ..................... 363
14.7.4 Configuration Settings, Generic Spectrum Analyzer .............. 364
14.8 Switches ......................................................................................... 367
14.8.1 Agilent 11713A Switch Driver ................................................. 367
14.8.1.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, Agilent 11713A Switch Driver
367
14.8.1.2 Configuration Parameters, Agilent 11713A Switch Driver368
14.8.1.3 Equipment Parameters, Agilent 11713A Switch Driver 371
14.8.1.4 Exercise Dialog, Agilent 11713A Switch Driver ............ 373
14.8.2 Agilent 3499 Switch Controller ............................................... 373
14.8.2.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, Agilent 3499 Switch Controller
373
14.8.2.2 Configuration Parameters, Agilent 3499 Switch Controller374
14.8.2.3 Equipment Parameters, Agilent 3499 Switch Controller376
14.8.2.4 Exercise Dialog, Agilent 3499 Switch Controller........... 377
14.8.3 ETS-Lindgren Model 2090 Auxiliary Ports ............................. 377
14.8.3.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, ETS-Lindgren Model 2090 Auxiliary
Ports 377
14.8.3.2 Configuration Settings, ETS-Lindgren Model 2090 Auxiliary Ports
378
14.8.3.3 Equipment Parameters, ETS-Lindgren Model 2090 Auxiliary Ports
379
14.8.3.4 Exercise Dialog, ETS-Lindgren Model 2090 Auxiliary Ports 380
14.8.4 LPT Parallel Port..................................................................... 380

Rev. A, P#399783
14.8.4.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, LPT Parallel Port Switch381

14.8.4.2 Configuration Settings, LPT Parallel Port Switch.......... 381
14.8.4.3 Equipment Parameters, LPT Parallel Port Switch ........ 382
14.8.4.4 Exercise Dialog, LPT Parallel Port Switch .................... 383
14.8.5 PMJ TVi9901 .......................................................................... 383
14.8.5.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay383
14.8.5.2 Configuration Parameters, PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay ..... 385
14.8.5.3 Equipment Parameters, PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay ......... 386
14.8.5.4 Exercise Dialog, PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay ..................... 388
14.8.6 Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP..................................................... 389
14.8.6.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP RF
System Platform ............................................................................. 389
14.8.6.2 Configuration Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP RF System
Platform 390
14.8.6.3 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP RF System
Platform 393
14.8.6.4 Exercise Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP RF System Platform
395
14.9 Throughput Testers ........................................................................ 396
14.9.1 Equipment Parameters, NetIQ Chariot................................... 396
14.9.2 Equipment Parameters, EMQuest Windows Sockets Client .. 397
14.10 Variable Attenuators....................................................................... 400
14.10.1 Configuration Parameters, Agilent 11713A Variable Attenuator400
14.10.2 Equipment Parameters, Variable Attenuator........................ 401
14.10.3 Exercise Dialog, Variable Attenuator.................................... 402
14.11 Hybrids ........................................................................................... 402
14.11.1 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Dual Receivers................... 402
14.11.2 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Positioner and Switch......... 403
14.11.3 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Receiver and Switch .......... 403
14.11.4 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Communication Tester and Receiver
404
14.11.5 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Communication Tester and Dual Receivers
405
14.11.6 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Communication Tester, Receiver, and
Switch 406
14.11.7 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Throughput Tester and Attenuator 407
14.11.8 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Series-Combined RF Attenuators 409
14.11.9 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Throughput Tester, Attenuator, and Switch
410
14.12 Manual Drivers ............................................................................... 410
14.12.1 Equipment Parameters, Manual Entry Analyzer .................. 410
14.12.2 Manual Entry Dialog ............................................................. 411
14.12.3 Manual Positioner Dialog...................................................... 411
14.12.4 Configuration Parameters, Manual Variable Attenuator....... 411
14.13 Data Table Generator .................................................................... 412
14.14 Data Selector ................................................................................. 412

Rev. A, P#399783
14.15 Trace Information Settings, 8510................................................... 413

14.16 Calibration/Measurement Port Settings ......................................... 414
14.17 Calibration Settings, 8510 .............................................................. 414
14.18 Time Gate Settings ........................................................................ 415
14.19 Equipment Parameters, Generic Receivers................................... 415
14.20 GPIB Configuration Settings .......................................................... 416
14.21 Installed Options, 87XX.................................................................. 417
14.22 Installed Options, 8510 .................................................................. 417
14.23 Absolute/Relative Port Definitions.................................................. 417
14.24 Equipment Parameters, Switch Array ............................................ 418
14.25 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Communication Tester and Switch419
14.26 Corrections Pane, Vector Response Test...................................... 420
14.27 Ancillary Equipment Selection Pane .............................................. 421
15 Ancillary Equipment 423
15.1 Correction Preferences Frame, Vector Patterns ............................ 423
16 Performing Range Calibrations using EMQuest 425
16.1 Theoretical Background.................................................................. 425
16.2 Calibrating an Active Antenna Measurement Range ..................... 428
16.2.1 Procedure for Calibrating an Active Antenna Measurement Range 431
16.2.1.1 Equipment required....................................................... 431
16.2.2 Test Procedure ....................................................................... 433
16.2.2.1 Measurement Step 1: Cable Calibration ...................... 434
16.2.2.2 Measurement Step 2: Range Calibration..................... 436
16.2.2.3 Calculating the Range Path Loss.................................. 438
16.2.3 Calibrating a Passive Antenna Measurement Range............. 438
17 Equipment Instance 443
17.1 Fields .............................................................................................. 443
17.2 Antenna Property Calculations ....................................................... 443
17.3 Antenna Attributes .......................................................................... 443
17.4 Correction File Generator Tool....................................................... 444
18 License Certificate 447
19 Wireless Channel Tool 449

Rev. A, P#399783
1 Introduction to EMQuest
Welcome to EMQuest, a versatile data acquisition and analysis software
package. EMQuest is a modular data acquisition system consisting of the
EMQuest application and a variety of test and equipment modules. The
EMQuest application provides all of the functionality required for
parameter entry, data acquisition, data analysis, and report generation. It
utilizes all of the latest Windows capabilities to provide a powerful and
easy to navigate environment. The modular data acquisition system
makes the EMQuest software continually expandable. Test and
equipment modules provide the required data acquisition capability. New
modules can be added to enhance the data acquisition functionality as
needed. For details on each of these capabilities, see the introduction.
ETS-Lindgren, August, 2006 1

Rev. A, P#399783
This page intentionally left blank.
2 ETS-Lindgren, August 2006

Rev. A, P#399783
2 Help File Organization

The EMQuest application provides context sensitive help for most of its
elements. This can be accessed in most cases by using the "Whats
This?" option signified by the or buttons or by selecting a control
and pressing F1. Documentation for more general information, such as
test specific information and features can be found using the table of
contents.
Some general topics of interest include:
Introduction
Getting Started
Main Menu
Pattern Measurement Basics
Making Pattern Measurements using EMQuest
Making Response Measurements using EMQuest
Performing Range Calibrations using EMQuest

Rev. A, P#399783

Rev. A, P#399783
3 Introduction
EMQuest is a versatile data acquisition and analysis software package
marketed under a number of model numbers providing configurations for
specific applications. EMQuest is a modular data acquisition system
consisting of the EMQuest application and a variety of test and equipment
modules. The EMQuest application provides all of the functionality
required for parameter entry, data acquisition, data analysis, and report
generation. It utilizes all of the latest Windows capabilities to provide a
powerful and easy to navigate environment. The modular data acquisition
system makes the EMQuest software continually expandable. Test and
equipment modules provide the required data acquisition capability. New
modules can be added to enhance the data acquisition functionality as
needed. Specific sets of modules are grouped together to offer
functionality for a given application, and marketed under one of several
EMQ-XXX model numbers. The available EMQuest products include the
following:
EMQ-100 Antenna Pattern Measurement Software offers fully
automated 2-D (polar/linear) and 3-D (spherical/cylindrical/planar) pattern
measurement capabilities as well as frequency response measurements
for both passive antennas and active wireless mobile stations (cell
phones). This full-featured package includes all of the functionality of the
core package listed below, including a customizable report generator,
advanced graphing and data acquisition capabilities, and various tools for
an enhanced user experience.
EMQ-100 Lite Antenna Pattern Measurement Software offers fully
automated 2-D (polar) and semi-automated 3-D (spherical) pattern
measurement capabilities for passive antennas only. This entry-level
package includes only a small subset of the tests and features offered in
the full EMQ-100 package. It does not support multi-axis positioning
systems or active antenna measurements. Addition of unsupported
features requires an upgrade to the full EMQ-100 package.
EMQ-105 Network Throughput Test Package is an optional expansion
to the EMQ-100 package that adds automated 2-D and 3-D pattern and
attenuation response testing of the network throughput of wireless
networking components.

Rev. A, P#399783
Parameter Entry and Data Acquisition

Note: A convenient tree-view structure organizes input parameters in an
easily navigated hierarchy, allowing modification of any parameter with
only a few mouse clicks. Parameters, graphs, and tables are displayed on
separate tabs to allow maximized viewing area while still providing quick
access to any piece of information. Running a test is as simple as loading
a pre-saved parameter file and pressing the "Play" button. All acquired
data is automatically stored in a raw format data file, insuring that
preprocessed data can always be recovered. Data can be located quickly
by model, serial number, test date, etc.
3.1 Graphing and Report Generation

Advanced graphing capabilities allow acquired data to be displayed
in a variety of 2D and 3D formats. Tabular data can be exported to
Microsoft Excel spreadsheets and reports can be saved in RTF
format for import to Microsoft Word or exported to PDF files. The
report generator uses a powerful document style template scheme
to allow automatic generation of output without the limitations of
"banding" type report generators. A template editor links to existing
data sets for editing in a "What you see is what you get"
(WYSIWYG) environment. Multiple data sets, tests parameters, and
templates can be manipulated in memory at once with the multiple
document interface (MDI).
3.2 Test Packages

EMQuest supports a variety of test packages, each often containing
a number of individual test modules. The test packages and
modules available will depend on the package purchased and the
license certificate used to enable the software. Available packages
include the pattern measurement package (provided with the EMQ-
100 software package), which provides single and dual axis (2D
and 3D) antenna pattern measurements and the associated post-
processing. Another common package is the response calibration
package for capturing frequency response and VSWR curves from
supported test equipment.

Rev. A, P#399783
3.3 Equipment Drivers

Equipment drivers are included to control a variety of linear and
rotational positioners using the ETS-Lindgren Model 2090 controller
as well as the ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth
Positioner. Standard drivers are also available for most frequently
used vector or scalar network analyzers, spectrum analyzers,
power meters, and communication analyzers for single and/or dual
channel data acquisitions. Hybrid drivers allow combining two or
more dissimilar devices to function as another more complex
device. For example, two power meters, or a power meter and a
spectrum analyzer could be used in place of a dual channel
receiver.

Rev. A, P#399783

Rev. A, P#399783
4 Getting Started
4.1 Installation
In order to proceed with the installation of EMQuest, you must be
logged on to the computer as the administrator. To start the
installation, insert the CD into your CD-ROM drive. If Autorun is
disabled, browse to the CD and double click on setup.exe. Follow
the on-screen directions provided by InstallShield. You must read
and agree to the license agreement before proceeding with the
installation. The install software will allow you to select which
options to install. Select the desired destination directory for the
application and any other required information. For updates to
existing installations, the InstallShield will automatically update the
software with the previously selected options. If new options have
been added to the install, it will be necessary to run the install again
in maintenance mode in order to add those options.
Minimum System Recommended System

Requirements Requirements
Pentium III 1000 MHz or Pentium 4 2500 MHz or
compatible compatible
Windows 2000 Professional Windows 2000 Professional
or Windows XP Professional or Windows XP Professional
64 MB RAM 128 MB RAM
100 MB free hard drive space 1 GB free hard drive space
CD-ROM Drive CD-R/W Drive
3.5" Floppy Drive 3.5" Floppy Drive
National Instruments GPIB card National Instruments GPIB card
4.1.1 License Certificates

The first time that the EMQuest application is started, it will
prompt the user to enter a license certificate. EMQuest uses
a certificate based registration scheme to control the
functionality available from the software package. The
certificate contains information on the available features,
tests, and equipment that the end user is authorized to use.
There are three primary types of license certificates:

Rev. A, P#399783
Demonstration Certificate This certificate enables

EMQuest in demo mode for the duration of the certificate. A
number of demo test and equipment modules are available
to allow the user to explore the capabilities of the EMQuest
package. Certain features are disabled or have limited
functionality.
Temporary/Trial Mode Certificate This certificate enables
EMQuest in trial mode for the duration of the certificate
(typically one month from the date of issue). While in trial
mode, the software will be fully functional with all features
authorized by the license. It may also be installed on any
machine. This provides the opportunity to easily evaluate all
features of the software and learn the functionality prior to
making a final installation.
Registration Certificate This certificate permanently
enables the software with all of the features that the user has
purchased under the license and restricts the usage to a
single machine.
The software ships with either a demonstration certificate or
a temporary/trial mode certificate, depending on the
circumstances. For evaluation purposes prior to purchase, a
demo certificate is provided to allow operation without any
special setup or test equipment. A trial certificate may be
provided for evaluation in cases where the necessary test
equipment is already available.
Upon purchase, a temporary certificate is provided with the
software to allow the user to immediately begin using the
software. Once the desired configuration has been
determined, a permanent registration certificate can be
obtained for that machine configuration by simply filling out
the registration information from within the EMQuest
application and e-mailing it in. This gives the opportunity for
multiple users to learn the software, and to investigate
different configurations prior to restricting the usage to one
single license. Depending on the circumstances at the time
of delivery, the temporary certificate may not have the exact
configuration purchased by the customer. Additional and/or
different test and/or equipment drivers may be enabled in
trial mode to allow the user to explore enhancements to the
test system. However, registration certificates will always be
restricted to only those drivers purchased by the customer.
Additional drivers are always available for a modest upgrade
fee. For cases where additional licenses are desired for post
processing, data analysis, and report generation, additional

Rev. A, P#399783
licenses may be purchased without data acquisition

capability at a reduced cost.
The certificate will be contained in a text file either on a
floppy disk or the distribution CD, or may be received
through e-mail. When prompted by the EMQuest
application, simply copy and paste the license information
into the space provided. When changing license information
(i.e. after registration), the new certificate can be entered
under the Help : License menu item.
4.2 Registration
In order to permanently enable the EMQuest software with all
licensed features, it is necessary to send in a registration form and
certificate in order to receive a full registration certificate. From the
certificate entry dialog accessed under the Help : License menu
item, press the Register button to bring up the registration
dialog. Enter all of the requested information and press the Send
button to automatically e-mail the registration, or press the
Register button to allow copying the registration information to
an e-mail or file. You will then receive a registration certificate that
will permanently enable the software on that machine.
Note: Registration is only required if you have purchased a fully licensed

copy of EMQuest. If you are using a demo or evaluation copy of
EMQuest, please do not send in the registration information.
Note: Registration certificates are only provided after receipt of payment

for the software or test system installation, and after all optional equipment
configurations have been defined.

Rev. A, P#399783
4.3 Equipment Setup

Prior to configuring a test, it is necessary to configure the EMQuest
application with specific information regarding the test equipment
attached to the computer. This is done using the Equipment
Control Panel under the Equipment : Setup Equipment menu
item. A tree-view on the left hand side of the control panel will
contain a list of device types (network analyzers, towers, turntables,
etc.) for each type of device driver available under the current
license. Under each device type will be a list of the available
drivers for that device type. Right click on the device driver name
and select add new to add a new instance of that device. The new
instance of the device will appear under the device driver name in
the tree-view, and the configuration information for that device will
appear in the pane to the right. Clicking on the device name will
allow the device to be renamed to a user-defined name. Enter all
device configuration information such as GPIB address and
available options. Right clicking on the device instance name will
allow duplication or deletion of that instance.
Add and configure a driver instance for every piece of equipment
needed for the desired tests. It may be necessary to add more
than one instance of a given device type. For instance, it may be
necessary to define two receivers and two rotational positioners for
a dual polarized two-axis spherical pattern measurement. Insure
that all attached equipment have unique GPIB addresses and that
the drivers are configured to match.
Once configured, device drivers that offer a manual control dialog
will show up under the Equipment menu item. Select the device
name under the menu item to bring up the dialog. This feature is
typically provided for positioning devices, where it may be desirable
to manually adjust the position of an instrument under test (IUT)
prior to executing a test.

Rev. A, P#399783
4.4 Test Parameters

Once the test equipment has been installed and configured, it is
then possible to configure a test parameter file with all of the
information necessary to perform the desired measurements. Use
the File : New : Parameters menu item, or press the associated
menu button, to create a new test parameter window. An MDI child
window will be displayed containing a single tab labeled
"Parameters", with a tree-view on the left hand side containing a
single entry, "Test Information", and a combo-box in the right hand
pane labeled "Test Selection". Selecting one of the available tests
from the combo-box will add a variety of node entries into the tree-
view list. Each node of the tree-view will have a configuration pane
associated with it for parameter entry. This method of parameter
entry allows quick access and review of all parameters necessary
for the test.
Typical parameter nodes include:
Test Information is used for selection of the desired test and entry
of IUT information.
Operator/Comments is used for entry of test operator information,
comments, and similar information.
Parameters is used for entry of test specific parameters.
Corrections is used for entry or selection of correction factors for
various measurement components (i.e. cable loss, amplifier gain,
range calibrations, etc.). This may be have one panel for all
corrections, or, for more complicated tests, may open to branches
with panels for each specific type of correction data.
Frequency Range(s) is a placeholder for a list of parameters for
multi-range tests, or contains the frequency range information for
single range tests.
Range # is used for entering range specific configuration
information. Additional nodes beneath this one provide additional
range specific configurations for equipment, etc. Note that not all
equipment will support all possible configurations offered by this
node.
Equipment is used for selection of test equipment supported by the
test for the corresponding range. Each selected piece of
equipment will add a node to the tree-view beneath the Equipment
node, allowing entry of test specific equipment configuration
information (i.e. bandwidth, points per trace, rotational speed, etc.)
Paths allows entry of source and output directories/files that differ
from the default paths configured under Tools : Options.

Rev. A, P#399783
Output allows the entry of selected data points for

interpolated/extrapolated output.
Notification allows configuring an alert sound or e-mail notification
at the completion of the test. The settings in this dialog will override
the global notifications settings in the Tools : Options menu.
Ancillary Equipment allows selecting specialized settings for
specific types of equipment (i.e. switches and positioners) not
normally required to perform the test, in order to set them to
predefined states at certain points in the test.
Once all of the test parameters have been entered, the
configuration can be saved to a file, allowing test parameters to be
pre-configured and then used repeatedly without any additional
setup.
4.5 Running a Test

Once a parameter set has been configured or loaded, running a
test is as simple as pressing the "Run Test" button or selecting Run
: Run Test from the main menu. If all of the parameters are
correctly configured, the test will initialize and/or calibrate all test
equipment as necessary and then start the data acquisition,
prompting the user for action as necessary. During the test,
intermediate data and test status will be displayed to allow tracking
of the test. Upon completion, all necessary post processing will be
performed and the data will automatically be stored to a raw data
file and logged to a test-tracking database. The raw data file
contains the measured data prior to post processing, along with all
of the test parameters used to acquire the data and any corrections
necessary to generate the final resulting data. Once stored, the
raw data file is shown in a new window, providing both graphical
and tabular views of the resulting data.

Rev. A, P#399783
4.6 Output Templates

While the data acquired by the EMQuest package can be easily
exported to Microsoft Excel for external post processing or report
generation, EMQuest also offers a powerful user configurable data
output and report generation capability. The output capability is
built around a word processor style template editor that allows
editing the template in a "what you see is what you get"
(WYSIWYG) environment. Fields for desired parameters, graphs,
or tabular data can be entered into the template and formatted as
necessary. Once the template has been created, it may be
selected under the "Output" node of the test parameters in order to
format the data output. Formatted output can be printed directly or
exported to an RTF file to be imported into Microsoft Word or other
word processor for additional modifications.

Rev. A, P#399783

Rev. A, P#399783
5 EMQuest Revision History

The following lists the revisions to the EMQuest package since its release.
5.1 Changes to Version 1.06 Since Version 1.05

Added packet switched measurement capabilities
(GPRS/EGPRS) to CMU-200 GSM driver, including BLER
based sensitivity measurements.
Added support for multislot measurements for circuit
switched and packet switched modes in CMU-200 GSM
driver.
Added support for WCDMA testing with CMU-200 WCDMA
driver option.
Added a variable paging timer and page count to CMU-200
auto-connect functionality.
Added options to GSM (and WCDMA) sensitivity
measurements to use RSSI to optimize measurements and
decrease test time.
Added basic band handoff capability to GSM and CDMA
2000 options of CMU-200.
Added support for the use of a registration channel (primarily
for CDMA) to force the CMU back to an original registration
channel upon loss of a call.
Made channel setting functions avoid sending new channel
to CMU when it is the same as the current channel (removes
additional delay due to the CMU still initiating channel
handoff even when the channel doesnt change).
Added work-arounds for some of the bugs in the CMU-200
that caused hangs and/or red brick screens.
Added introductory support for the Agilent 8960
communication tester (primarily GSM/CDMA/CDMA 2000).
Added support for power meters as measurement
instruments for pattern measurements.
Added support for the Rohde & Schwarz NRVD dual channel
power meter.
Added a Communication Tester/Dual channel receiver
hybrid for support of dual channel power meters.

Rev. A, P#399783
Added a warning message box to alert the user if correction

data is extrapolated during corrections. (Usually caused by
performing measurements outside the frequency range of
the reference antenna and/or test range calibrations.)
Changed behavior of graphing/labeling functionality to
automatically determine when the given data is graphable
and what formats should be supported. Invalid graph
formats are automatically locked out.
Fixed problems with graphing of reduced data sets where
path sliders wouldnt always show or resize properly.
Added axial ratio calculation to attributes of dual polarized
vector pattern tests with an option to calculate an axial ratio
pattern.
Changed R&S ZVx driver to ZVC, ZVR, ZVM, ZVK driver.
Enhanced ZVx driver to better accommodate different i/o
options and allow remapping user defined relative
measurement types to user defined S-Parameters and
standard S-Parameters.
Added other bug fixes to ZVx driver.
Added introductory support to for the Rohde & Schwarz ZVB
(including un-tested ZVA, ZVT) series VNAs.
Added preliminary support of PNA-L to PNA driver based on
limited available documentation only.
Added Time Response measurement to record
measurement results vs. time.
Added an Edit button to Export Traces dialog linked to the
existing right click menu.
Eliminated switch delays when switches are set without
actually changing the state so that test execution does not
delay unnecessarily if state has not actually changed (eg. on
retries of filtered traces).
Added Function to retrieve GSM MSS Info in GSM Exercise
dialog.
Added Integrated Channel Power filter to spectrum
analyzers for WCDMA/CDMA without requiring special
options on analyzer.
Added multislot support to GSM pulse filter.
Added modulation (flatness) tolerance control to pulse filters
to distinguish pulses of different modulation types.

Rev. A, P#399783
Added floor level setting, separate retry, and other

enhancements to filters.
Changed sweep/filter functionality to sweep, filter, and retry
as needed on a single channel before switching to second
channel. Reduces unnecessary overhead.
Added averaging function to filtered traces to average
multiple filtered sweep results. Important for technologies
like EGPRS (EDGE).
Added trigger offset to R&S FSx drivers.
Added functionality to EMQuest throughput driver to
read/store verbose throughput data (default) or just run-time
post-processed data.
Enhanced support for ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty
Azimuth Positioner to support new versions with variable
speed/velocity and acceleration settings, added emulated
Scan functionality, and increased range of supported COM
ports.
Enhanced the exercise dialog for the Model 2090 to prevent
accidental changes of positioner settings and improve
manual operations.
Changed references to EMCO 2090 to ETS-Lindgren 2090.
Added support for acceleration setting in 2090 driver for new
Motorbase V based positioners.
Enhanced attenuator hybrid to allow user to specify which
changes first.
Added manual attenuator driver.
Added "Save As" functionality to debug dialog save buttons.
Added new capability to detect E- and H-planes from dual
polarized spherical patterns and generate associated
beamwidths and optionally export E- and H-plane cuts.
Added upper and lower hemisphere partial radiated
powers/partial isotropic sensitivities.
Added ratios between partial surface and total surface
quantities in both dB and %.
Added efficiency in percent to post processing.
Changed beamwidth calculations to use new surface cut
functionality.
Added sequential polarization option to dual polarized
pattern tests to allow for manual/mechanical change of
Rev. A, P#399783
polarization and added associated ancillary state to allow

automation of polarization change.
Added support for Agilent 3499 switch controller with
44476A module.
Added WCDMA and Wi-Fi bands to wireless channel tool.
Added support for Rohde & Schwarz FSQ (spectrum
analyzer mode only)
Added function to automatically detect when equipment has
not been defined for a test and take user to equipment
control panel to allow setup.
Fixed a bug where saving final data files from a raw data file
with the raw data pane visible would cause an exception
when the file was loaded again.
Fixed some timing problems with response and isolation
calibrations and other minor bugs on 8510 driver.
Fixed bug where equipment could get stuck in memory due
to repeat communication exceptions.
Increased ESA/RSA max RBW and VBW up to 5 MHz.
Made sizeable exercise dialogs remember size as well as
position.
Prevented exercise dialogs from storing negative positions
(outside of window).
Tweaked zero span handling on certain spectrum analyzers.
Changed throughput calculation on EMQuest throughput
tester to more accurately represent real throughput.
Fixed a bug introduced with the introduction of editable trace
labels where selected trace no longer highlighted in graph
settings dialog.
Fixed a bug where legend labels weren't cleared for single
trace (fully reduced dimension depth) graphs.
Fixed bug related to pasting freq. parms. for which the
wireless channel tool is selected.
Made current equipment node refresh automatically when
control panel is closed to reflect any new equipment added.
Fixed response file generator to allow dB flag on units of
None and allowed entry of user defined units.
Made Extrapolate Points, Single Point Pole choices mutually
exclusive.

Rev. A, P#399783
Made file open/save dialog remember widths of columns in

file detail view.
Modified EMQuest to use new version of grid component
and enabled column selection in places.
Corrected handling of Positioner Skew checks that were
wrapping data transfer rather than measurement step.
Made ENA driver check firmware version to ensure that new
functionality is available.
Enhanced automatic backup functionality.
Fixed bug where file name extensions were accidentally
being duplicated when files were resaved.
Fixed bug where export of cuts from transposed data sets
resulted in erroneous post processing of cut.
Changed behavior of tests to allow manual positioner to be
used as outer positioner on continuous rotation pattern
measurements (Lite patterns, etc.)
Fixed bug in EMQuest Lite related to MDI windows not listing
in menus.
Added tiling functions to Windows menu.
Added non MDI modeless windows to Windows menu to
allow bringing hidden dialogs to the top.
Other bug fixes and enhancements.
Changes to Version 1.05 since Version 1.04:
Added sensitivity and power measurement capability to GSM
and CDMA drivers for CMU-200.
Added single axis and single polarization sensitivity pattern
tests.
Added network throughput pattern tests for Wi-Fi testing.
(This is an optional upgrade to EMQ-100. Contact your
ETS-Lindgren sales office for pricing.)
Added Chariot network throughput driver (This is an optional
upgrade to EMQ-100. Contact your ETS-Lindgren sales
office for pricing. This driver requires licensed version of
Chariot to operate).
Added individual data file exports for various subsets of test
data. For instance, pattern tests allow exporting cuts of the
3-D data as single axis cuts, and frequency dependent
antenna properties as individual response files. Files can be

Rev. A, P#399783
automatically exported at end of test, or manually generated

under the Tools menu.
Added a Response File creation utility under Tools menu to
allow quick creation of correction files.
Added driver support for Agilent ENA series of network
analyzers.
Added sweep time setting to Agilent PNA network analyzer.
Fixed a bug in the Agilent ESA/PSA driver where sweep time
could only be set to integral values.
Updated sweep time functions for all spectrum analyzers to
using floating-point values rather than integers.
Fixed a bug in the Agilent ESA/PSA driver where the
detector type selection command for the ESA was different
than the one used for the PSA. The bug only appeared if the
default detector was overridden on the ESA.
Made Ancillary Equipment pane read-only for data files.
Fixed a problem with transposition of data when "show
attributes for all polarizations" option was selected.
Fixed problem where V1.04 was accidentally released with
all available CMU options enabled. Options are now
enabled by license certificate.
Implemented changes to the internal structure of various
portions of the underlying program code.
Fixed a problem with the CMU not setting in-call mobile
power control settings properly at start of test if call was
established, or upon call established for CDMA.
Implemented option on CMU to maintain call in local-to-
remote transitions. Option will be enabled after first GPIB
communication after power on. Option defaults to off on the
CMU, so any call established before first remote transition
after power up will be disconnected.
Updated the FSE driver to resolve a trace reading problem
by supporting a different number of points per trace.
Added a function to the post processing of pattern
measurements to re-calculate the single point pole option
after corrections are applied. This ensures that the rotation
is performed with values that result in a constant total value.
Changed labels under the Directories tab of Tools:Options...
to conform to those on the Paths frame.

Rev. A, P#399783
Added global field in Directories for Backup File path.

Modified control panel to remember previous size, position,
slider settings, and state of tree-view between uses.
Put multi-threaded access protection around GPIB functions.
Increased the security of the option enabling functions in the
licensing scheme.
Added a current position query throttle to the 2090 driver so
that it doesn't query CP if it's queried it within the last 0.1 s.
Hid "Run" menu when in analysis mode.
Fixed a problem where manual changes to labels only in a
data set (i.e. in graphing tool) wouldn't be picked up as
changes to cause a re-plot in the graph component.
Added default parameter frames to be used in case
corresponding driver is not installed.
Updated to latest version of WPTools word processor
underlying document editor/report generator functionality.
Resolved issues with tabular data resulting in short tables
across many pages.
Added bookmarks, hyperlinks, and other new features.
Changed data fields in report generator to use data path
structure.
Enhanced data field insertion in report generator to allow
insertion of any field, including axis labels.
Enhanced data navigation tool for inserting fields and tables
into a document.
Fixed a limitation where text fields where not allowed to be
greater than 255 characters, and larger strings could cause
an exception.
Cleaned up button styles in report generator to match the
rest of EMQuest.
Added functionality to add templates to most recently used
file list.
Made the export of a report default to the data file name, not
template file name.
Added a flag to detect changes in document editor so that
"Save Changes" query would occur.

Rev. A, P#399783
Added formatting for floating point values to allow user

override of default formatting for data fields in report
generator.
Made a change to have template editors show currently
selected graph and graph's format in report generator.
Hid formatting bars in Graph Settings dialog when called
during Graph Source Select.
Fixed a problem where the default toolbar for template editor
was the table toolbar rather than the font toolbar.
Resolved an issue in the multi-graph component's handling
of the active graph, where Graph Source Select wasn't
working for tabbed pages unless the graph itself was clicked
on after selecting the tab.
Added a new icon to differentiate graph select from graph
source select.
Added Hyperlink add/modify/delete functionality to report
generator.
Added Bookmark functionality to report generator.
Added capability of editing existing parameter/data array
point fields in report generator via popup menu.
Forced un-aligned data to align with first X-axis to resolve
table generation issue in report generator.
Added pre-configurations for ancillary equipment to control
panel and moved equipment pre-configurations so that both
are nodes under the equipment node.
Enhanced the ability to restart an aborted test.
Added auto-save functionality to save data during a long test
and user defined intervals. This ensures that data is not lost
due to power failure or system crash.
Gave ETS-Lindgren 2090 driver the capability of retrying
after CheckComplete or SeekPosition failure.
Fixed a problem where Export to Excel (tables) puts a single
quote in front of numbers (all text) making them non-
formattable. Tabular data is now exported to Excel as
variants, so that numbers, text, and formatting are
maintained.
Added capability of equipment inserting its own status
window or control into the test status pane to provide

Rev. A, P#399783
customized reporting depending on equipment used. Panels

can be moved/docked/undocked by the user.
Added Sweep Timeout Period Increase parameter for
equipment configurations for HP 8510 to resolve issues with
timeouts on long sweeps where equipment delays are
unpredictable.
Resolved an issue where Save As dialog loses target
directory, etc. if overwrite query dialog is told "No".
Fixed a problem where the graph tab was not picking up a
change to the caption of the graph.
Added support for modifying graph legend labels.
Added initial support for transposing axes of graphical data
on the fly. This feature is only suitable for small data sets.
Enabled graph controls for threaded tests.
Fixed problem where Save As for report generator doesn't
show shortcuts, etc. when navigating directories.
Added EMQuest icon to CD install.
Added variable attenuator driver types.
Added switch and attenuator drivers for Agilent 11713A
Attenuator/Switch Driver.
Added field probe driver types with initial support for
EMCO/ETS-Lindgren/Holaday and AR field probes.
Added power meter driver types and initial support for Rohde
& Schwarz NRVD.
Added Pulse RBW/VBW support to FSP and FSE by locking
Video BW to auto when Quasi-Peak, Average, or RMS
detector is selected.
Adjusted the location of pre-test ancillary state calls to
ensure that switches can be changed prior to last stage of
equipment setup prior to commencement of test. This allows
for establishing calls under an appropriate signal path,
changing to/from an auto-cal fixture, etc.
Greatly enhanced the capabilities of the CDMA and GSM
equipment dialogs for the CMU-200.
Fixed some issues with spin-edit boxes that would cause
linked controls to change values while field was still being
edited.

Rev. A, P#399783
Made the browse function associated with a given path start

at that path if defined rather than the root or current working
directory.
Switched to a tree-view combobox for test and equipment
selection to allow sub-grouping of items for easier
navigation.
Changed default behavior of correction function in tests so
that an error returns the uncorrected raw data rather than
losing it altogether.
Added sample data to the install for demo mode, etc.
Created a template tutorial for learning to create report
templates step-by-step.
Add transpose frequency dependent data correction option
to vector tests.
Added missing window zoom button on Tabular Graphing
Tool.
Enabled horizontal scrollbar on corrections list box.
Added/enhanced parameter page copy/paste functionality to
work off of tab and node selection.
Added raw data view toggle for viewing a graph and tabular
display of raw (uncorrected) data.
Added sensitivity specific post processing values.
Made sure that application regularly shows EMQuest
exception messages instead of occasional unhandled "C++
Exception" messages.
Modified equipment naming parser to allow insertion of
ampersands (&) into the names.
Added functionality to sensitivity tests to record raw data
values for each polarization at minimum (best) sensitivity
level. (Intermediate channel measurement assistance.)
Enhanced ancillary equipment handling to allow clearing
dangling ancillary equipment settings.
Enhanced template editor dialogs for graph settings.
Added graph source select icon and menu items to template
editor.
Fixed a bug in file preview where hidden extensions would
cause it to not recognize file.

Rev. A, P#399783
Fixed potential problem in equipment control panel when

switching between pre-configured equipment nodes.
Made test parameters read-only during test to avoid potential
of user changing parameters during test (EMQuest
previously just ignored changes).
Added data start/stop columns to data table generator tool in
template editor to allow customizing any subset of data
columns.
Added modeless data selector tool to insert individual data
fields.
Added Average Gain as an antenna property for pattern
tests.
Enhanced vector tests to store vector raw data and calculate
any combination of real, imaginary, log magnitude, linear
magnitude, phase, and linearized phase.
Added test status flag and enhanced database to include it
for future pass/fail test enhancements.
Added a function to verify database fields to avoid potential
issues at upgrade.
Enhanced equipment dialogs and drivers to avoid losing
non-equipment level parameters (driver parameters) when
closed/reloaded.
Added a template tutorial for step-by-step instructions on
building report templates.
Enhanced automatic backup to ensure that backup file exists
until final raw data file is stored.
Added retry functionality to raw data file storage to ensure
that there is an alternative option if automatic save fails (due
to inaccessible drive, etc.)
Modified most recently used file list to show full path in hint
when cursor hovers over file name menu item.
Enhanced output points with column select dialog to allow
turning any set of output point columns on or off.
Corrected issue where upgrade was failing to always default
to true for Run Test in Thread.
Made status dialog show in Force Calibration call.
Made ancillary selection read-only on data files.
Added option to date & time stamp the runtime comments.

Rev. A, P#399783
Made antenna port input power work for frequency

dependent data.
Resolved various memory leaks in document editor and new
functionality.
Extended max VBW of FSE and FSP to 10 MHz.
Resolved issues to allow multiple exercise dialogs to coexist
peacefully.
Added functionality to allow user to open completed tests
while batch test is still in progress.
Adjusted timing of GPIB calls to eliminate 100% CPU usage.
Updated handling of preferences/options to update to file on
close of dialog to avoid losing settings in the event of
abnormal program termination.
Prevented equipment from being used as ancillary
equipment if it is being used by test.
Enhanced trace filters to provide alternative measurement
options and support latest CTIA requirements.
Added check for proximity of data to top of window on
spectrum analyzer filtered trace (specify maximum value
allowed).
Added copy/paste options for predefined configurations.
Fixed a power trip issue involved with using the doubler on
an 8753A/B/C.
Added communication tester/base station simulator
measurements for response and patterns.
Added RSSI measurement option for GSM.
Added support for ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty
Azimuth Positioner.
Added a preference option to close parameter file at end of
test, effectively replacing parm file with raw data file. This
allows forcing the user to re-enter critical data prior running
next test.
Added a preference to auto close parameter file without
prompting to save.
Made default names for pre-configurations of equipment
reflect the name of the equipment.
Fixed import problem in Rohde & Schwarz TS-9970 import
utility.

Rev. A, P#399783
Fixed a problem where opening a file by double-clicking from

the desktop while EMQuest was minimized would confuse
the actual window state and result in EMQuest being stuck
maximized, etc.
Added ancillary pre-set states to right click menu of switch
exercise dialogs along with regular configurations.
Added Center/Span controls to spectrum analyzer & network
analyzer exercise dialogs.
Added right click menu to update equipment parameter
pages shown in exercise dialogs from predefined
configurations.
Added a generic receiver driver for spectrum and network
analyzers to allow user to input GPIB commands for defining
specific functionality.
Added support for both input and output attenuators to
Rohde & Schwarz ZVx driver.
Made Export menu option generate the RTF report when the
Parameters tab is selected.
Added missing *.EMQ file association to installation.
Added EMQuest file build date information to data files for
version tracking purposes.
Updated File:Properties to contain additional information and
allow copying to clipboard.
Implemented parameter file based serial number list for IUT
frames. Adds serial numbers ads theyre entered so that
repeat tests can re-select serial number from combobox.
Added a default preference to automatically reduce any
dataset greater than 3-D to 3-D. This allows transposed
frequency dependent patterns to display automatically.
Added a "copy to clipboard" button to exception dialog.
Added a preference to request user comments on test abort,
allowing entry of the reason for the abort.
Enhanced 2090 driver with better error checking.
Added option to filtered trace functionality to calculate
tolerance from the average instead of original default of
median.
Fixed an error reporting issue where failure to write to a file
would just display the problem file name without further
information.

Rev. A, P#399783
Changed file type information to better internally differentiate

raw data files from other file types.
Added Lite version of EMQuest with reduced functionality.
Removed zero span requirement from average and peak
filters to allow measurement of wideband power.
Added an option for performing sequential single polarization
tests with manual change of polarization for basic dual
polarized tests.
Added option to retain or remove frequency axis for single
frequency point list frequency measurements.
Added GPIB command log for troubleshooting.
Added option for user to change between English and metric
units in template editor and resolved inconsistencies.
Added an e-mail documents menu item to automatically
attach one or more documents to an e-mail message.
Added detailed procedure for range calibration.
Fixed a bug where sweep time changes would not be
detected in exercise dialog.
Fixed a problem where ancillary positioner driver could hang
if positioner was unable to reach specified target.
Other minor enhancements and bug fixes.
Known issues in V1.05:
On-the-fly transposing functionality is not suitable for
transposing data during a test.

Converted all tests to execute the same code in both
threaded and non-threaded mode.
Added basic batch test capability. A batch test can run a
group of tests in a row, adding specific parameters, and
saving each in its own raw data file.
Added ability to add ancilliary test equipment to parameter
files with settings for three different states during the test
sequence. This allows adding additional positioners and/or
RF switches to a test and setting those to specific positions
or states prior to any calibration step, then between
calibration and data acquisiton, and finally after completion
of the test.

Rev. A, P#399783
Changed behavior of hybrid drivers to eliminate need to

define driver in control panel first. Now, the hybrid can be
selected directly into the equipment parameter list and then
each component of the hybrid can be selected into the
parameter file. This change will require modification to
existing parameter files prior to running a new test.
Added copy/paste capability for entire page of parameters.
This capability allows copying a page of like parameters from
one parm file to another. Click on the parm frame outside a
control and use Ctrl-C or edit menu to copy. Click on frame
of destination, outside any control, and Ctrl-V or edit menu to
paste.
Enhanced drag/drop on IUT frames. Now can move, copy,
switch based on holding control or shift, etc.
Enhanced support for Anritsu Scorpion network analyzers.
Added support for Rohde & Schwarz FSEx series spectrum
analyzers.
Added support for Agilent PNA series network analyzers.
Added support for Advantest R376X series network
analyzers.
Added options to select ZVx Mode:Inputs Port 1/b1 and Port
2/b2 (External input setting).
Added initial support for Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 drivers
for AMPS, GSM, TDMA, and CDMA-One options.
Added Communication Tester/Receiver and Communication
Tester/Receiver/Switch hybrids for automated TRP testing of
mobile phones.
Added identification information to Excel exports.
Added print capability to tabular data graphing tool.
Added additional demo drivers and modes.
Added memory and cascading functionality to equipment
dialogs so that they do not initially appear on top of one
another, and so that they remember their last position on the
screen next time they are opened.
Updated TS-RSP switch driver to have "Unused" state and
be more consistent with other switch drivers. Removed tabs
for unsupported options in preconfiguration panes. Changed
general look and operation of the dialogs, etc.
Made all switch driver parameters default to "Unused".

Rev. A, P#399783
Updated hybrid equipment drivers to support various pass

through functions for vector network analyzers.
Made selection of "Table" tab activate the spreadsheet
component so that export function, etc. is immediately
available.
Converted "Excessive Points" dialog to a "Don't Show Me
This Again" dialog.
Switched to locale specific test time and date
Enhanced 3-D graphing functionality to use variable graph
scaling features and allow mouse based scaling. Vertices
outside the selected plot range are no longer drawn rather
than generating black or white vertices.
Enabled full graph control during threaded tests since this
should have lower impact on data acquisition.
Enhanced functionality of Analysis Mode Only licenses to
properly display certain parameters and completely hide
unavailable functionality.
Fixed problem where some tables wouldn't grow on paste.
Fixed problem where tabular parameters with one point
more than the default size of a table would cause an
exception.
Fixed potential problems with exercise dialogs where dialog
could have multiple instances or fail to be closed at test run
time.
Fixed a bug in Full S-parameter measurement that was
causing "Invalid Read Parameter" errors.
Fixed a potential problem where another test could be
started before the positioner(s) had reached home position
at the end of a previous test. Tests now wait to start until
positioners have stopped moving.
Tweaked behavior of sweep trigger for R&S FSP.
Fixed a missing parameter in ZVx driver.
Fixed a bug where "Show Attributes for Each Polarization"
was not working properly for single axis, dual pol test.
Fixed a bug in reduced dataset graphs for N > 1, where
toggling on the settings dialog, etc. would set the additional
axes back to zero.

Rev. A, P#399783
Resolved the issue of the help file not coming up when

clicking on edit box of a combobox with the "what's this"
search icon.
Changed auto-retry default to 1 retry (no auto, but bring up
retry dialog).
Changed behavior of 859X driver to reset and restore
instrument state after triggered sweep timeout in order to get
past inherent lockup of analyzer.
Changed Single Point Poles calculation to limit nulls to 40 dB
cross polarization to avoid extremely deep (>300 dB) nulls
that could occur when two polarizations were nearly the
same.
Changed Single Point Poles calculation for TIS test to invert
power data prior to rotating around axis (nulls should point
out rather than in).
Enhanced error reports in GPIB calls to include GPIB
command causing the error.
Enhanced GPIB error handling to report National
Instruments GPIB error messages.
Enhanced velocity readout on 2090 exercise dialog to avoid
spurious readings.
Alphabetized all equipment lists, etc.
Renamed various drivers and equipment to better harmonize
them with the rest of the application.
Allowed response file to use hybrids to allow obtaining
frequency dependent power curve from communication
tester hybrid.
Control panel now remembers display state.
Updated help file.
Other minor modifications and new features.

Rev. A, P#399783
5.3 Changes to Version 1.03 since Version 1.02

Added the ability to re-measure ranges and/or specific data
points in pattern tests.
Enhanced the ZVx driver and fixed some problems related to
dual channel measurements and calibration timeouts.
Enhanced the PMJ relay driver to support additional relay
switch positions.
Added a positioner offset setting to allow inserting fixed
offsets between the positioner readout and the recorded
data position. This feature allows changing the orientation of
the coordinate system for a given test without having to
change settings on the controller.
Added separate delays for each positioner speed setting and
increased maximum delay to 60 seconds.
Improved handling of 2090 error conditions.
Improved instantaneous and average speed readouts on
positioner control dialog.
Added additional display/view settings (treeview, slider, and
table positions) to those automatically saved with the
datafile.
Added an option to reverse the direction of rotation for the
single-point pole extrapolation under the corrections option
for dual axis dual polarization measurements.
Enhanced formatting of graphs for transposed and reduced
pattern datasets to automatically display in spherical or polar
coordinates as required.
Enhanced drag/drop functionality of IUT info parameters.
Alphabetized most lists (i.e. equipment list, etc.) for
convenience.
Fixed a bug in the new parameter handlling structure that
was causing various drivers to be unable to find certain
parameters.
Fixed some problems with the 8510 driver (primarily due to
the previous bug).
Fixed a bug where the new graph trace settings in a
template were lost when data was applied.
Fixed a bug where the "set all" and "clear all" traces buttons
in the graph settings dialog weren't updating the graph.

Rev. A, P#399783
Fixed a problem where changes to corrections wouldn't

prompt a save changes query.
Fixed a problem where an overwrite query wouldn't appear
for a "save as" over the same filename.
Fixed a problem in the analyzer exercise dialog where the
number of points setting wasn't updated from the analyzer.
Other minor enhancements and tweaks.

Moved all tests to threaded versions. Threaded tests will
reduce the impact of user interactions with the EMQuest
application while a test is running. Unthreaded versions of
previously existing tests are temporarily still available in case
problems are encountered with threaded versions. A flag
under Tools:Options... toggles this functionality if enabled by
the license certificate.
Changed parameter handling to enhance capabilities for
future expansion and resolve potential problems when using
two or more identical equipment types in a test (i.e. dual
reciever hybrid) where parameters could be confused
between the equipment.
Added major enhancements to graphing routines, especially
for 2-D Cartesian and Polar plots.
Provided equivalent scaling control for all axes, allowing
control over step size as well as max and min. Limits can
now be fully variable (default X-axis behavior) or stepped
(default Y-axis behavior). The gridlines can now be fixed to
integral multiples of the step size (default) or allowed to
move with the minimum limit (allowing even steps from odd
limits, etc.) Logarithmic scale is now supported for Y-axis.
All traces now support manual override of trace color, line
type, width, and legend entry. Data markers will be
supported in future updates.
Option to rotate origin of Polar plots to be horizontal instead
of vertical. Global option is available from Tools:Options... to
change this for all graphs.
All necessary graph settings, including dataset reduction and
selection now translate to and are stored in report templates,
restoring WYSIWYG functionality to all graphs.

Rev. A, P#399783
Autoscaling can optionally be performed over only selected

traces instead of all traces. This also has a global setting
available in Tools:Options...
A global option is available to change the default behavior of
most multiple graph displays to display initially in tabbed
mode instead of panes.
Added option to link graphs within a multi-graph display so
that modifications to graph type, scale, viewing angle, etc.
would be shared between them.
Added option to animate rotation of 3-D graphs.
Added functionality to save graph settings and other display
settings with datafiles so that the restored view upon file load
will be identical to that when saved.
Added tabular data graphing tool to Tools menu that allows
entering tabular data into a spreadsheet and using the
EMQuest graphing capability to view the data. Currently this
tool is only intended to allow graph viewing and export.
Future enhancements may allow storing and re-loading of
data from/to the tool.
Added an option to dual polarization pattern tests to do post-
processing calculations for all polarizations, not just the total.
Added an option to the Corrections tab to transpose
frequency dependent post-processed calculations so that
they may be plotted vs. frequency.
Added an option to continue most aborted pattern tests.
Changed equipment initialization routines to move common
functionality to one location.
Added a properties option for open EMQuest files to give file
version information, location, size, etc.
Updated EMQuest datafile and template versions to support
new capabilities. Older versions of EMQuest will not be able
to load data generated by this version, however, this version
is fully backwards compatible with files created by previous
versions of EMQuest.
Enhanced status dialogs for initialization processes.
Added scan cycle setting to 2090 controller dialog.
Added a right-click menu to switch dialogs to allow setting
switch to preset states defined in device control panel.
Added switch driver for Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP.

Rev. A, P#399783
Added +/- dB tolerance to Analog/AMPS and CDMA filters.

The maximum and minimum of the trace must now be within
the entered tolerance of the average for those filters or retry
will occur.
Added "realtime" acquisition switch to analyzer exercise
dialog that toggles between continuous updating of sweep
data (continuous readtrace) and alternating sweep/readtrace
operations. This is to address problems with slow sweep
times and instruments for which data transfer during sweep
alters readout.
Added detector selection (peak, average, quasi-peak, etc.)
to all spectrum analyzers drivers.
Finished Anritsu Scorpion driver.
Changed list frequency table to accept more frequency
points.
Changed manual entry dialog to indicate data types, etc.
required for entry.
Enhanced dual receiver hybrid to support simultaneous
triggering of sweeps from two analyzers rather than
sequential triggering.
Enhanced install script to support update releases without
automatically entering maintenance screen.
Updated help file to contain support for latest features and
this revision history list.
Fixed possible bug where 8753/8720/8510 could transfer
memory trace instead of data trace if user intervened
between initialization and measurement.
Fixed a bug where spectrum analyzers where not setting the
trigger level except when set to video mode, so that the
trigger level safety checks that were added to the Analog
and CDMA filters would fail when attempting to verify that
the signal was above the trigger level. This eliminates the
need for the previously published workaround.
Fixed a bug where corrections were applied incorrectly to
Single Axis, Dual Polarization pattern measurement. This
resulted in the same correction being applied to both
polarizations. This eliminates the need for the previously
published workaround.
Fixed minor bug in data reduction where graph would stop
updating during test (Dataset would auto-reduce to first
measured trace once the number of data points hit 10,000).

Rev. A, P#399783
Fixed bug in duplication of last point when both "close

surface" and "single-point poles" optimizations were
selected.
Fixed a bug where migrated parameters (by changing test
type) would be saved under previous parameter file name
rather than displaying the "Save As" untitled.prm dialog.
Fixed a problem with Version 2.0 of NI GPIB drivers that
would cause an access violation in GPIB32.DLL on program
exit.
Fixed a bug where zero-sized arrays (incomplete datasets
from aborted tests) would cause an exception in the tabular
display component.
Fixed a bug where mixed 2-D/3-D tabular data would display
incorrectly (Single-axis two-polarization with compute all
polarizations option turned on.)
Fixed a potential memory leak problem with dataset handling
and graphing during data acquisition.
Fixed a problem where multiple file opens from the
command line would only open one file if EMQuest wasnt
already running.
Other minor enhancements and bug fixes.

Added Cancel option to manual entry dialog to abort test.
Added format specifiers to output points table.
Added check to insure that positioner type (rotational vs.
linear) matches requested test type (polar, cylindrical,
spherical, planar, etc.)
Added feature to extract parameters from an existing datafile
in order to run an identical new test.
Added dropdown combobox to directory and file preferences
for quick switching of files/directories from a recently used
list.
Created a separate field for test history database directory to
separate it from the RawData directory field. Now separate
global databases can be used for each directory, or the
same database can be used for all directories as desired.
Added Yes/No To All to save queries so that application can
exit quickly if desired.
Rev. A, P#399783
Added "close pattern" optimization option to duplicate the

zero degree point (first point of the ordered array) at 360
degrees. This closes the surface and allows reduction of the
total measured data for a pattern test.
Added Extrapolate Poles optimization to 2-axis 2-polarization
test. This feature allows skipping measurements of the
poles and using the average of measured data to fill in the
gap so that plots and calculations come out right.
Made the equipment control panel dialog re-sizeable.
Parameter files now allow parameter migration between test
types. Changing the test type of a parameter file will copy as
many compatible parameters as possible from the existing
parameter file.
Added window drag zoom to graph utility.
Added presets for equipment parameters as an addition to
control panel settings. Right click menus allow access to
add/name/delete a new preset to the control panel and to
select the desired preset in the parameter file.
Removed redundant specification of number of switch states
from positioner/switch hybrid.
Added "All Files" and "All EMQuest files" to file open dialog,
making the latter the default.
Greatly enhanced installation program and added file type
registration options for existing EMQuest file types.
Added a vector response test which is a single S-parameter
(selected from S11, S12, S21, or S22) from the full s-
parameter test and provides the same post processing
options for the selected S-parameter.
Add Most Recently Used functionality on Save, Save As,
and History view file open.
Added Switch Driver for PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay.
Made exports default to name of data file with new extension
for the file type to be exported.
Added COM port functionality to equipment drivers to
support serial communications with certain test equipment.
Updated ESA spectrum analyzer driver and added COM port
and exercise dialog support
Converted averaging on trace filters to average data in linear
units, not logarithmic (i.e. convert to linear, average, then

Rev. A, P#399783
convert result back). In general there is a negligible

difference between the two, however, values with deep nulls
could result in a considerably different average.
Added trigger level detection to filter for Analog (trace
average) to make sure that the signal is above a set trigger
level. This allows automatic detection of lost calls.
Added a CDMA (max marker) trace filter with trigger level
detection to make sure that the signal is above a set trigger
level.
Enabled option to prevent unneeded prompts at the start of a
test.
Added an option to save raw data file as .RAW, but just
under new filename (no reduction in data, etc., no auto-
renaming, and no tracking in database.)
Changed to a new parallel port driver to greatly accelerate
the speed of the LPT switch driver.
Added an option to record actual position information on
stepped tests.
Various bug fixes including:
o Fixed some issues with manual analyzer entry dialog to
make it more convenient and fixed a minor bug that
caused exception on application close.
o Fixed a bug where the application restore button caused
an exception stating that it can't open the file, even if no
file is selected to be open! I don't believe this bug
existing in a distributed version.
o Prevented blank parameter form asking if user wants to
save changes when closed.
o Equipment control panel losing node selection.
o Bug in 8753 Exercise Form causing undefined parameter
exception.
o Added optional delay time to GPIB calls for older version
firmware.
o Fixed a bug that prevented a "save as" of a raw data file
that doesn't have corrections files available. (i.e. was run
on another machine, etc.)
o Changed the behavior of Save As so that it comes up
with current filename, not "untitled" (unless current
filename is "untitled").

Rev. A, P#399783
o Made file load from drag and drop or double-click bring

EMQuest window to top.
o Fixed a bug where "Favorites" links didn't show up in
"Save As" dialog. Added *.lnk to all type selections in
dialog.

Rev. A, P#399783

Rev. A, P#399783
6 Tips of the Day

This section summarizes the available tips show in the Tip of the Day feature
of EMQuest.
EMQuest now supports a Tip of the Day feature!
There is a template tutorial included with the installation for learning how to
develop report templates.
There are sample data files and report templates available with the
installation.
The Tools:Options... menu contains settings for customizing many features
of EMQuest.
EMQuest now ships with a freely distributable EMQuest Viewer application
to allow customers to view data generated by EMQuest in its native format.
There is a generic receiver driver for spectrum analyzers and network
analyzers that will allow user defined support of basic GPIB functionality for
custom devices.
Many forms and components support a right click menu that brings up
additional options.
Right clicking on most parameter tables will allow access to a range filling
tool, allowing automatic generation of a range of values.
There is a Wireless Channel Selection tool that can be toggled on or off by
right clicking on the frequency list tables. This tool can also be enabled by
default under Tools:Options:Preferences.
Many common features can be enabled/disabled or adjusted under the
Tools:Options... menu.
EMQuest supports the definition of standard lists of IUTs, manufacturers,
models, etc. Just go to the Tools:Options... menu.
EMQuest now offers an optional Network Throughput Test Package, EMQ-
105, for over-the-air performance testing of Wi-Fi and other wireless network
devices.
Right clicking on a graph brings up the Graph Settings dialog.
You can now change the labels of traces on a graph, as well as colors, line
types, and thicknesses. This information can be saved with the data file or
template.
The "Dimension Depth" tab on the Graph Settings dialog allows moving the
outer dimension(s) of a dataset to slider bars for a better view of complex
data sets.

Rev. A, P#399783
Hover the mouse over the upper right corner of a graph after reducing a data
set by one or more dimensions to highlight the button that shows the slider
bar panel.
The "Dimension Order" setting in the Graph Settings dialog allows real-time
transposing of the axes of simple data sets. Just drag the axes to the
desired order.
Graphs can be viewed on tabs or panes. The default preference of tabs or
panes is set in the Tools:Options... menu.
You can now view completed raw data files in a Batch Test by double
clicking a selection in the Data Files listbox on the Measurement Progress
screen.
Runtime Comments now have the option to prepend a timestamp.
You can now email opened documents straight from EMQuest using the
Tools:E-Mail Documents menu.
There is a "User Defined" node in most parameter files that allows the user
to add and label custom fields for report generation and tracking purposes.
The "User Defined" node also allows definition of a custom test initialization
message prompt.
There is a Preview File option in the File:Open dialog.
Printing and export functions are page dependent. Selecting Parameters
generates a report. Selecting a graph prints or exports that graph using the
graph template. Selecting a table prints or exports the tabular data.
You can change the corrections or post-processing settings on a raw data
file and update it using the Tools:Apply Updated Corrections command.
There's an "EMQuest Favorites" button in the open and save file dialogs that
jumps to a set of shortcuts to EMQuest directories and files.
You can quickly navigate to any commonly used directory by adding it to the
"EMQuest Favorites" in the open or save file dialog.
The open/save file dialogs support the full range of Windows Explorer
display modes, including list, tree, and icon views.
EMQuest supports TRP and TIS testing per the CTIAs Mobile Station Over-
the-Air Performance Test Plan.
EMQuest can automatically export various subsets of data at the end of the
test. Configure these under the Exports parameter tab.
The Correction File Generator under the Tools menu allows quick entry of
external data for use as corrections to other measurements.
Optimizations like single point poles and close surface can significantly
reduce test time and result in better looking 3-D data.

Rev. A, P#399783
For proper integration, angle ranges in the resulting dataset must always
cover the desired range of integration. Thus, to cover a sphere, data must
exist from theta = 0-180 degrees and phi = 0-360 degrees. Use
optimizations to reduce the test time in taking this data.
When using the close surface optimization, stop the theta axis (spherical) or
angle (polar) position one step before the full 360-degree rotation.
EMQuest will automatically backup data during a test for recovery in case of
a catastrophic failure. Configure storage times and location in the
Tools:Options menu.
You can now edit existing parameter or data array point field in the report
generator via a popup menu by right clicking on the field.
You can pre-configure equipment parameter settings in the equipment
control panel and automatically select those into a parameter file by right
clicking on the parameter page and selecting the desired configuration from
the drop down menu.
Ancillary equipment allows performing specific tasks using equipment not
normally required by the test (such as positioners and switches) at certain
points in the test procedure.
Use the Transpose Frequency Dependent Data option in frequency
dependent pattern tests to see complete patterns as a function of frequency.
Use the Tools : Apply Updated Corrections menu option to change the
corrections or post processing options of a raw data file.
You can copy and paste entire parameter pages from file to file. However,
be careful not to paste parameters from different pages or unexpected
results may occur.
You can toggle a "raw data" view on or off in a raw data file. This turns on an
additional tab that shows the uncorrected and unprocessed data.
Two special fields, "Th. Src Pwr @ Boresight" and "Phi. Src Pwr @
Boresight" are provided in TIS post processing to give appropriate power
settings for intermediate channel testing. These are the corresponding
communication tester power levels at the sensitivity level of the IUT for the
best sensitivity (boresight) position.
EMQuest now supports basic band handoff for GSM and CDMA 2000
options of the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200.
EMQuest now supports WCDMA and GPRS/EGPRS options of the Rohde &
Schwarz CMU-200.
EMQuest now has introductory support for the Agilent 8960 Communication
Tester.
There are a number of optimizations to the measurement sequence for GSM
and WCDMA sensitivity testing that can significantly reduce test time.

Rev. A, P#399783
The trace filters for spectrum analyzers now support an Integrated Channel
Power measurement that can determine the power of a CDMA or WCDMA
across a frequency span without the need for special options in the test
equipment.
Trace filters have a number of tolerance and retry settings to ensure that
valid data is acquired.
Theres a new Time Response test that can record data as a function of time
and provide max, min, and average power.
EMQuest can automatically determine the orientation of the E- and H- plane
of a pattern and generate the appropriate cuts.

Rev. A, P#399783
7 License, Copyright, and Warranty
7.1 EMQuest License Agreement
7.1.1 License Agreement

This software package is licensed by ETS-Lindgren L.P. to
the original purchaser of the product for their exclusive use
only on the terms set forth below. ETS-Lindgren L.P. retains
full ownership of this software and all of its component parts.
This license cannot be transferred to any other party without
the express written approval of ETS-Lindgren, L.P.
7.1.2 Acceptance
Installation of the software covered by this License
Agreement shall constitute acceptance of the terms of this
Agreement as well as all of the ETS-Lindgren L.P. Standard
Terms and Conditions of Sale, which is available upon
request from the ETS-Lindgren L.P. Sales Department.
7.1.3 License Types

Full Registration License This license, and the
associated registration certificate, authorizes the purchaser
to use the software and any test and/or equipment modules
enabled by the certificate on one machine for the lifetime of
the license.
Trial License This license, and the associated trial
certificate, authorizes the user to use the software and any
test and/or equipment modules enabled by the certificate on
any machine for the duration of the certificate for evaluation
purposes only. At the end of the license period, all copies of
the software must be returned or destroyed.

Rev. A, P#399783
Demo License This license, and the associated demo

certificate, authorizes the user to use the software and any
demo test and/or demo equipment modules enabled by the
certificate on any machine for the duration of the certificate
for evaluation purposes only. At the end of the license
period, all copies of the software must be returned or
destroyed.
7.2 Uses Permitted

You may use the software on a single machine. This license allows
you to use the software for home or business use. You are
authorized to make a duplicate copy of this software for archival
purposes and hard drive installation only. The software may be
installed on only one machine at a time.
7.3 Uses Not Permitted

You may not:
Provide use of the software in a computer service business,
network, timesharing, or other multiple user arrangement to
users who are not individually licensed by ETS-Lindgren L.P.
as a user of the product.
Make copies of any ETS-Lindgren L.P. documentation or
program disks other than for the purpose of a single backup.
Make alterations to the software or reverse engineer,
decompile, or disassemble the software.
Grant sublicense, lease, or other rights in the software to
others.
Include the software, in whole or in part, in any other
commercial or private package.
Make verbal or media translations of any documentation.
Make modifications for use on non-compatible hardware.
Make transmission of the software in any form.
Use the software or any of its component parts for any illegal
purpose.
Any violation of the terms of this license constitutes an immediate
cancellation of said license. ETS-Lindgren L.P. shall be entitled to
any and all remedies allowed by law, tort or any other legal theory
for Licensees violation of this License Agreement.

Rev. A, P#399783
7.4 Upgrades and Revisions

Refer to the associated Software Maintenance Agreement for
details on upgrades and revisions to this software.
7.5 Preliminary Releases

Preliminary alpha/beta release versions are provided on an as-is
basis and will be supported and updated as resources allow. Any
preliminary release is subject to the same license agreement above
with the additional stipulation that at the end of the license period,
all copies of the software will be returned or destroyed. By
accepting the use of a preliminary release, the user agrees that
they will not reveal any proprietary or privileged information to a
third party and may not transfer the license of said software through
sale or any other means or otherwise represent the software as a
finished product of ETS-Lindgren, L.P. ETS-Lindgren, L.P. may
cancel a preliminary release license at any time by written or
electronic notice to the Licensee. Where preliminary releases are
provided to satisfy a purchase, the maintenance period will not start
until after the released version is available. ETS-Lindgren, L.P.
reserves the right to alter the terms of the license agreement for
any preliminary releases at any time, and those modified terms
shall apply to all current preliminary licenses immediately.
7.6 General
This Agreement may be modified only by mutual agreement in
writing. The provisions of this Agreement are severable. Neither
party may assign this Agreement unless mutually agreed in writing,
except that either party may assign the Agreement to any third
party into which the party merges, or which gains stock and/or
asset control of the party. This Agreement is governed by the laws
of the State of Texas, United States of America and both parties
agree that the jurisdiction for all disputes shall be Austin, Texas.

Rev. A, P#399783
7.6.1 Limited Warranty

ETS-Lindgren L.P. warrants for a period of ninety (90) days
from the original date of purchase that:
the program package will perform its intended
function within the specifications published in the
documentation and those set forth in ETS-Lindgren
L.P. advertising material.
the user documentation is substantially complete and
contains the information which ETS-Lindgren L.P.
deems necessary to use the product.
under normal use, the electronic media upon which
this program is recorded is free from defects.
This warranty is not valid except under normal use and
without unauthorized modification.
If during that ninety (90) day period, a demonstrable defect
in the program or documentation should appear, you may
return the software, inbound shipping prepaid, to ETS-
Lindgren L.P. for repair or replacement, at ETS-Lindgren
L.P.s option. No warranty services will be performed
without a Return Material Authorization Number issued by
the ETS-Lindgren L.P. Sales Department prior to the return.
The end user's remedy is limited to return of the software,
manual, and any associated hardware to the dealer or to
ETS-Lindgren L.P. for replacement. The licensee assumes
sole responsibility for the use of this software.
7.6.2 Limitation of Liability

THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE. NO OTHER
WARRANTY, WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE
REMEDIES PROVIDED BY THIS WARRANTY ARE THE
BUYERS SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. IN NO
EVENT SHALL ETS-LINDGREN L.P. BE LIABLE TO THE
LICENSEE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF, OR
AS THE RESULT OF, THE SALE, DELIVERY, NON-
DELIVERY, SERVICING, ASSEMBLY, USE, LOSS OF USE
OR FAILURE OF THE PRODUCT OR ANY PART

Rev. A, P#399783
THEREOF, OR FOR ANY CHARGES OR EXPENSES OF

ANY NATURE INCURRED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
WRITTEN CONSENT OF ETS-LINDGREN, L.P., EVEN IF
ETS-LINDGREN, L.P. MAY HAVE BEEN NEGLIGENT. IN
NO EVENT SHALL ETS-LINDGREN, L.P.'S LIABILITY
UNDER ANY CLAIM MADE BY THE LICENSEE BE IN
EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE LICENSE
OR MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT WITH RESPECT TO
WHICH DAMAGES ARE CLAIMED.
7.6.3 Copyright Statement

The EMQuest program; associated test and equipment
driver modules; input, configuration, template, and output file
formats; documentation; logo; concept; and associated
materials are all Copyright 2003-2005 by ETS-Lindgren
L.P. The EMQuest logo and splash screen are copyright
and trademark 2002 by EMC Test Systems, L.P. Portions
are copyright 2001 and earlier, by EMC Test Systems, L.P.
The WinCal and WinCal32 name, logo, and splash screens
are all copyright and trademark 1996-2002 by EMC Test
Systems, L.P. All of the above are protected by national and
international copyright, trademark, and patent laws. They
may not be reproduced, in any form, without the express
written consent of ETS-Lindgren L.P.

Rev. A, P#399783

Rev. A, P#399783
8 Menus and Controls
8.1 Main Menu

EMQuest uses a multiple document interface, which will change the
available menu options based on the child window that is selected
for input focus. The available menu options include File, Edit, View,
Insert, Format, Equipment, Run, Tools, Window, and Help. Details
for each of these are listed below. Note that not all menu options
will be available for all software configurations.
File contains functions related to creating, loading, saving, or outputting

the various file types supported by EMQuest. These functions include:
New allows creation of new files. File types available for
creation are contained in a submenu.
Parameters creates a new test parameter file. Test
parameter files are the gateway to the data acquisition
capabilities of the EMQuest package.
Template creates a new template file for data output or report
generation.
Open brings up the file open dialog to allow loading of an
existing file.
Save saves the file associated with the currently active MDI
child window if changes have been made. If the window
represents a raw data file, if the data has not been changed,
or if no active window is present, this menu item is disabled. If
the window represents a new file that has not been saved yet,
the Save menu item works the same as the Save As menu
item.
Save As brings up the file save dialog to allow saving the file
associated with the currently active MDI child window to a
different file name or location. If the window represents a raw
data file, it can only be saved as a final data file. A save as
text option is available for data files to allow outputting all data
and parameters in text format. The comma-separated data
generated in this manner will have the full numerical resolution
available for text output, rather than the formatted resolution of
the tabular data export. If no active window is present, this
menu item is disabled.

Rev. A, P#399783

Close closes the currently active MDI child window. If no
active window is present, this menu item is disabled.
Load Template Data displays the open file dialog to allow
loading a data file into a template. Once a data file is loaded
into a template, the graphs, tables, and fields will show the
data extracted from that file. This allows for visual
development of a template to match the contents of a data file.
Associate Template Data displays a window select dialog to
allow extracting the associated data file into a template. Once
a data file is loaded into a template, the graphs, tables, and
fields will show the data extracted from that file. This allows
for visual development of a template to match the contents of
a data file.
Properties displays the properties of the current data file,
indicating the file size, location, etc. as well as the software
version that created it.
Export brings up a file save as dialog box allowing the
selection of the desired export format for the selected object.
This menu option will only be enabled when a control that
supports export (graphs and output tables) is selected. Click
the mouse on or in the desired graph or table to select it for
export. Selecting the Parameters tab of a data file will allow
generation and export of a test report using the specified
report template.
Print Preview displays the print preview for the active MDI
child window if the window supports printing. For data files,
the output that will be generated is dependent upon the
selected tab of the child window. If the associated file
requires a template to generate output, and one has not been
specified, the program will offer an opportunity to select an
appropriate template. If the window does not support printing,
or if no active window is present, this menu item is disabled.

Rev. A, P#399783

Print displays the print dialog for the active MDI child window
if the window supports printing. The print dialog allows
selecting the desired printer and making any required
adjustments prior to printing the output. For data files, the
output that will be generated is dependent upon the selected
tab of the child window. If the associated file requires a
template to generate output, and one has not been specified,
the program will offer an opportunity to select an appropriate
template. If the window does not support printing, or if no
active window is present, this menu item is disabled.
History leads to the history submenu, which contains the
following elements:
Measurement History displays the measurement history
database table, which lists elements like the measurement
type, data and time, source parameter file, raw data file, and
comments for each test.
IUT History displays the measurement history database table
with additional fields for IUT manufacturer, model, serial
number, and type.
Upload to Master displays the file open dialog box to allow
the selection of a location for a master measurement
database. This feature allows synchronization of data from
several EMQuest sources, which may not always be
connected to a network, to one common measurement
database.
The Most Recently Used Files list shows the last several
files opened by the user.
Exit closes the application. The user will be prompted to save
any unsaved files.

Rev. A, P#399783
Edit contains functions related to editing the currently active

document. These functions include:
Undo undoes the last document edit action. This will undo
insertion/deletion and various formatting operations. Changes
to properties of objects (i.e. graph settings, etc.) cannot be
undone.
Redo redoes a previously undone edit step.
Cut copies the selected text from the document to the
clipboard and removes the selection from the document.
Copy copies the selected text from the document to the
clipboard.
Paste inserts the text contained in the clipboard at the current
location. Any selected text is replaced.
Delete removes the selected text or object from the
document.
Select All selects all text and objects in the document.
Clear All displays a dialog to allow selection between clearing
the contents of the document (equivalent to select all followed
by delete) or clearing the associated data.
Find brings up the find text dialog, which allows searching
the document for a requested string.
Replace brings up the replace text dialog, which allows
searching the document for a requested string and replacing it
with another one.
Go To Bookmark lists the available bookmarks as a sub-
menu for quick navigation.
View contains functions related to changing the way the
currently active document is displayed. These functions
include:
Normal shows the document in a continuous scrolling editor,
with no indication of page break locations.
Page Breaks shows the document in normal mode, but with
dashed indicators to show where forced page breaks have
been inserted.
Print Layout shows the document as it will look printed
across multiple pages, with all formatting, etc.

Rev. A, P#399783
Edit contains functions related to editing the currently active

document. These functions include:
Prior Page moves the insertion cursor and repositions the
display window to the top of the previous page.
Next Page moves the insertion cursor and repositions the
display window to the top of the next page.
Zoom allows selection of a range of standard magnifications
for the document. Changing the magnification changes the
size of fonts and other objects displayed in the edit window.
Zoom In increases the magnification percentage value by
20%.
Zoom Out decreases the magnification percentage value by
20%.
Fit Height, when checked, overrides the magnification setting
and adjusts the display scale to fit the height of a full page to
the height of the edit window. This option toggles on or off,
and is toggled off when Fit Width is selected.
Fit Width, when checked, overrides the magnification setting
and adjusts the display scale to fit the width of a full page to
the width of the edit window. This option toggles on or off,
and is toggled off when Fit Height is selected.
Insert contains functions for inserting various objects and fields into
the current document. These functions include:
Page Break inserts a forced page break at the current cursor
location.
Field leads to a submenu that contains options for inserting
parameter, data, or document fields.
Field Editor brings up the field editor dialog, which allows
selection of fields from an available list. Fields are subdivided
into various categories by type. With the exception of
document specific fields like page numbering and current
date, it may be easier to use the other field selection features
to find the appropriate field from an existing data file.
Otherwise it is necessary to understand where and how
specific information is stored in the data file in order to
configure the fields.

Rev. A, P#399783
Parameter Locate minimizes the current window and
switches to a locate mode signified by the find cursor . This
tool allows locating the desired parameter field by simply
clicking on the control containing the parameter in an open
data file. Simply select the open window containing the
desired parameter and browse through the parameter tree
until the required parameter page is displayed. Then, just
click on the control containing the desired parameter. When
the cursor is hovered over a valid parameter control, it will
change to the search link cursor . Note that this feature will
allow the selection of fields from data files other than the one
currently associated with the document template. This could
cause the inserted field to not correspond to an available
parameter in the associated data file. Care should be taken to
insure that the data file used to locate the desired parameter
is of the same type as that which will be used to generate
reports with the template being edited.
Data Field brings up a tabular view of the associated data set
and allows the selection of a particular data point to insert into
the document. Remember, this option only inserts a
description of where that data point was found in the data set.
If the data set used to generate the report does not have an
identical organization, the correct data may not be inserted
into the field when the report is generated.
Graph inserts a graph object at the current cursor location.
Right clicking on the graph and selecting the appropriate
menu option can then change the properties of the graph.
Data Table displays the tabular data selection dialog for
creating a data table template for reporting tabular data. The
dialog allows navigation of the available data set to select the
desired output table view as well as specification of the
number of columns of data to display per page. Currently, this
feature can only create tables of a pre-defined size, which
means that the size of the desired output table must be known
at design time. Dynamic table generation, which will
automatically add the required number of pages at report
generation time will be added in future revisions.

Rev. A, P#399783
Band leads to a submenu for inserting special band functions
that can be used to place duplicate information in the same
place across multiple pages. Bands are normally only used to
generate repeated data across multiple pages when tabular
data is output from the dataset. The Data Table menu
option above will automatically insert the required band
structure, but these items are provided for flexibility.
Header inserts a header band that indicates the start of a
header section. Everything inserted after the header band up
until a text or footer band will be placed at the top of each
page if placed on a page outside a group, or at the top of the
group containing the header section.
Footer inserts a footer band that indicates the start of a footer
section. Everything inserted after the footer band up until a
text or header band will be placed at the bottom of each page
if placed on a page outside a group, or at the bottom of the
group containing the footer section.
Text inserts a text band that indicates the start of a text
section. Everything inserted after the text band up until a
header or footer band will be placed in the body (middle) of
each page if placed on a page outside a group, or in the
middle of the group containing the text section.
Group Start inserts a band group start indicator. Any
information up until the next group end will be output together.
A group will be repeated across multiple pages as long as
there is data available to output in that group.
Group End inserts a band group end indicator. Any
information between a previous group start and this group end
will be output together. A group will be repeated across
multiple pages as long as there is data available to output in
that group.
Table displays the table size selection dialog to insert a
simple table into the document.
Picture brings up a picture file open dialog to allow loading a
picture file and inserting it at the current cursor location.
Document brings up a file open dialog to allow loading
another document and pasting it into the current location in
the document.

Rev. A, P#399783
Bookmark brings up the bookmark editor dialog to allow
inserting a bookmark in the document at the current cursor
location.
Hyperlink brings up the hyperlink dialog that allows inserting
a web link into the document at the current cursor location.
Format contains functions for formatting the document or the current

active or selected item. These functions include:
Font displays the Windows font dialog that provides access to
all of the properties of the font for the currently selected text.
Paragraph displays the paragraph format dialog that allows
setting line spacing, indentation, and line spacing of the
current or selected paragraph(s).
Bullets and Numbering displays the bullet/numbering type
selection dialog, which allows selection or disabling of
automatic bulleting or numbering of text.
Band displays the band-formatting dialog for the selected
band.
Graph displays the graph-formatting dialog for the selected
graph.
Graph Select displays the graph select dialog for a multiple
graph data set, otherwise performs the same function as the
graph format function above.
Borders displays the border control dialog, which allows
toggling on or off the various borders of a table or block of
text.
Table leads to a submenu for various table related functions.
These include:
Select Row selects the table row containing the cursor.
Insert Row inserts a new row in the table after the current
row.
Delete Row deletes the table row containing the cursor.
Select Column selects the table column containing the

cursor.

Rev. A, P#399783
Format contains functions for formatting the document or the current

active or selected item. These functions include:
Insert Column inserts a column in a table after the column
containing the cursor.
Delete Column deletes the column containing the cursor.
Split Cell splits the selected cell(s) into two equal cells in the
same row.
Combine Cells combines the select cells into one cell on
each row.
Page Setup displays the page setup dialog with allows
selection of paper size, margins, and orientation of the page.
Equipment contains functions for configuring and exercising the

attached test equipment. These functions include:
Setup Equipment brings up the Equipment Control Panel.
This control panel allows defining instances of equipment
using the available drivers. Since the control panel can
change the settings of a piece of equipment, all equipment
dialogs must be closed and no tests may be running in order
to access the control panel.
A list of Equipment Dialogs will be displayed for each
configured instance of an equipment driver if that driver
supports a manual interface dialog. The available equipment
dialogs will depend on the installed equipment and drivers.
For more information on a particular dialog, use the context
sensitive help for that dialog.
Run contains functions for running a test. This menu will only be visible
when the active window represents a valid parameter file that may be
used to run a test. The available functions include:
Run Test initiates the test represented by the active
parameter file. Communication is established with all required
test equipment and the equipment settings are adjusted as
required prior to starting the test. If a reference cable
calibration or other similar initialization step is required, and
no valid calibration exists in the instrument or driver, that
calibration is performed prior to commencing the actual
measurement process.

Rev. A, P#399783
Run contains functions for running a test. This menu will only be visible
when the active window represents a valid parameter file that may be
used to run a test. The available functions include:
Pause Test brings up the pause test dialog and pauses test
execution at the next available step in the test sequence.
Depending on the test, this may not occur immediately.
Abort Test brings up the abort test confirmation dialog,
allowing the test to be aborted.
A list of Additional Functions may be present for a given
test. These functions may configure equipment or perform
other actions based on test parameters without actually
initiating the entire test sequence. These include:
Force Calibration performs the initialization step required for
the active parameter file, and forces any calibration
initialization step to occur, even if a valid calibration exists for
the given configuration.
Tools contains general configuration tools for the program as

well as providing test or document specific functions. These
functions include:
Options brings up the Options Dialog for configuring and
customizing various global user defined options and fields
which affect program operation.
Graph Tabular Data creates a new tabular data graphing tool
window. This window allows entering 2-D and 3-D datasets in
order to use the graphing capabilities of EMQuest to view the
data.
Correction File Generator creates a new correction file
generator window. This window allows entering data to create
a simple response file to be used as a correction file for use
with other test parameters. This provides a simple
mechanism to enter frequency dependent calibration factors,
etc.
Apply Updated Corrections recalculates any available
corrections and/or post-processing functions for the active raw
data file. Only a raw data file can be updated, since it
contains the original measured data in addition to the final
processed data.

Rev. A, P#399783
Tools contains general configuration tools for the program as

well as providing test or document specific functions. These
functions include:
Export Selected Traces brings up the export selection dialog
to allow manually defining the data to export into separate
data files. This tool provides manual functionality equivalent
to the automatic export function available in the parameter
set.
Update Parameter Set makes any necessary changes to a
parameter tree of a raw data file if there have been additional
nodes added to the parameters (by an update to the EMQuest
software package) since the data was originally measured.
This tool will be available only if the test parameters have
been enhanced by adding a new parameter node/pane to the
parameter tree. While nodes that add to the input parameters
prior to a test do not require updating of an existing raw data
file, this tool is useful if a post-processing or corrections
related node has been added to enhance post-processing
capability on existing data.
Extract Parameter Set allows extracting the test parameters
of an existing data file to create a new test parameter file that
can then be used to run an identical test.
Re-Measure Selected Range brings up a dialog that allows
specifying a range of data points in a raw data file to be re-
measured and generate a new test with the re-measured
data.
E-mail Documents allows attaching one or more open
documents to an e-mail message for easy forwarding of data
files.

Rev. A, P#399783
Window contains functions for arranging and selecting the MDI

windows. These functions include:
Cascade organizes all of the MDI child windows of the
application in a cascaded stack so that just the menu bar of
each window is visible above that of the next window.
Minimize All reduces all MDI child windows of the application
to icon bars in the applications client window.
Close All closes all open MDI child windows.
The Child Window List makes up the rest of this menu item,
showing all of the current MDI child windows of the
application. A checkmark is placed next to the currently active
window. Selecting one of these menu items will activate that
window and bring it to the top of the MDI child stack.
Help contains functions for accessing the online help, as well as

accessing licensing and other information about the EMQuest software.
These functions include:
EMQuest Help displays this help file with the introductory
topic and the table of contents tab selected.
Tip of the Day displays the Tip of the Day dialog, which
provides short hints, tips, and tricks for getting the most out of
the EMQuest software.
License displays the license certificate entry dialog. This
dialog allows loading a new license certificate to change the
available features of the EMQuest software. It also provides
access to the registration dialog used to obtain a permanent
registration license certificate. This dialog displays
automatically the first time the program is run or once a
temporary license has expired.
About EMQuest displays the EMQuest About box, which lists
version information for the application and installed modules.

Rev. A, P#399783
8.1.1 Main Menu Submenus
8.1.1.1 Graph Component

EMQuest utilizes a powerful custom graph component to
provide one of the primary user interfaces to measured data.
This graph component supports a wide variety of graph
formats and functions. The graph component is used in a
variety of places including the test progress window during
data acquisition, the Graph tab of a data file, and in the
report generator templates for data output. Depending on
the dataset being displayed, there may be more than on
graph visible at a time. These multi-graph views can be
toggled between having all of the available graphs visible on
panes at the same time and having each graph on its own
tabbed page. In the pane view, pane splitters allow resizing
each graph in the available viewing space.
While the functionality of the graph component is
intentionally limited in the test progress window, elsewhere
there are a number of user options available. Most functions
are available from the Graph Control Bar buttons, or by right
clicking to bring up the Graph Settings Dialog. Export and
copy functions are also available from the application Main
Menu. The menu and button functions will act on the
selected graph, indicated by the dotted selection rectangle
around the graph window.
8.1.1.2 Exporting and Copying

The visible contents of a selected graph can be exported to
a file or copied to the clipboard exactly as formatted on
screen. The export function (File:Export) supports the
formats of Windows Metafile (WMF), Enhanced Metafile
(EMF), or Windows Bitmap (BMP). Both metafile formats
provide a scaleable image that can be stretched or shrunk
by another application without loss of image quality. The
bitmap image will have the pixel resolution identical to that
seen on the screen. Stretching or shrinking this image will
significantly degrade the image. Copying the graph to the
clipboard, either through the use of the Edit:Copy function or
by the Ctrl-C keyboard shortcut, will place both a metafile
and bitmap image on the clipboard. The type of image that
can be pasted into another application will depend on the
capabilities of that application.

Rev. A, P#399783
8.1.2 Graph Control Bar

The graph control bar provides single click control over the
format and appearance of a selected graph. The available
graph control buttons are grouped together by function and
include:
Multi-Graph View is used when dissimilar data types are generated

by a test.
Panes/Tabs toggles a multi-graph view between multiple
panes on a single page, and full-page graphs displayed on
individual tabs. The default setting of this control for most
multi-graph instances can be adjusted under the
Tools:Options menu.
Link Graph toggles linked graph control on/off in a multi-
graph view. Linked graphs will automatically share
settings such as graph type, scale, viewing angle, etc.
Pressing the link button the first time (or any time that all
graphs are unlinked) will link all graphs in a multi-graph.
As long as more than one graph is linked, the link for any
graph can be toggled on or off to link or separate its
settings from the other graphs.
Graph Type Selection toggles between the available graph types.

Some graph types may be invalid or disabled for a given set of plot
data.
Cartesian selects a simple X-Y plot.
Polar selects a polar plot intended for plotting data vs.
angle.
Cartesian 3-D displays X-Y-Z data as a planar surface
plot.
Spherical displays three-dimensional polar data as a
spherical surface plot.

Rev. A, P#399783
Graph Manipulation Functions allow mouse-oriented control over

the appearance of the selected graph. Not all functions are
available or applicable for all graph types.
Cursor Readout turns the mouse cursor into a marker
readout as it moves over the graph. For line graphs
(Cartesian and polar), the marker reads out the X-Y
position of the cursor in graph units, unless the marker is
near a trace, in which case it reads out the value of the
trace at the X-position under the cursor. Clicking on a
trace in this mode will highlight that trace. For surface
plots (Cartesian 3-D and Spherical) the cursor reads out
the magnitude value corresponding to the color
underneath the tip of the cursor. The value represents
the average of the values at the four corners of the
rectangle containing that color. Given the range of
possible data to be displayed, marker readout displays at
the full numerical resolution of the floating-point value.
The user should be aware that this may not reflect actual
significant digits.
Zoom provides a powerful drag zoom function that
zooms in or out as the mouse drags across the screen.
Clicking and dragging on the graph will change the scale
of the graph up or down along the drag axis by changing
the end points (maximum and minimum) of the graph
axis. Holding control while dragging will change only the
lower limits of the graph, while holding shift and dragging
will change the upper. For polar plots, dragging
horizontally changes the lower radial (Y-axis) limit while
dragging vertically changes the upper limit. While the
drag zoom mode may be used on 3-D surface plots as
well, since it changes the upper and lower limits of the
magnitude (Y) axis, it may produce undesirable results in
the color and scale of the plot.
Pan provides drag panning function for Cartesian plots.
Clicking and dragging on the graph will move the
contents of the graph in the direction of mouse motion by
changing the end points (maximum and minimum) of the
graph axis. The function has no effect on polar or
spherical plots, and will have similar behavior to the zoom
function for Cartesian 3-D plots.

Rev. A, P#399783
Graph Manipulation Functions allow mouse-oriented control over

the appearance of the selected graph. Not all functions are
available or applicable for all graph types.
Zoom Window provides windows zoom function for
Cartesian plots. Clicking and dragging on the graph will
draw a selection rectangle around the drag area.
Releasing the mouse button adjusts the graph scale to
zoom to the selected area. This function has no effect on
polar, Cartesian 3-D, or spherical plots.
Rotate/Zoom provides manipulation of the 3-D graphs.
Clicking and dragging on a 3-D graph will rotate the graph
in the direction of mouse motion. Holding control while
dragging will zoom the view in or out along the screen-
normal direction. Holding shift while dragging will change
the aspect ratio or perspective of the 3-D view. The
larger the aspect ratio, the less depth perception is
provided by the graph.
Zoom Extents sets all axes of the graph to auto-scale,
returning the graph to the original view. This function
does not reset the 3-D zoom/depth adjustments made
with the Rotate/Zoom function.
Spherical Plot Cut Functions provide the ability to slice off

sections of a spherical plot along the three axial planes to all an
"inside view" of the spherical surface. All three buttons toggle
between no cut and either half of the surface, for three possible
settings and nine possible surface cutaways.
X-Z Cut splits the plot along the X-Z plane, showing the
left or right hand side of the surface.
Y-Z Cut splits the plot along the Y-Z plane, showing the
front or back side of the surface.
X-Y Cut splits the plot along the X-Y plane, showing the
top or bottom side of the surface.

Rev. A, P#399783
8.1.3 Graph Settings Dialog

Right clicking on the active graph will bring up the graph
settings dialog. This dialog gives more direct control over
the graph display as well as access to additional settings not
available elsewhere. References to the X, Y, and Z axes are
defined as follows:
The X-axis represents the horizontal axis for a Cartesian
graph, the angular position of a polar plot, the X-axis of a
Cartesian 3-D plot, and the first angular axis of a spherical
plot.
The Y-axis represents the vertical axis for a Cartesian
graph, the radial (magnitude) axis of a polar plot or spherical
plot, and the Z-axis of a Cartesian 3-D plot (for visual
consistency with the Cartesian plot).
The Z-axis is only valid for 3-D plots. It represents theY-axis
of a Cartesian 3-D plot, and the second angular axis of a
spherical plot.
The available functions are separated onto several different
tabs:
Scale contains settings for controlling the scale of the graph.
Auto indicates a series of checkboxes for each axis limit
setting. Checking the box will autoscale that axis limit or
step. Axis limits are scaled to include the available data,
while step size is scaled to the nearest mantissa of 1, 2, or 5
in order to produce ten or fewer grid divisions. By default, all
settings are autoscaled.
X Maximum sets the desired maximum value for the X-axis.
The actual end of the axis will be adjusted to be the nearest
inclusive value allowed based on the setting of the Stepped
Range Limits checkbox for this axis. In logarithmic axis
mode, the axis end will be set to the nearest larger
logarithmic multiple. This value only affects Cartesian and
Cartesian 3-D graphs.
X Minimum sets the desired minimum value for the X-axis.
mode, the axis end will be set to the nearest smaller
logarithmic multiple. This value only affects Cartesian and
Cartesian 3-D graphs.

Rev. A, P#399783
X Step sets the desired gridline step size for the X-axis. The
actual setting will be adjusted to the nearest allowable value.
In logarithmic axis mode, this setting is ignored.
Y Maximum sets the desired maximum value for the Y-axis.
logarithmic multiple.
Y Minimum sets the desired minimum value for the Y-axis.
logarithmic multiple.
Y Step sets the desired gridline step size for the Y-axis. The
Z Maximum sets the desired maximum value for the Z-axis.
logarithmic multiple. This setting only effects the Cartesian
3-D plot. This setting is for future expansion and is currently
unavailable.
Z Minimum sets the desired minimum value for the Z-axis.
logarithmic multiple. This setting only effects the Cartesian
3-D plot. This setting is for future expansion and is currently
unavailable.
Z Step sets the desired gridline step size for the Z-axis. The
Log X toggles the logarithmic axis view on the X-axis. This
feature is only available on a Cartesian plot.
Log Y toggles the logarithmic axis view on the Y-axis. This
feature is only available on Cartesian and Polar plots.

Rev. A, P#399783
Log Z toggles the logarithmic axis view on the Z-axis. This

feature is for future expansion and currently unavailable.
Auto checkboxes beside the Log checkboxes allow the log
axis setting to be set automatically from the dataset.
Grid Moves with lower limit checkboxes control the way
each axis sets its grid. When cleared, the grid is spaced on
integral multiples of the step size, regardless of the axis
limits. When checked, the grid is spaced based on the step
size, starting from the lower limits. Thus, when cleared, a
graph with limits of 1 and 9 and a step size of two would
have gridlines at 2, 4, 6, and 8, while the same graph would
have gridlines at 3, 5, and 7 when the box is checked.
Stepped Range Limits checkboxes control the way each
axis handles the allowed maximum and minimum values of
the axes. When cleared, the axis limits are adjusted to limit
the range to the nearest thousandth of the maximum
absolute value of limits and/or step size for that axis (i.e.
three significant figures of display resolution). When
checked, the axis limits are adjusted to be the nearest
inclusive multiple of the grid step size. When used in
conjunction with autoscaled grid step size, this allows easier
visual evaluation of a signal magnitude, and more closely
matches the way most graphical test equipment operates.
Labels contains settings for labeling the graph and its axes.
Title sets the title of the graph.
X-Axis sets the X-axis label.
Y-Axis sets the Y-axis label.
Z-Axis sets the Z-axis label.
Auto checkboxes for each label toggle between using the
associated label entered into the edit box and automatically
extracting the label from the data set if available.
Polar Axis Orientation allows changing the orientation of
the zero axis of polar plots. By default, zero as at the top of
the graph (i.e. along the vertical or Y axis), but this can be
changed to orient zero along the right hand side of the
graph, along the horizontal or X axis. The latter is common
with most textbook polar representations, and is useful for
reflecting the physical orientation of the AUT during MAPS
based spherical pattern measurements. A global setting is
also available in the Tools:Options menu to set the
preferred default orientation.

Rev. A, P#399783
Traces contains controls for enabling, disabling, and setting

the attributes of individual traces in a 2-D plot. This tab is
only available for Cartesian and polar plots.
The Trace Selection list box provides a list of all traces with
checkboxes beside each one to toggle the trace on or off.
The label for each trace can be edited by clicking on the
label field to enter edit mode. The manually edited label will
override the default label for a given trace, so this
information can be made part of a report template, etc. to
apply that label to report data. If a trace is highlighted on the
graph (using the cursor readout function), that trace will be
highlighted in the list.
Trace Settings allows overriding the settings for each trace.
By default, all traces are set to auto for all settings, allowing
the graph to automatically determine the next available color
and line type for each trace. When set to auto, the behavior
on a black and white output device (i.e. printer) is adjusted to
account for the lack of colors. The settings can be
overridden on individual traces or a group of traces at once.
The available settings include:
Color selects the desired color for the trace from the
standard 16-color palette, or allows entering a custom color.
Line Type selects the line type from the ten available styles.
Trace Width selects the trace width up to ten times the
standard width. Note that the larger widths may be
impractical for most graphs.
Mark Type selects the mark to use for each data point. This
feature is currently unimplemented but is present for future
expansion.
Legend Entry checkbox controls the entry of the trace into
the graph legend. When cleared, the trace is not included in
the legend. Clearing this checkbox for all traces prevents
the legend from being drawn.
Auto scale to visible traces only when checked, will
change the autoscaling behavior so that only visible traces
are used to determine the scale. When cleared, all traces
are used to determine the scale. The default setting of this
control can be adjusted under the Tools:Options menu.
Show All sets all of the checkboxes in the trace selection
list.

Rev. A, P#399783
Hide All clears all of the checkboxes in the trace selection

list. Note: If no traces are selected, the first trace will be
displayed by the graph.
3-D contains settings for 3-D plots and is only available for
those plots.
Azimuth indicates the rotation angle around the Z-axis
direction. All rotations are performed around the center of
the plot area. This rotation is applied to the data first.
Elevation indicates the rotation angle around the X-axis
direction for spherical plots and around the horizontal screen
axis for Cartesian 3-D. All rotations are performed around
the center of the plot area. This rotation is applied to the
data second.
Roll indicates the rotation angle around the Y-axis direction
for spherical plots. It is not used for Cartesian 3-D plots. All
rotations are performed around the center of the plot area.
This rotation is applied to the data last.
Magnification controls the size of the 3-D image in the plot
window. A magnification of one is normal full scale. The
larger the number, the larger the plot image displayed.
Aspect Ratio sets the perspective or depth perception of the
3-D plot. A value of 5 is the default and a value of 2 is the
minimum. As the aspect ratio approaches infinity, the
perspective goes to zero (no depth perception).
Grid Step Size sets the 3-D grid step size in percent of full
scale for Cartesian 3-D plots and in degrees for spherical
plots. The data is interpolated as necessary when
generating the 3-D grid.
Animation allows entering settings to animate the rotation of
a 3-D graph. Note that CPU speed and 3-D grid step size
will have a large impact on the available frame rate of this
feature. While it is possible to animate linked graphs, it is
not recommended for slow machines, and care must be
exercised to avoid potential problems. Only one linked
graph should have animation enabled at any time. Also,
Windows limits the number of timers available for
simultaneous use, so animating multiple unlinked graphs
may result in exceptions due to reaching that limit.

Rev. A, P#399783
Animate 3-D Rotation enables animation of a 3-D plot when

checked. The visible graph will be rotated the specified
number of degrees horizontally and vertically at each step.
The rotation is performed similar to that created using the
rotation cursor control.
Horizontal Step allows entering the desired rotation step
around the vertical screen axis in degrees.
Vertical Step allows entering the desired rotation step
around the horizontal screen axis in degrees.
Frame Rate allows specifying the desired frame rate for the
animation. Slower machines and/or complex graphs and
graph combinations will not be able to reach high frame
rates. Setting this to a high number will cause the computer
to spend all of its processing power animating the graph and
leave little time for it to respond to user input.
Dimension Depth contains settings for multi-dimensional
datasets and will only be visible if there are more than one
trace.
Reduce dataset by N dimension(s) allows reducing the
displayed dataset. For each dimension that the dataset is
reduced (up to the maximum of the current dataset) a slider
will appear in the dialog to allow selection of the desired
value of each reduced dimension. When reduced dataset is
being viewed in the graph, a button will appear under the
cursor when hovering in the upper right hand corner of the
graph window. Pressing this button will expand a panel that
contains similar dimension value sliders to allow real-time
manipulation of the visible data. When the data exceeds a
certain size (currently 100,000 points), the graph will
automatically reduce the view by one or more dimensions on
initial display if the dataset is multi-dimensional. This avoids
requiring an excessive time to plot a large dataset when a
file is first loaded.
Dimension Value Slider(s) are shown for each dimension
that the dataset has been reduced. These sliders allow
selecting the desired value to be viewed for that dimension.
Each dimension value defines the path into the dataset for
the resulting plot data.

Rev. A, P#399783
8.2 Data Table Component

EMQuest utilizes a text grid component for displaying tabular data.
This grid component allows viewing, exporting, and copying of
measured data, as well as parameter and data entry. The grid
component is used in a variety of places including the Table tab of
a data file and in various parameter frames and dialogs.
Most functions are available from the application Main Menu,
although there are a couple of button functions for the data table.
The menu and button functions will act on the selected table.
8.2.1 Exporting and Copying

The contents of a selected data table can be exported to a
file or copied to the clipboard. The export function
(File:Export) supports the formats of Comma Separated
Variables (CSV), Tab Delimited Text (TXT), and Microsoft
Excel Spreadsheets (XLS). The latter requires a copy of
Microsoft Excel be installed in order to export to an Excel
spreadsheet. An Export to Excel Worksheet button, , is
also provided, which will start Excel and send the table
directly to a new worksheet. Both of the Excel export
options use dynamic data exchange (DDE) and object
linking and embedding (OLE) to transfer all of the tabular
information including grid background colors, etc. As such,
the export process can be extremely slow, especially when
large tables are involved. For rapid export to Excel, use the
CSV format, which is recognized automatically by Excel.
In addition to exporting the table, all or part of the data can
be copied to the clipboard and pasted directly to an Excel
spreadsheet or other application. Where the grid component
is used for input, data can be pasted to the grid as well.

Rev. A, P#399783
8.2.1.1 Viewing All Data vs. Selected Points

Pressing the Selected/All Data button toggles between
viewing all measured data and the selected points specified
under Output Points on the Output parameters tab. By
entering desired output points, the visible data set can be
reduced. Tabular data will be interpolated or extrapolated as
necessary, so care should be taken to avoid selected output
points that produce erroneous output. For large datasets,
the output points may be used to reduce the visible tabular
data to a more manageable size. When the data exceeds a
certain size (currently 100,000 points), the grid component
will warn that filling the grid will take an excessive amount of
time, allowing the user to avoid displaying the un-reduced
dataset.
8.3 Document Editor/Report Generator
8.3.1 Template Editor

EMQuest contains a word-processor style template editor
used to generate report templates and display automatically
generated reports using those templates. The template
editor provides a "what you see is what you get"
(WYSIWYG) environment with functions similar to those
found in Microsoft Word. Fields for desired parameters,
graphs, or tabular data can be entered into the template and
formatted as necessary. Once the template has been
created, it may be selected under the "Output" node of the
test parameters in order to format the data output.
Formatted output can be printed directly or exported to an
RTF file to be imported into Microsoft Word or other word
processor for additional modifications.
The template editor window contains common word
processing controls such as a ruler, status bar, and tool bar.
For information on the available commands and toolbar
buttons, refer to the Main Menu. The template editor
contains two tabs at the bottom of the window. These tabs
allow switching between the Template View and the Report
View. In the Template View, the report template is shown
with all fields showing the actual field name/code. Upon
switching to the Report View, a merge is performed with any
associated datafile, and the actual report that would be

Rev. A, P#399783
generated by the template is shown. Note that while it is

possible to edit the report generated in the report view, the
edits will not translate back to the template. The template
editor is not available in Lite versions of EMQuest.
The report view is also used to facilitate the Print Preview
mode, which shows the report to be generated prior to
sending to a printer. The print preview can be exported to
an RTF file for import to a word processor.
8.4 Data File Window
8.4.1 Test Parameters Page

The Parameters page is used to select or display the
desired test method, and to enter and/or review test
parameters required to perform that test. For test parameter
files, test selection and parameter entry is allowed, while for
data files, only parameter review is allowed, with the
exception of output related parameters. The Parameters
page consists of the test selection box, the parameter tree,
and the parameter edit/view frame.
The Test Select combobox at the top right of the page
allows selection of the desired test or displays the currently
selected or measured test. Once a test type is displayed in
the test selection box, the Parameter Tree will contain
nodes representing the various types of parameter
information required by the test. The available nodes will
vary depending on the test, but some typical nodes include:
Test Information is used for selection of the desired test
and entry of IUT information.
Operator/Comments is used for entry of test operator
information, comments, and similar information.
Parameters is used for entry of test specific parameters.

Rev. A, P#399783
Corrections is used for entry or selection of correction

factors for various measurement components (i.e. cable
loss, amplifier gain, range calibrations, etc.). This may be
have one panel for all corrections, or, for more complicated
tests, may open to branches with panels for each specific
type of correction data.
Frequency Range(s) is a placeholder for a list of
parameters for multi-range tests, or contains the frequency
range information for single range tests.
Range # is used for entering range specific configuration
information. Additional nodes beneath this one provide
additional range specific configurations for equipment, etc.
Note that not all equipment will support all possible
configurations offered by this node.
Equipment is used for selection of test equipment supported
by the test for the corresponding range. Each selected piece
of equipment will add a node to the tree-view beneath the
Equipment node, allowing entry of test specific equipment
configuration information (i.e. bandwidth, points per trace,
rotational speed, etc.)
Paths allows entry of source and output directories/files that
differ from the default paths configured under Tools :
Options.
Output allows the entry of selected data points for
interpolated/extrapolated output.
Notification allows configuring an alert sound or e-mail
notification at the completion of the test. The settings in this
dialog will override the global notifications settings in the
Tools : Options menu.
Ancillary Equipment allows selecting specialized settings
for specific types of equipment (i.e. switches and positioners)
not normally required to perform the test, in order to set them
to predefined states at certain points in the test.
If any node has additional parameter nodes under it, there
will be a [+] symbol by the node name. Clicking on that [+]
will open the parameter branch to show the additional
parameter nodes. Clicking on a node will display the
associated Parameter Frame below the test selection box.
For parameter files, this will allow setting of any available
parameters associated with the node. The contents of a
given parameter frame depends on the particular test and
node selected. For information on the individual settings for

Rev. A, P#399783
a given piece of equipment, use the context sensitive help

either by selecting the control in question and pressing F1,
or by pressing the button and then selecting the control or
function group of interest.
8.4.2 Graph Page

The Graph page is used to review acquired data in graphical
format. It will only be visible for data files that contain
graphable data. Depending on the available data set and
data type, there will be one or more graphs which can be
displayed in one or more formats. For more information on
graphing capabilities, refer to the documentation on the
graph component.
8.4.3 Table Page

The Table page is used to review acquired data in tabular
form. It will only be visible for data files that contain tabular
data. Depending on the complexity of the data set, the table
will be formatted to show measured and/or post-processed
data in columns as a function of the various independent
parameters (frequency, angle, height, polarization, etc.) used
to acquire the data. For more information on tabular
capabilities, refer to the documentation on the data table
component .
8.4.4 Measurement Progress Page

The Measurement Progress page provides feedback to the
user as data is acquired. This may be in the form of
graphical data and/or various static values, depending on the
test.

Rev. A, P#399783
8.5 Equipment Control Panel

The equipment control panel is used to install and configure the
various test equipment that will be used to perform the data
acquisition tests provided with the EMQuest package. Based on
the options purchased with the EMQuest package, there will be a
number of equipment drivers that have been installed and enabled
by the license certificate. Before running a test, EMQuest needs to
know what equipment is connected to the computer as well as
information on how to communicate with it and what options are
installed on the equipment. This is done by adding instances of the
equipment driver configurations for each piece of equipment that
will be used.
The driver selection tree is displayed on the left hand side of the
control panel. The available equipment drivers are subdivided into
various categories organized by generic device types (spectrum
analyzer, network analyzer, linear positioner, rotational positioner,
hybrid, etc.) The categories listed are determined by the available
drivers; a category will only be listed if at least one driver of that
type is installed and enabled. Clicking on the [+] symbol next to a
category name will open that branch of the tree listing the available
driver types beneath it. Right clicking on a driver name will provide
a menu option to Add New that, when clicked, will create a new
instance of the equipment, giving it a unique name and placing it as
a node under the driver name. If any of the drivers have existing
instances already configured, there will be a [+] symbol by the
driver name. Clicking on that [+] will open the driver branch to
show the configured instances of that equipment type.
Clicking on the name of an equipment instance will show the
equipment configuration pane on the right hand side of the control
panel. This will allow setting of any available device configuration
information. For information on the individual settings for a given
piece of equipment, use the context sensitive help either by
selecting the control in question and pressing F1, or by pressing the
button and then selecting the control or function group of
interest.
Clicking again on the name of a selected equipment instance
allows renaming that instance. This allows entering a more
descriptive name for each instance to aid in identifying it later.
Each equipment instance must have a unique name and each
name must conform to the requirements of a Windows long file
name.

Rev. A, P#399783
Right clicking on the name of an equipment instance will show a

menu that will allow you to Duplicate the instance, automatically
assigning it a new unique name, or to Delete the selected instance.
The duplicate option provides an easy way to create two instances
with identical option settings. All that is required is that the GPIB
address of the duplicate instance be changed to reflect the address
of the second device.
8.5.1 Equipment Configurations

Most equipment drivers support pre-defined configurations
that can be added under the configuration node for that
equipment instance. Right-clicking on the Equipment
Configurations node under a configuration node will bring
up a menu to allow defining pre-configured test parameter
settings for the device. Each new configuration will appear
in its own node with a default name. Right clicking a
configuration node gives additional menu items to delete or
rename the node. Once defined, these pre-configured
settings can be used to quickly set up equipment in a test
parameter file. Right-click on the equipment parameter page
in a parameter file to access the pre-configured parameter
list for the selected equipment. For most instruments, the
exercise dialog also supports a right-click menu applying
settings from the pre-configured parameters.
8.5.2 Ancillary Configurations

For equipment drivers that support ancillary equipment
states, the control panel supports pre-defined ancillary
configurations that can be added under the configuration
node for that equipment instance. Right-clicking on the
Ancillary Configurations node under a configuration node
will bring up a menu to allow defining pre-configured
ancillary parameter settings for the device. Each new
configuration will appear in its own node with a default name.
Right clicking an ancillary configuration node gives additional
menu items to delete or rename the node. Once defined,
these pre-configured settings can be used to quickly set up
ancillary equipment in a test parameter file. Right-click on
the ancillary equipment parameter page in a parameter file
to access the pre-configured parameter list for the selected
equipment. For some instruments, the exercise dialog also

Rev. A, P#399783
supports a right-click menu applying settings from the pre-

configured ancillary parameters.
8.5.3 Equipment Configuration Pane

This pane of the equipment control panel displays the
configuration panel for the selected equipment configuration
instance. It allows the review and setting of any available
device configuration information. The base configuration
information required will be that necessary to establish
communication with the device and define any optional
features or capabilities installed on the device. Information
required to configure the device for a specific test will be
entered into the parameter page of the equipment once it
has been selected for use in the test parameters.
In addition to the base configuration, most equipment drivers
allow adding pre-defined test parameter settings to the
equipment configuration. This allows definition of commonly
used equipment parameters for quick setup of new test
parameter files. Equipment that supports this feature will
show their configuration panel on the first page (Equipment
Settings) of a set of tabbed pages lined up across the
bottom of the window. Additional pre-defined parameter
pages may be added to the equipment configuration by right-
clicking on the configuration pane. Right clicking on a
parameter page will allow renaming or deleting the page, as
well as adding another page. In the equipment parameter
node of a parameter set, right clicking on the page will
display a list of the available pre-defined parameters for that
equipment, allowing the parameters to be updated from the
selected configuration. Some exercise dialogs also support
a right click menu to set the device to the pre-defined state.
For more information on the individual settings for a given
piece of equipment, use the context sensitive help either by
selecting the control in question and pressing F1, or by
pressing the button and then selecting the control or
function group of interest.

Rev. A, P#399783
9 Licensing and Registration
9.1 Entering License Certificates

The License Certificate dialog allows entering a license certificate
to enable the functionality of the EMQuest package. Refer to the
Getting Started section on license certificates for more information
on the different types of certificates, where to find them, and how to
use them.
To enable EMQuest, copy and paste the entire license certificate,
including header and footer information, into the edit box of the
License Certificate dialog. It wont hurt if there is additional text
outside the header or footer of the certificate. The Ctrl-V or Shift-
Insert keyboard shortcuts can be used to paste the certificate into
the control, or right click on the box and select paste. Press the Ok
button to accept the new certificate. If there is any problem with the
certificate that was entered, a message box will indicate the cause
of the error.
Once a valid license certificate has been entered, the application
will restart, or, if the license dialog was shown at application start,
complete the initialization process.
The License Certificate dialog also provides access to the
Registration Information dialog by pressing the Register button.
In order to permanently enable the EMQuest software with all
licensed features, it is necessary to send in a registration form and
certificate in order to receive a full registration certificate. The
registration must be performed on the machine for which the
license is to be granted, since the registration certificate will lock
the software to that machine only. Note: Registration is only
required if you have purchased a fully licensed copy of EMQuest. If
you are using a demo or evaluation copy of EMQuest, please do
not send in the registration information.
9.1.1 Entering Registration Information

The Registration Information dialog allows entry and
automatic delivery of required registration information. This
registration information must be provided prior to obtaining a
full registration license certificate to permanently enable all
purchased functions. The available fields and functions
include:

Rev. A, P#399783
Send automatically sends the entered registration

information to ets-lindgren.com through an available
Messaging API (MAPI) compliant e-mail program. If the
attempt to send the registration fails, a message box will
appear warning of the failure.
Register brings up a dialog to allow manual submission of
the registration. This dialog will display the registration
information in a text box, allowing the user to copy and paste
the registration information to another location. The dialog
will indicate the location to e-mail the registration to, or if e-
mail is totally unavailable, the registration can be saved to a
text file on a 3.5" floppy and mailed in. The registration
information MUST be received in electronic format to allow
generating the registration license certificate.
Cancel closes the registration dialog.
Authorized User: is for entering the company, organization,
or division name that will appear in the "registered to:"
location in the "About" box. This should normally NOT be
the name of an individual.
Name: is the name of the primary contact for this copy of
the software.
Company: is the company name of the registered owner of
the license.
Address:, City:, State:, Zip:, & Country: allow the entry of
the mailing address of the primary contact.
Phone: is the phone number of the primary contact.
Fax: is the fax number of the primary contact.
E-Mail: is the e-mail address of the primary contact. This
information is required to automatically receive the
registration license certificate via e-mail.
Comments: any comments entered here will automatically
be added to the registration message.

Rev. A, P#399783
9.2 Submitting Registration Information

If the registration information cant be e-mailed automatically from
the Registration Information dialog, this dialog can be used to
manually submit the registration information. This dialog will
display the registration information in a text box, allowing the user
to copy and paste the registration information to another location, or
save it to a text file by pressing the Save As button. The dialog
will indicate the location to e-mail the registration to, or if e-mail is
totally unavailable, the registration can be saved to a text file using
the Save As option and mailed in on a 3.5" floppy disk. The
registration information MUST be received in electronic format to
allow generating the registration license certificate. Do not send in
hard copy registration information.

Rev. A, P#399783

Rev. A, P#399783
10 Tools
10.1 Options Dialog

The Options dialog, available from the Tools menu, provides control
over a number of global preference settings for EMQuest. Many of
the default behaviors of various controls can be set from this dialog.
These settings are divided among a number of tabbed entries,
which include:
Preferences tab contains many of the basic preference settings for
application.
General Preferences control functionality of the main application.
Most recently used file list: allows setting the desired number of
entries in the most recently used file list under the File menu. The
default is four, but can be increased up to 14.
Print button skips print dialog (quick print) will, when checked,
cause the print button on the button bar to print immediately,
without displaying the printer select dialog. The print function from
the File menu will still operate normally.
Migrate parameters on test selection change causes the
matching parameters to be maintained between parameter sets
when the test selection is changed for a parameter file. When
checked, EMQuest will map as many parameters as possible from
the original parameter tree to the new parameter tree for the newly
selected test. Note that not all parameters have the same range of
values or same meaning for different tests, so the user must take
care to inspect the parameters to make sure the migration set all
parameters as desired prior to executing a test.
Data Acquisition Preferences control behavior of tests and
related data acquisition functionality.
Always prompt for IUT preparation at start of test will, when
checked, force any optional dialogs to prompt the user to setup the
instrument(s) under test prior to recording any data. These dialog
will normally display automatically between any equipment
initialization and the beginning of the data acquisition process, but
wont display if no equipment initialization is required (due to having
been configured properly before a previous test).

Rev. A, P#399783
Run test measurements in threads will use versions of the tests

designed to run in their own Windows thread. Threaded tests
operate separately from the user interface thread so that user
interactions with the program will have less impact on the data
acquisition process. While such interaction will still require
processor time and slow the measurement process, it will not
completely stop. The default is to run threaded tests. This option is
only provided temporarily during the migration process to threaded
tests in order to allow reverting to a non-threaded test should
problems be encountered. It will probably be removed by the next
release of the software.
Graphs tab contains global settings for the graphing components.
Default Settings list a number of graph settings that can have their
default values defined globally.
Polar graphs have zero along vertical (Y) axis and Polar graphs
have zero along horizontal (X) axis change the orientation of the
zero axis of polar plots. By default, zero as at the top of the graph
(i.e. along the vertical or Y axis), but this can be changed to orient
zero along the right hand side of the graph, along the horizontal or
X axis. The latter is common with most textbook polar
representations, and is useful for reflecting the physical orientation
of the AUT during MAPS based spherical pattern measurements.
Auto scale to visible traces only when checked, will change the
autoscaling behavior so that only visible traces are used to
determine the scale. When cleared, all traces are used to
determine the scale.
Multi-Graph displays default to panes and Multi-Graph displays
default to tabs determine the default setting for graphs in new data
files and most other multi-graph displays. They can either show
initially in the normal multi-graph view where all graphs are visible
simultaneously or where all each graph is on a separate tab. Note
that this setting will not affect data files that are reloaded after
saving their graph settings. Those files will display in the exact
same format as prior to saving.
Directories tab contains global settings for the location of various
input and output directories. The desired path may be entered
directly into the edit boxes, or the Browse buttons beside each
box can be used to bring up a file dialog and find the desired file or
path on the computer. Leaving a field blank will return it to the
default setting. The combobox dropdown contains a recently used
list of values for each field.
Output Data Storage Paths allow customizing the target storage
location for the specified test. These paths include:

Rev. A, P#399783
History List, which controls where the test history database is

stored. This allows maintaining different history lists for different
groups of testing. When this selection is changed, EMQuest will
switch to the test database in the corresponding directory, creating
a new one if necessary.
Raw Data, which controls where automatically generated raw data
files will be stored at the end of a test or after update of an existing
raw data file. This setting can be overridden by the corresponding
setting in the parameter file.
Final Data, which controls the default path for individual final data
files when Save As is used to save the processed data from a
raw data file. This setting can be overridden by the corresponding
setting in the parameter file.
Source Data Files, which allow specifying the location of certain
special files that may be useful. These paths include:
Standard allows the selection of a reference file for comparison to
measured data for certain file types. This setting can be overridden
by the corresponding setting in the parameter file.
Note: This feature will be supported in a later revision, but is

provided to maintain backwards compatibility.
Output Templates, which allow selection of report template (.RTT)

files for generating formatted output. These paths include:
Report specifies the main report template used to output a
customized report. This template is used when the print function is
activated from the Parameters tab. This setting can be overridden
by the corresponding setting in the parameter file.
Graph specifies the template used to output the selected graph on
the Graph page. In this case, the current settings and appearance
of the selected graph override any settings embedded in the
template to allow capture of the current graph view. This setting
can be overridden by the corresponding setting in the parameter
file.
Alerts tab contains global settings for e-mail and audio alert
notifications. These settings may be overridden on the Notifications
tab of a parameter file.

Rev. A, P#399783
E-Mail Notification provides options for e-mailing notifications on

various test conditions. E-Mail notification requires a properly
configured Simple MAPI compatible e-mail program without any
security restrictions against background e-mailing. This feature is
useful for remote monitoring of an unattended test or automatic
notification of test progress to supervisory personnel.
Send e-mail notification on test completion, when checked, will
generate an e-mail to those addresses in the list upon successful
completion of a test.
Attach raw data file to e-mail causes the just measured raw data
file to be attached to the test completion e-mail. This is useful for
remote analysis of data using a post-processing license of
EMQuest.
Send e-mail notification on errors or warnings will, when
checked, generate an e-mail to those addresses in the list upon
popup of an error or warning dialog.
E-mail address list contains the list of e-mail contacts that will
receive the automatic notifications caused by the checkboxes listed
above. Double-click on an address to remove or edit it.
Add e-mail contact adds a new address to the E-Mail address list.
Type in the address and press Add to add it to the list.
Alert Sound, provides options for playing an alert sound on various
test conditions.
Play alert sound on test completion, when checked, will play the
selected alert wave file upon successful completion of a test.
Use continuous play will, when checked, cause the alert sound to
be repeated continuously until a user intervenes. Clearing the
checkbox will cause the alert to play only once.
Alert wave file allows specifying the desired wave file for the alert.
Press the Browse button to search for the desired wave file.
Operators tab contains a list of test operators that can be selected
from the Operator combobox under the Operator/Comments node
of the parameter tree.
Test Operator List contains the list and list editor field. To add an
entry to the list, type it into the edit box and press Add. To remove
or edit an entry, double click on the entry in the list box and it will be
removed from the list and placed in the edit box for editing.
Instrument Types tab contains a list of instrument under test (IUT)
types that can be selected from the Type combobox under the Test
Information node of the parameter tree.

Rev. A, P#399783
Instrument Under Test (IUT) Type List contains the list and list
editor field. To add an entry to the list, type it into the edit box and
press Add. To remove or edit an entry, double click on the entry in
the list box and it will be removed from the list and placed in the edit
box for editing.
Manufacturers tab contains a list of instrument under test (IUT)
manufacturers that can be selected from the Manufacturer
combobox under the Test Information node of the parameter tree.
Instrument Under Test (IUT) Manufacturer List contains the list
and list editor field. To add an entry to the list, type it into the edit
box and press Add. To remove or edit an entry, double click on the
entry in the list box and it will be removed from the list and placed in
the edit box for editing.
Instrument Models tab contains a list of instrument under test
(IUT) model numbers that can be selected from the Model
combobox under the Test Information node of the parameter tree.
Instrument Under Test (IUT) Model Number List contains the list
and list editor field. To add an entry to the list, type it into the edit
box and press Add. To remove or edit an entry, double click on the
entry in the list box and it will be removed from the list and placed in
the edit box for editing.
10.2 Tabular Data Graphing Tool

This tool allows entering 2-D and 3-D datasets in order to use the
graphing capabilities of EMQuest to view the data. Data can be
pasted into the table on the Enter Data tab from another
spreadsheet in EMQuest or from a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
Then, by toggling to the View Graph tab, the corresponding data
can be viewed in graphical format. The graph can be exported
from this view similar to any other data set graph. The View Data
tab shows the data in tabular form for verification of how the
entered data was interpreted.
The pictures below illustrate the format for entering data. The axes
can be manually labeled as indicated in the first screen shot, or the
comboboxes can be used to set up the axis labels and units as
indicated in the second screenshot.

Rev. A, P#399783
Note: This tool has been added as a bonus feature to the EMQuest
package, and is not directly supported under any technical support or
maintenance agreements. It is provided as-is and may be enhanced as
resources allow.

Rev. A, P#399783
11 Measurements
11.1 Generic Test Parameters
11.1.1 IUT Panes

The IUT Pane(s) are used to describe the instrument(s)
under test. In keeping with common calibration terminology,
the device(s) being measured or calibrated is referred to as
Instrumentation, and the test and measurement equipment
used to perform the measurement is referred to as
Equipment. This terminology will be used regularly
throughout the EMQuest application and documentation.
Depending on the test, however, the descriptor at the top of
the IUT pane(s) may be customized to refer to specific
instrument types (such as "antenna under test" (AUT)). For
a test with multiple IUTs, indexing information may also be
contained in the labels. In addition, drag-and-drop capability
is supported to allow rearranging the order of IUTs in the list.
The information recorded for each IUT is as follows:
Manufacturer allows entry of the IUT manufacturer or
selection from a predefined list.
Model allows entry of the IUT model number or selection
from a predefined list.
Serial Number allows entry of the IUT serial number or
Type allows entry of the IUT device type information or
The data for each predefined list can be entered using Tools
: Options.

Rev. A, P#399783
11.1.2 Operator/Comments Pane

The Operator/Comments Pane is used to enter additional
information about the test, including the test operator and
any other incidental information not covered by other
parameters in the parameter tree. The available fields
include:
Operator allows entry of the test operator or selection from a
predefined list. The data for the predefined list can be
entered using Tools : Options.
Comments provides a large text field for entering any user
comments or setup description information not addressed by
other test parameters.
Test Time consists of a group of fields as follows:
Test Start Time is a read only field indicating what time and
date the test execution began. This value is automatically
generated when the test is run, and cannot be entered into
the parameter list manually.
Test End Time is a read only field indicating what time and
date the test execution completed. This value is
automatically generated when the test is run, and cannot be
entered into the parameter list manually.
Test Duration is a read only field indicating how long the
test took to complete. This value is automatically generated
when the test is run, and cannot be entered into the
parameter list manually.
Temperature/Humidity consists of a group of fields as
follows:
Temperature is used to record the temperature at the time
of the test. If an automatic temperature sensor and driver
are available, this measurement can be automated.
Humidity is used to record the humidity at the time of the
test. If an automatic humidity sensor and driver are
available, this measurement can be automated.

Rev. A, P#399783
11.1.3 Frequency Range Pane

The Frequency Range Pane provides for the entry of
frequency information for most tests. Some tests may
support multiple ranges and provide multiple frequency
range panes, each with their own equipment configurations.
Frequency Range Type, which allows the selection of one
of three different frequency range formats:
Linear Frequency is the default format, with frequency
points spaced linearly between a start and stop frequency.
This mode is supported by most available test equipment.
List Frequency switches to the list frequency display and
provides a table for entry of the desired discrete frequency
points. Note: Not all equipment has this capability, and the
number of available frequency points varies by equipment
type and manufacturer. Refer to your equipment
documentation for more information on available list or
segmented frequency range settings. The result of using list
frequency for unsupported equipment or with too many list
points is undefined.
Log Frequency records data with frequency points spaced
logarithmically between a start and stop frequency. Note:
Not all equipment has this capability, and the range of
frequencies where logarithmic frequency data is valid varies
by equipment type and manufacturer. Refer to your
equipment documentation for more information on available
log frequency range settings. The result of using log
frequency for unsupported equipment or outside the
frequency bands supported by the equipment is undefined.
Frequency Range allows the selection of the frequency
range for linear and log frequency ranges. The settings
include:
Start allows entry of the desired starting frequency of the
frequency range in MHz. Changing this value will
automatically adjust the center and span settings
appropriately.
Stop allows entry of the desired ending frequency of the
automatically adjust the center and span settings
appropriately.

Rev. A, P#399783
Center allows entry of the desired center frequency of the

automatically adjust the start and stop settings appropriately.
Span allows entry of the desired span of the frequency
range in MHz. Changing this value will automatically adjust
the start and stop settings appropriately. This value can only
be changed for user defined frequency ranges.
Range Control determines how the frequency information
will be handled and overrides certain frequency range
settings. The range control selections are:
Zero Span, which will force the frequency range to zero
span and automatically lock start, stop, and center frequency
settings to the same value. This is the desired mode when
the exact frequency of the received signal is known and/or
time dependent data acquisition is required. In zero span
mode, swept devices will generate data as a function of
sweep time at the specified frequency. The mode can also
provide the fastest sweep time for CW measurements.
Setting the Span setting to zero will normally generate the
same result.
Default Span sets the frequency span at test time based on
the bandwidth setting. This mode is used primarily for
signals that may not be located exactly at the specified
center frequency. It allows the use of a max marker search
to track the peak within a small band.
User Defined allows complete control of the start, stop,
center, and span settings of the frequency range.
Discrete Frequency Points provides the table for entering
list frequency points.

Rev. A, P#399783
11.1.4 Corrections Pane

The Corrections Pane allows the entry of constant and/or
frequency dependent corrections to be applied to measured
data. A given test may have one or more correction sets to
be applied to different portions of the data. Each set of
corrections will have its own pane in the parameter tree.
The available settings are as follows:
The Corrections list box holds a list of response file names
for frequency dependent corrections. The response files can
be either .RSP files or raw data files (.RAW) from a response
measurement. Each file name will have a "+" or "-" in front
of it to indicate that the corresponding data will be either
added to or subtracted from the measured data. Note: The
user must ensure that the files in the list match the expected
format, units, and required frequency range to avoid
unpredictable results. Otherwise extrapolation or other
errors may result. While it is possible to apply specialized
corrections to intentionally change the data type and
meaning of the resulting data (i.e. apply a correction of +107
dB to convert from dBm to dBV), the data will still maintain
the original labeling information. Therefore, while the expert
user can take advantage of this capability, appropriate
measures should be taken to provide comments or other
indications to document the intended effect of the special
corrections.
The following buttons are used to edit the corrections list:
Add displays the file open dialog box to search for a
response file to add to the measured data. The path to the
selected file will be appended to the end of the list with a "+"
in front of it to indicate that the data will be added to the
measured result.
Subtract displays the file open dialog box to search for a
selected file will be appended to the end of the list with a "-"
in front of it to indicate that the data will be subtracted from
the measured result.
Remove deletes the selected path from the list.
Toggle Sign toggles the selected entry between adding and
subtracting from the measured result.
The Constant edit box allows the entry of a single constant
correction to be applied to all data points.

Rev. A, P#399783
11.1.5 Paths Pane

The Paths Pane allows specifying source and output
directories/files for this particular parameter or data file that
differ from the default paths configured under Tools :
Options. These include:
Output Data Storage Paths, which allow customizing the
target storage location for the specified test. These paths
include:
Raw Data, which controls where automatically generated
raw data files will be stored at the end of a test or after
update of an existing raw data file.
Final Data, which controls the default path for individual final
data files when Save As is used to save the processed
data from a raw data file.
Source Data Files, which allow specifying the location of
certain special files that may be useful. These paths include:
Standard allows the selection of a reference file for
comparison to measured data for certain file types. Note:
This feature will be supported in a later revision, but is
provided to maintain backwards compatibility.
Output Templates, which allow selection of report template
(.RTT) files for generating formatted output. These paths
include:
Report specifies the main report template used to output a
customized report. This template is used when the print
function is activated from the Parameters tab.
Graph specifies the template used to output the selected
graph on the Graph page. In this case, the current settings
and appearance of the selected graph override any settings
embedded in the template to allow capture of the current
graph view.
The desired path may be entered directly into the edit boxes,
or the Browse buttons beside each box can be used to
bring up a file dialog and find the desired file or path on the
computer. Leaving a field blank will return it to the default
setting. The combobox dropdown contains a recently used
list of values for each field.

Rev. A, P#399783
11.1.6 Output Pane

The Output Pane is used to configure any available
formatting parameters for data review and output. These
include:
Y-Axis Format allows formatting the number of digits to
display for the Y-axis (actual measured data) values. The
available settings include:
Override Default Formatting, when checked, will use the
format information specified here in place of the default
format defined by the test for all Y values.
Width specifies the desired minimum width of the floating-
point value in characters. The output value will be padded
with zeros on the left as needed to reach the requested
width. Specifying a width less than the available number of
digits will have no effect.
Precision specifies the desired number of digits to be
displayed after the decimal place. The output value will be
padded with zeros on the right as needed to reach the
requested number of digits after the decimal.
Example Output shows the effect of the previous two
settings on a floating-point number.
Output Points provides a table with a column for each
available X-axis that supports formatting. By entering values
into each column, the tabular data shown on the Table page
and the tabular data generated by a report can be aligned to
the requested values. The data will automatically be
interpolated or extrapolated as necessary to align it with the
requested points. Note: The requested points should lie
within the expected range of data to avoid extrapolation
errors that could result in erroneous data.
Right clicking on the table will provide a menu with options
for filling or clearing a range, as well as formatting the output
X-axis values of the selected column.

Rev. A, P#399783
11.1.7 Notification Pane

The Notification Pane allows overriding the default event
notification features set under Tools : Options for the
associated parameter file. The available settings include:
Notification Options, control the behavior of the
notifications:
Use Default Notification Options, when checked, will use
the notification options set in Tools : Options instead of
those in the parameter file. Clear this checkbox to enable
the parameter file notification settings.
E-Mail Notification, provides options for e-mailing
notifications on various test conditions. E-Mail notification
requires a properly configured Simple MAPI compatible e-
mail program without any security restrictions against
background e-mailing. This feature is useful for remote
monitoring of an unattended test or automatic notification of
test progress to supervisory personnel.
Send E-Mail Notification on Test Completion, when
checked, will generate an e-mail to those addresses in the
list upon successful completion of a test.
Attach Raw Data File causes the just measured raw data
file to be attached to the test completion e-mail. This is
useful for remote analysis of data using a post-processing
license of EMQuest.
Send E-Mail Notification on Errors or Warnings will, when
checked, generate an e-mail to those addresses in the list
upon popup of an error or warning dialog.
E-Mail Address List contains the list of e-mail contacts that
will receive the automatic notifications caused by the
checkboxes listed above. Double-click on an address to
remove or edit it.
Add E-Mail Contact adds a new address to the E-Mail
address list. Type in the address and press Add to add it to
the list.
Alert Sound, provides options for playing an alert sound on
various test conditions.
Play Alert Sound on Test Completion, when checked, will
play the selected alert wave file upon successful completion
of a test.

Rev. A, P#399783
Use Continuous Play will, when checked, cause the alert

sound to be repeated continuously until a user intervenes.
Clearing the checkbox will cause the alert to play only once.
Alert Wave File allows specifying the desired wave file for
the alert. Press the Browse button to search for the
desired wave file.
11.1.8 Ancillary Equipment Pane

The Ancillary Equipment Pane allows configuring a target
state for selected ancillary support equipment. The available
settings will depend on the equipment selected (use the
context sensitive help on each tabbed page for more
information on the equipment settings), and can be set to
take action at a number of points in a typical test process.
The available test points (ancillary states) are represented
by separate tabs and include:
Pre-Calibration allows configuring a state to be applied prior
to performing any equipment calibration step. This state can
be used to automatically switch in a special calibration
fixture, etc. and is only applied if a calibration step is
performed.
Pre-Test allows configuring a state to be applied prior to the
beginning of a test, but after any equipment calibration
step(s) have been performed. This state is typically used to
position the DUT to a desired test position or to initialize a
signal path between the DUT and the rest of the test
equipment. The state will always be applied unless
disabled.
Sequential Polarization allows configuring a state to be
applied at the polarization step of a sequentially polarized
pattern test. This can be used to switch and RF switch or
rotate a mechanical polarization control.
Post-Test allows configuring a state to be applied at the end
of a test. This state is useful for returning the equipment to
its original state at the end of a test. The state will always be
applied unless disabled.

Rev. A, P#399783
11.2 Batch Tests
11.2.1 Running Batch Tests Using EMQuest

Introduction
EMQuest supports basic batch test functionality, allowing a
sequence of tests to be defined and run in order. This
capability is currently provided to satisfy the general need for
batch tests and will be enhanced in later releases. It allows
configuring a list of tests and executing them one after the
other, adding common comments and other information to
each test. The tests will execute normally, and any user
intervention normally required to run the test will still be
necessary in batch mode. This can be minimized by
ensuring that any equipment calibrations are performed prior
to running a batch test, and that the "Always prompt for IUT
preparation at start of test" checkbox is cleared in the
Tools:Options:Preferences tab. The addition of ancillary
equipment support adds to the batch test capability by
allowing the addition of supporting positioners and switches
to each test process. Thus, for example, identical tests can
be repeated with different position states to add position
dependence to a test, or different tests can be run with
different equipment switched into the circuit as needed.
Each test is stored into its own raw data file as usual.

Rev. A, P#399783
11.2.2 Configuring a Batch Test

The following is an overview of the steps required to set up a
batch test.
11.2.2.1 Individual Test Setup

Each test that is to be included in a batch test must first have
an appropriate parameter file created and saved to disk.
Refer to the documentation for the particular test for more
information on setting up the parameter file(s).
11.2.2.2 Parameters
Create a new parameter file and then select Batch Test
Measurements to enter the necessary test information.
Refer to the help for each page of the parameters for more
details on each parameter. Most parameters have default
settings which will allow an almost immediate "ready to run"
state. Its only necessary to select the appropriate test
parameters and press the Run button to start a test.
However, these default settings probably wont be exactly
whats required for a given application, so its necessary to
review and modify the parameters as needed.
The Batch Select node allows selection of the list of
parameter files to be run in the batch. Refer to the Batch
Select help section for more information on selecting the
parameter files.
Most of the remaining nodes provide the ability to enter
information to replace or supplement the equivalent
information in each of the selected test parameters as they
are executed. The identifying information in the Test
Information node will be used in all batch parameter files,
as well as the Operator, Temperature, and Humidity from the
Operator/Comments node. The Comments field will be
appended to the comments in each test parameter to avoid
losing any test specific comments in each file. Use the
Paths node to specify any custom output paths and/or
output templates for this data. Otherwise each test will use
those configured in its own Paths node.
The Notification tab to changes the default test completion
notification for the batch test from that configured in the
Tools : Options dialog. Notifications are suppressed from
individual tests in the batch.
Rev. A, P#399783
11.2.2.3 Running a Batch Test

Once all parameter files have been developed for each test
and selected into the batch parameter file, the data
acquisition process is as simple as all other EMQuest tests.
Make sure that all cables and equipment are connected,
warmed up, and operating properly, and press the "Run"
button. Each test will execute in order according to the
corresponding test procedure. Since the test process takes
precedence, the raw data files for each test are generated,
but are not automatically loaded and displayed. Use the
measurement history list to select and load the raw data.
11.2.3 Batch Select Pane, Batch Test Measurements

The Batch Select pane allows the selection of a list of
parameter files to be run in a batch. When the batch test is
executed, it will run each selected test in the order specified
in the list. The available settings include:
Parameter Files contains a list of all selected parameter
files to run in order.
Add brings up a file open dialog to allow adding files to the
list. Multiple files can be loaded at once.
Remove removes the highlighted parameter file from the list.
Move Up moves the highlighted parameter file up one
position in the list.
Move Down moves the highlighted parameter file down one
position in the list.

Rev. A, P#399783
11.3 Pattern Measurement
11.3.1 Pattern Measurement Basics Introduction

Antenna pattern measurement refers to the determination of
the radiation pattern of an antenna under test (AUT). That
is, the measurement of the relative magnitude and
sometimes phase of an electromagnetic signal received from
the AUT. While highly directional antennas (i.e. horns) are
often measured by scanning a plane perpendicular to the
bore sight axis of the antenna (that is, parallel to the face of
the horn) at some distance, this document will focus
primarily on total spherical pattern measurements. A subset
of this is the simple polar planar cut, where the pattern is
determined for a single azimuth rotation around the antenna.
It should be noted that since a passive antenna is reciprocal,
the pattern information could be obtained by using it either
as the transmitter or receiver. However, in addition to the
relative information that makes up the antenna pattern itself,
and the various pieces of information that can be determined
from it, there are a variety of other results that can be
determined when dealing with an active antenna system. In
that case, transmit and receive behavior may be
considerably different, and thus both relative pattern and
absolute power information is required.
While complex antenna pattern measurement has been a
common requirement in the microwave antenna arena for
many years, recently it has become a more common feature
to other areas, including electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
and wireless telecommunication. On the EMC front, the
interest in pattern measurements appears to stem from a
range of sources. The first is that as EMC standards are
forced to move higher in frequency, the effects of narrow
beam radiation from the equipment under test (EUT) and the
corresponding interaction with the receive antenna are of
increasing concern. It is important that the test antenna be
able to see all signals radiated from the EUT. In addition to
this, broadband antennas designed for EMC work are finding
their way into other applications where concern for antenna
patterns have always been an issue. Finally, many
engineers with microwave backgrounds are now having to
deal with EMC issues and want more information than has
traditionally been provided on these antennas.

Rev. A, P#399783
For the wireless industry, base station antenna patterns

have always been important in order to insure coverage.
Understanding the pattern of each cell tower is critical to
determining the required spacing between them. However,
lately the industry has put considerable emphasis on
handset pattern measurement as well. The Cellular
Telecommunications and Internet Association (CTIA) has
drafted a set of test plans aimed at verifying the performance
of cellular telephone handsets. Where, previously, cell
phones were required to meet a peak signal requirement,
theyre now required to meet a total radiated power
requirement. This helps to insure that a phone is
transmitting energy in a broad pattern rather than a narrow
beam, and therefore it is less likely to lose contact on the
cellular network. The tests are also designed to
characterize both transmitted and received power and
pattern, as well as that for the minimum signal that the
phone can properly detect. There are also calculations
designed to determine the effectiveness of the phone where
the base station antennas are located along the horizon (the
typical configuration). This helps to insure that all of the
radiated energy is not being directed up into space or down
into the ground. While cell phone manufacturers are often
interested in the performance of the phone by itself, the
CTIA requirements include testing with a liquid filled
"phantom" head or torso to simulate the effect of the human
interaction with the phone.
Other wireless requirements that continue to grow include
the wireless personal digital assistants (PDAs) which are
typically covered under the cellular requirements, and a
growing number of home and office based local wireless
networks including wireless LAN and Bluetooth devices.
11.3.2 Measurement Techniques

The most basic pattern measurement that most people are
familiar with is a single axis rotational pattern. That is where
the antenna under test is placed on a rotational positioner
and rotated about the azimuth to generate a two-dimensional
polar pattern. This is commonly done for the two principle
axes of the antenna to determine things like antenna
beamwidth in both the E- and H-planes. Such data is
typically only measured for the co-polar field component for
simple horns or dipoles where the general polarization of the

Rev. A, P#399783
pattern is well know. However, for more complicated

radiators, where the polarization may not be known, or may
vary as a function of angle, it is important to be able to
measure two ortho-normal (perpendicular) field components.
This is usually accomplished by using a dual polarized horn,
log periodic dipole array (LPDA), or dipole antenna as the
measurement antenna (MA). Although it provides the best
result, this technique does require two receivers or the ability
to automate switching of one receiver between the two
polarizations, which can significantly increase the cost of the
test. A slower, and possibly less accurate option is to repeat
the identical pattern test for each measurement antenna
polarization. This could result in time variations and
alignment issues that could have significant effects. Figure 1
shows a typical polar pattern test setup. The AUT (a cell
phone in this case) is placed on a rotating turntable and a
dual polarized antenna is placed level with the AUT a fixed
distance away. The turntable is rotated 360 and the
response between the antennas is measured as a function
of angle. Normally these measurements are performed in a
fully anechoic (simulated free-space) environment, although
sometimes it may be desirable to measure the pattern over
conducting ground or in some other "as used" geometry to
get "real world" pattern information. Figure 2 shows some
polar patterns for some typical antenna types and
polarizations.
Image not available, see software Help File

Figure 1. Test setup for single axis polar pattern
measurement.
Image not available, see software Help File e

Figure 2. Co-polarized polar patterns for a vertically
polarized dipole, horizontally polarized dipole, and standard gain
horn.
In order to generate a full spherical pattern measurement, it

is necessary to change the relationship between the AUT
and the MA and repeat the previous polar test for each new
orientation. In order to completely cover a spherical service,
the changes in orientation must be perpendicular to the
plane of measurement. In simpler terms, the second axis of
rotation must be perpendicular to and intersect the first axis

Rev. A, P#399783
of rotation. These two axes correspond to the and

angles of the spherical coordinate system, and are typically
referred to as elevation and azimuth respectively for reasons
that will become apparent. Note that, just as in the spherical
coordinate system, only one axis needs to be rotated
through 360 while the other is only rotated through 180. It
turns out that with the proper processing of the resulting
data, it really doesnt matter which axis is which! As will also
be shown shortly, either antenna can be rotated around this
second axis in order to generate the same pattern, but each
technique can have its advantages and disadvantages.
11.3.2.1 Method 1: Conical Sections

The first method to consider is one where an elevated
turntable is used to support the AUT and the MA is moved
around the AUT on an axis perpendicular to the vertical
rotational axis of the turntable, as illustrated in Figure 3.
This method fits the geometric picture that most people have
for spherical coordinate systems, and so its often the
concept used for pattern measurements. The turntable
continues to provide the azimuth () rotation, while the MA is
raised (elevated) or lowered in an arc around the AUT, thus
the term elevation axis. A common misconception when
visualizing this technique is to consider moving the MA in a
180 arc across the top of the AUT. However, a quick look
at Figure 3 will show that this would just duplicate the
measurement across the top half of the AUT (the points at
=0, =+a and =180, =-a (where =0 directly above
the AUT) are the same) and never measure the bottom half
of the pattern.

Figure 3. Illustration of the conical section method for
spherical antenna pattern measurement.
This method results in the measurement antenna describing

circles of varying diameter, thus the reference to conical
sections. The circles may be thought of as latitude lines on
a globe, from the north (+Z) to south (-Z) poles, with the
largest circle being at the equator. Only the one circle where
the MA is at the same height as the AUT (i.e. the equator)
results in a true polar pattern measurement.

Rev. A, P#399783
While this method is conceptually simple, there are a

number of drawbacks. A large pivot arm or arch support is
required to manipulate the measurement antenna. For long
range lengths, this can be a difficult proposition. Similarly, if
this test is to be performed in a fully anechoic chamber, the
chamber must be much larger than would normally be
necessary to support the required range length, since the
floor and ceiling must be the same distance away as the rear
wall behind the MA. This can dramatically increase the cost
of the antenna measurement range. In order to perform a
full surface measurement, the turntable must also be
cantilevered out from a wall or other support in order to allow
the MA to be moved under the turntable. Otherwise, there
will be a "dead zone" where the antenna is blocked by the
supporting structure. In any case, the turntable itself can
have a significant effect on the pattern measured if it is too
massive or made of the wrong materials.
11.3.2.2 Method 2: Great Circle

For the second method, the measurement antenna is fixed
and the AUT is repositioned on the turntable to generate
each polar cut. Since the MA is fixed pointing perpendicular
to the rotation axis in this case, every cut is a true polar
pattern. Thus, each rotation of the turntable represents the
greatest diameter circle possible. In order to be able to
compare the two methods, the AUT must be laid on its side
with respect to the setup for Method 1 to represent the
associated shift in coordinate systems (Figure 4).

Figure 4. "Great circle" configuration of antenna under test.
By rotating the AUT about one horizontal axis between each

great circle cut, the entire spherical surface can be covered
(Figure 5). Note that each polar cut passes through the
others at the horizontal axis of rotation. Comparing to the
conical section method, its apparent that the intersection
points at the axis are equivalent to the top and bottom MA
position in the previous method. That is why the AUT was
laid on its side to support the change in coordinates. In this
case, the circles can be thought of as longitude lines,
running from the north (+Z) pole to the south (-Z) pole and

Rev. A, P#399783
back around the other side. As before, its only necessary to

rotate the AUT (instead of the MA) through 180 to cover the
entire sphere, since the great circles are covering the "front"
and "back" of the sphere simultaneously. It should also be
noted that, with the shift in coordinate systems, the turntable
is now an elevation positioner rather than an azimuth
positioner, since it changes the MA position from pole to pole
rather than parallel to the equator. The horizontal rotation
axis of the AUT provides the azimuth positioning.

Figure 5. Illustration of the great circle method for spherical
antenna pattern measurement. (Note: The "back" sides of the
polar cuts have been removed for clarity.)
This method has the advantage of being relatively easy to

perform with a low cost system by rotating the AUT manually
about the horizontal axis, but as with most such endeavors,
it can be extremely tedious without additional automation. It
also has the added benefit that the path between the AUT
and MA is never obscured by the support structure, although
care must be taken to insure that the existing support
structure does not have reflective properties that could still
alter the antenna pattern, especially if additional material is
required to support the AUT in different orientations. Finally,
since the measurement antenna is fixed, the chamber only
needs to support the required range length in one
dimension. This opens up the possibility of using tapered
chambers and the like to obtain high performance and large
range lengths affordably.

Rev. A, P#399783
11.3.2.3 Comparison of Methods

While each method has its advantages and disadvantages,
its important to verify that they are both capable of
producing the same results. Figure 6 shows both conical
section (a) and great circle (b) results where the same step
size between measurement points was taken on both
rotational axes, and where the coordinate systems have
been aligned. Overlaying the two plots (c) shows that the
actual measured data points are identical, no matter which
method is used. Thus, given just the resulting data points
(d), its not possible to determine which method was used to
generate them!
(a) (b)
Figure 6. Comparison of measurement points between (a) conical

section method and (b) great circle method. (c) shows the two results
overlaid, and (d) indicates that its impossible to tell which method was
used given only the resulting data points.

Rev. A, P#399783
11.3.2.4 Two-Axis PositionersThe Best of Both Worlds

By adopting the great circle configuration and manipulating
the AUT in two axes, its possible to automate the test such
that data can be acquired according to either measurement
sequence. Figure 7 shows a simple two-axis positioner that
can automate the rotation of the AUT on both axes. By
rotating the turntable (elevation) 360 and stepping the
horizontal axis (azimuth) between each turntable rotation, we
duplicate the great circle method (Figure 8a). On the other
hand, by rotating the horizontal azimuth axis 360 and
stepping the turntable, we duplicate the conical section
method (Figure 8b).

Figure 7. Example of a two-axis positioner setup for pattern
measurement testing.
(a) (b)
Figure 8. (a) Great circle method and (b) conical section

method performed using the same two-axis positioner.
The two-axis positioner does suffer from one of the

limitations mentioned for the conical section method in
general. That is, for some portion of the pattern (the south (-
Z) pole in the illustration), the support structure is between
the AUT and the measurement antenna. Insuring that the
support structure is matched to the load being rotated in
order to reduce the amount of interposing material required
can minimize this effect. Controlling the orientation of the

Rev. A, P#399783
AUT with respect to the support can also help insure better
results. By making sure the support is in a null or back-lobe,
its effects on pattern related measurements can be
minimized.
11.3.2.5 3-D Patterns

No matter which method is used to acquire the data, the
analysis of the result is made easier by the use of a 3-D
spherical plot to graph the output. Figure 9 gives an
example of a dipole pattern and a standard gain horn pattern
plotted in three dimensions. This type of graphing capability
allows rotating the pattern around for different views in order
to get an idea of the relative magnitude of the signal in
various directions.

Figure 9. 3-D spherical plot of (a) simple dipole and (b)
standard gain horn. Note the expected toroidal (donut) shape of the
dipole pattern and the strong directionality and sidelobes of the
standard gain horn.
11.3.2.6 Near-Field Versus Far-Field Measurements

Regardless of how the data are acquired, one of the
available system variables is the range length. Usually, when
one refers to the properties of an antenna, be it antenna
pattern, gain, or another property, they are referring to the
far-field, free-space properties of the antenna. In the far-field,
free-space condition, the measured properties of the
antenna do not appear to vary as a function of separation
distance or antenna location. That is not to say that the
measured field levels themselves do not vary, but that the
measured gain or pattern does not vary. To state it simply,
the far-field, free-space condition is the condition in which all
of the theoretical equations typically used for calculating
antenna properties are valid.
In a near-field and/or non-free-space environment, the
antenna properties that are measured appear to vary as a
function of their environment. Effects like mutual coupling
between the AUT and the measurement antenna or the
antennas and other objects around them, as well as other
near-field perturbations prevent the direct determination of
the desired antenna properties. Even assuming a good free-
Rev. A, P#399783
space environment (i.e., a fully anechoic chamber), there are

still limitations to near-field testing.
Most readers will be familiar with at least one rule of thumb
for near- versus far-field determinations. In reality, there are
two very different definitions. The first, which is usually more
important at low frequencies, is represented by the near-field
term(s) of the electric and/or magnetic field equations. These
are the terms that behave as 1/rn, where n > 1 . These terms
represent the nonpropagating or evanescent electric and
magnetic fieldsthose caused by capacitively or inductively
stored energy in the antenna. Therefore, this region is
referred to as the reactive region of the antenna. These
reactive fields decay rapidly with distance from the antenna,
r r
leaving only the E H term, which has a 1/r behavior. In this
case, the far-field condition is satisfied by /r << 1, that is,
where the measurement distance, r, is much larger than the
wavelength, . The reactive region is commonly defined as
r < 0.62 D / , where D is the largest dimension of the radiating
3
object. For practical applications, a simpler rule of thumb

suitable for most antennas is given by r < 2. Within this
region, any measurement antenna or probe would have a
significant effect on the transmit antenna.
The second far-field requirement, which is more familiar to
microwave engineers, is usually the dominant factor at
higher frequencies. In this case, the objects involved (either
the actual antennas or larger devices containing small
antennas) are large compared to the wavelength. The
effects of scattering from different points on the object, or
from different emissions points in the case of an antenna
array or a leaky shielded enclosure with multiple openings,
result in wave fronts propagating in multiple directions. The
far-field condition is met when all of these different wave
fronts merge to form one wave front, that is, when the
multiple sources are indistinguishable from a single source.
This condition is met when the separation distance r > 2D2/.
Therefore, the bigger the object or the smaller the
wavelength, the farther away the receive antenna has to be
for that object to appear as a single source. The region
inside the 2D2/ distance, but outside the reactive near-field
region, is referred to as the radiating near-field or Fresnel
region, whereas the region outside this distance is the far-
field or Fraunhofer region.
In terms of antenna pattern measurements, normally there is
little useful information to be gained within the reactive
region of an antenna. The one possible exception would be
Rev. A, P#399783
when the antenna is to be used in the reactive region as

well. However, it would not be possible to eliminate the effect
of the measurement antenna on the AUT, and therefore the
usefulness of such data would be limited. The Fresnel region
contains propagating electromagnetic energy, but not in a
cohesive form. Therefore, pattern measurements done in
this region can readily determine quantities such as total
radiated power but may only provide an approximation to the
far-field pattern, gain, and other properties.
11.3.2.7 Converting from Near Field to Far Field

A common practice in microwave antenna measurements,
and something of a Holy Grail for EMC measurements, is the
use of near-field measurements to predict far-field results. In
the Fresnel region, it is possible to scan the magnitude and
phase of the field along a closed surface (or, in the case of
planar near-field scanning, an open surface intersecting the
vast majority of the propagating energy) and predict the far-
field levels. Doing so requires the use of a reference signal
in addition to that from the measurement antenna in order to
get the relative phase and magnitude at each point on the
surface. The fixed reference is needed to track the relative
phase of the signal in time because each point in space is
not sampled at the same instant in time.
For passive antennas, a vector network analyzer is normally
used, which acquires both magnitude and phase information
against its own reference signal. Active devices are more
complicated, requiring the use of a fixed reference antenna
or sensor in addition to the measurement antenna to obtain
both phase and magnitude references (because an active
device may not maintain a constant magnitude or phase
relationship). In either case, the calculations required to do
the conversion are beyond the scope of this article.
For EMC testing, the conversion of radiated-emissions
measurements from near field to far field is made much
more difficult by the nature of the electromagnetic signature
of the device under test and the frequency range required for
EMC testing. EMC emissions are far from continuous-wave
(CW), often consisting of harmonics, broadband noise, and
spurious signals. Obtaining the same radiation signature at
each point of a near-field scan is very unlikely. To further
complicate matters, low-frequency EMC measurements are
often performed in the reactive region of both the EUT and
the receive antenna. Although near-field reactive terms can

Rev. A, P#399783
be easily determined for simple dipole elements, such

predictions for more-complicated antennas or emitters are
extremely difficult. The amount of data and processing
required to correctly separate the effects of the EUT from the
receive antenna and the rest of the environment to truly
predict a far-field result is far beyond the current state of the
art.
11.3.2.8 Range Calibration

With the setup described above, its quite straightforward to
perform general pattern measurements and determine a
large variety of relative information such as 3 dB beamwidth,
front-to-back ratio, and directivity. However, before accurate
absolute value measurements of values such as total
radiated power (TRP), effective isotropic radiated power
(EIRP), or antenna gain can be performed, it is necessary to
perform a reference calibration in order to correct for the
various factors affecting these tests. These include
components like range length loss, gain of the receive
antenna, cable losses, etc. Normally, this calibration is done
using a reference antenna (typically either a dipole or
standard gain horn) with known gain characteristics. The
reference antenna is mounted at the center of the positioner
as the antenna under test and adjusted to be bore sight with
the receive antenna. The reference calibration is repeated
for each polarization of the receive antenna, with the
reference antenna polarized parallel to the corresponding
receive element. Figure 10 shows a typical range calibration
setup and calls out various components that are included in
the measurement.

Rev. A, P#399783
Pt Pr
c2 G r
t Gr c3
l l
ga gpa
PSG PRX
c1 c4
l l
Sig
Rec
Genl
i
t
Figure 10. Some typical components of a range calibration

setup.
Typically, a signal generator or the output of a network

analyzer is connected to the reference antenna by one or
more cables, possibly through a power amplifier. The
receive antenna is connected to a receiver or the input of a
network analyzer through one or more additional cables,
possibly through a preamplifier. The power at the transmit
antenna input port, Pt, is given in terms of the signal
generator output, PSG, by:
PSG g a
Pt =
cl1cl 2 ,

Rev. A, P#399783
where ga is the gain of the amplifier, and cl1 and cl2 are the
cable losses of the corresponding transmit cables. The
power at the receiver, PRX, is given in terms of the power at
the receive antenna output port, Pr, by the similar equation:
Pr g pa
PRX =
cl3 cl 4 ,
where gpa is the gain of the preamplifier, and cl3 and cl4 are
the cable losses of the corresponding receive cables. If any
of the components are missing, the corresponding gain or
loss for that variable in the equation should be one. In terms
of dB, these formulae become P = P + g cl cl and
t SG a 1 2
P = P + g cl cl
RX r pa 3
, and the gain or loss of missing components
4
would be zero dB.
11.3.2.9 Friis Transmission Equation

The Friis Transmission Equation governs the interaction
between two antennas in the far field:
Pt Gt Gr 2
Pr =
(4r ) 2 where:
Pr is the power measured at the receive antenna output
port,
Pt
is the power measured at the transmit antenna input port,
Gt
is the gain of the transmit antenna,
Gr is the gain of the receive antenna,
is the wavelength,
and
r is the separation between the two antennas (the
range length).
r

Rev. A, P#399783
P
The exact definition of t is often a source of some
confusion and is somewhat dependant on what terms are
included in the definition of gain. If the antenna is perfectly
matched to the source cable, then all power applied to the
antenna is radiated (or absorbed by losses in the antenna).
However, in the more common case of a mismatch between
the source impedance and the antenna impedance, a portion
of the energy is reflected back to the source so that the net
power transmitted is the difference between the applied
forward incident power and the power reflected back to the
source:
Pnet = Pinc Prefl
P
If a theoretical gain value is used in the Friis equation, net
Pt
should be used for since the theoretical formula typically
wont be able to account for the VSWR caused by the
impedance mismatch. This requires either using a bi-
directional coupler and power meter configuration at the
P
transmit antenna in order to be able to determine net
directly, or measuring the VSWR of the antenna and
performing additional calculations to predict the net power
from the forward power. If measured gain values are used
its important to know how those gain values where
determined and whether or not they already contain a
contribution due to VSWR. Since any calibration technique
is still inherently governed by this same formula, the
resulting gain will be different depending on whether or not
the VSWR effects have been accounted for separately. If
not, the gain will be changed simply by the ratio of net power
to forward power:
Pnet Gt net Gr 2 Pinc (Gt net Pnet / Pinc )Gr 2 Pinc Gt inc Gr 2
IPr = (4r ) 2
=
(4r ) 2
=
(4r ) 2
t
should be noted that if the receive antenna has a mismatch
(equally as likely as the transmit antenna) the same issue
exists on the receive antenna but isnt as easy to directly
observe since the reflected energy is re-radiated in this case.
Theres no good way to measure the forward and reflected
receive energy! However, the VSWR of the receive antenna
can be used to determine this effect as well. Fortunately as
will be shown here, the gain of the receive antenna does not
need to be known exactly (other than to double-check the
calibration result against theoretical predictions) since it will
be measured as part of the range calibration process.

Rev. A, P#399783
As indicated in Figure 10, there are typically other factors

involved in the measurement, unless power meters and
directional couplers are used right at the antennas to
measure the net transmitted and received power. These
include losses from all cables, etc. and gain of any power
amplifiers or pre-amps. To minimize the uncertainty of
resulting measurements it is usually desirable to perform the
range calibration with all cables, etc. in place and use the
same configuration for calibration and pattern
measurements. However, should any component be
changed or damaged, the entire calibration must be redone.
It is possible to perform individual calibrations on various
system components, but each additional measurement
increases the total measurement uncertainty involved. Thus,
it is still usually preferable to calibrate the system as a while
when possible.
11.3.2.10 Total Radiated Power

To determine exactly how to apply the range calibration, its
important to investigate the desired measurement quantities
versus what will actually be measured by the test system.
The primary quantity of interest is the total radiated power
(TRP), which can be obtained by integrating the time
averaged power density of the radiated signal across the
entire spherical surface enclosing the AUT. The time
averaged power density of a radiating signal is given by the
real part of the Poynting vector:
2 2 2
1 r r 1 E E RMS E RMS
= Re( E H ) = = =
2 2 120
where:
is the time averaged power density,
E is the peak electric field strength,
H is the peak magnetic field strength,
E RMS
is the RMS electric field strength,
and
is the impedance of free space (120).

Rev. A, P#399783
Notice the factor of 1/2 in the definition of the power density.

This occurs due to the time averaging of the power across a
complete period. It should be noted that while most
reference materials and numerical analysis tools refer to
wave magnitudes by their peak values:
r
E = Ee j t ,
most measurement instrumentation reports RMS values:
. 1
E RMS = E
2
Thus, when determining the power density from the RMS
electric field, the factor of 1/2 has already been accounted
for. The difference between RMS and peak field values can
result in an immediate 3 dB error in reported measurement
results if it is not treated correctly!
The total radiated power is then given by integrating the
power density across the surface of the reference sphere:
2
TRP = r 2 sin( )d d where:
=0 =0
TRP is the total radiated power,

is the time averaged power density,
r is the radius of the sphere (the range length),
is the elevation angle,
and
is the azimuth angle.
The electric field generated at a point in the far field as a
function t ( ,transmitted
oft Gthe
30 P ) power is given by:
E=
r ,
where:
E is the electric field generated at the distance r from the
transmit antenna,
Pt
is the power measured at the transmit antenna input port,
Gt ( , )
is the angular dependent gain of the transmit
antenna,
and
r is the distance from the transmit antenna to the test point
(the range length).

Rev. A, P#399783
( , ) density at that point becomes:

P Gpower
So the
= t t 2
4r ,
and then the total radiated power is given by:
. Pt 2
TRP =
4
=0 =0
Gt ( , ) sin( )d d
11.3.2.11 Range Calibration, Part 2

Unfortunately, the receiver used to perform the test cant
measure power density directly, but instead, measures
received power (again, neglecting cable losses, etc.). A
related quantity, then, to the total radiated power would be
the total received power, given by integrating the received
power across all of the measurement points of the AUT.
2
TPr = Pr ( , ) sin( )d d
=0 =0
where:
TPr is the total power received,
and
Pr ( , )
is the power measured at the receive antenna output port.
The received power is given by the Friis transmission

equation described earlier, so in terms of the transmit power
and the angular dependent gain, the equation becomes:
Pt Gr 2 2
TPr =
(4r ) 2
=0 =0
Gt ( , ) sin( )d d
Since the desired value is the total radiated power, the

required correction factor is simply the ratio of the total
radiated power to the total power received:

Rev. A, P#399783
Pt 2
=0 =0 Gt ( , ) sin( )d d
= 4 2
TRP
TPr Pt Gr 2
(4r ) 2 =0 =0
Gt ( , ) sin( )d d
which, when simplified, becomes:
TRP 4r 2
=
TPr Gr 2
This constant makes sense, since the factor is related to the

range length and the gain of the receive antenna, both of
which are exactly what we want to calibrate out of the
system! Going back to the Friis equation one last time, the
reference measurement performed with the reference
antenna results in a site reference constant given by:
Pr Gt Gr 2
C= =
Pt (4r ) 2
where C is the ratio of received to transmitted power.

Substituting this into the previous equation gives a correction
factor of:
TRP G
= t
TPr 4C
Now weve successfully represented the required site

calibration constant in terms of the gain of our reference
antenna and a single path loss measurement for each
polarization. It should be noted that C can contain
contributions from other terms such as cable loss, etc. as
long as those contributions are present in both the reference
calibration and the pattern measurements.

Rev. A, P#399783
11.3.2.12 Accounting for VSWR

As mentioned previously, the treatment of the transmit
antenna voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) is an important
part of both the range calibration and the measurement of
various antenna properties. In general, VSWR is a
measurement of the mismatch between two transmission
lines. It provides a measurement of the amount of signal
being reflected back from the mismatch, which is directly
related to the amount of energy that is transmitted. For
many antennas, the VSWR represents the largest
component of the antenna efficiency (the rest resulting from
Ohmic losses in the antenna itself). In order to determine
the contribution due to the VSWR, its necessary to calculate
the ratio of the net power to the forward power. VSWR is
defined as the ratio of maximum to minimum voltage on the
transmission line and is given by:
Vmax Vinc + Vrefl

VSWR = =
Vmin Vinc Vrefl
where:
Vmax
is the maximum voltage on the transmission line (feed
cable),
Vmin is the minimum voltage on the transmission line,

Vmin
Vinc
is the magnitude of the incident wave,
and
V refl
is the magnitude of the reflected wave.
The reflection coefficient, , (not to be confused with the
power density describe above) the ratio of reflected to
V
incident
= waves and is given by:
V + , or in terms of impedance,
ZL Z0
=
Z L + Z0
where:
V+ is the incident wave (magnitude and phase),

Rev. A, P#399783
V is the reflected wave (magnitude and phase),
Z 0 is the characteristic impedance of the transmission line

(magnitude and phase),
and
Z L is the impedance of the load line (magnitude and
phase).
Note that if the load impedance is equal to the characteristic
impedance of the transmission line then the reflection
coefficient is zero. This makes sense since there is no
mismatch in this case. Also note that, unlike the VSWR, the
reflection coefficient has both magnitude and phase. The
magnitude of the reflection coefficient is then:
The transmission coefficient, , is defined as the ratio of
transmitted to incident waves is given by:
Vrefl VSWR 1
= =
VL Vinc VSWR + 1
2Z 0
= =
V + , or in terms of impedance, ZL + Z0 ,
where:
V L is the wave transmitted through the mismatch to the load
side (magnitude and phase).
By definition,
=1,
however, the transmission coefficient isnt very useful for

determining the net transmitted power from the VSWR since
it also requires some knowledge of the impedance of the
load. While the necessary information could be determined
from the reflection coefficient, its considerably easier to
determine the ratio of the reflected power to the incident
power and then use that to determine the net transmitted
power.
2
Prefl V refl
= =
2
so 2 that:
Pinc V inc
Pnet = Pinc Prefl = Pinc Pinc

2
= Pinc (1 )
2

Rev. A, P#399783
This just results in a VSWR correction factor given in dB by:
CVSWR = 10 log10 (1 )
2
4 VSWR
= 10 log10
2
(VSWR + 1)
It should be noted that the VSWR component covered here

is not the only antenna VSWR term related to antenna
measurements. If an antenna is not in a free space
environment, energy reflected back from other objects will be
seen to affect the VSWR measurement. However, this term
is a measure of the antennas interaction with its
environment rather than a measurement of an inherent
property of the antenna. Care should be taken when
measuring VSWR to be used for range calibrations to insure
that the measurement represents a true free space VSWR.
A simple way to do this is to alter the orientation and location
of the reference antenna when measuring VSWR. If no
variation is seen in the resulting VSWR measurements, then
the environment is not likely to be having a significant
impact.
11.3.2.13 Gain, Directivity, Efficiency, and EIRP

Once the range has been calibrated, a number of antenna
properties can be determined from the pattern
measurement. The first property of interest is the effective
isotropic radiated power (EIRP). The EIRP is the power
required for a theoretical isotropic radiator (one that radiates
the same power in all directions) to generate the same field
level in all directions as the maximum field seen from the
AUT. Starting from the definition of total radiated power,
EIRP is given by:
2
EIRP = max r 2 sin( )d d
=0 =0

where max is the maximum time averaged power density
found over the surface of the measurement sphere.
Assuming that the maximum power density can be defined
using the boresight gain of the AUT:
, Pt Gt
max =
4r 2

Rev. A, P#399783
then the EIRP becomes:
, 2 Pt Gt
2
EIRP = r sin( )d d
= 0 = 0 4r 2
= Pt Gt
Note that the EIRP is simply the transmitted power

increased by the AUT gain, which brings some clarity to the
definition of gain. Gain (over isotropic) is defined as the
increase in received signal from the AUT over that which
would be received from an isotropic radiator with the same
source power. Thus, to create an isotropic radiator that
generates the same field level as the maximum seen from
the AUT, the source power must be increased by the gain.
Rearranging the equation for EIRP gives the definition of
gain:
, EIRP
Gt =
Pt
P
where t is often referred to as the antenna port input power
(APIP). Again, there is the question of whether or not this
term should be the incident power or the net power. That
decision will affect the calculation of the efficiency of the
antenna, as will be shown shortly.
The ratio of the EIRP to the total radiated power is defined
as the directivity of the antenna:
, Pt Gt
EIRP
D= =
TRP Pt 2
4
=0 =0
Gt ( , ) sin( )d d
4
= 2

=0 =0
t ( , ) sin( )d d

Rev. A, P#399783
( , )
where t is the relative magnitude of the AUT pattern
at any angle with respect to the maximum. For an isotropic
radiator, this would be a constant one, so that the directivity
( , )
was also one. For any real antenna, t is less than one
for much of the surface, resulting in a directivity greater than
one. Note that the directivity is the only term related to the
antenna gain which is solely a relative term. The range
calibration does not show up in this equation.
As with the TRP measurement, the measurement system is
only capable of measuring received power, so instead of
EIRP, the corresponding value calculated would be the
effective isotropic received power:
,
2
EIPr = P sin( )d d
=0 =0 r max
= 4 Pr max
P
where r max is the maximum received power from the pattern
measurement. Assuming again that the maximum received
power is the boresight transmission response, the same site
reference constant, C, can be used:
,EIRP Pt Gt Gt
= =
EIPr 4 Pr max 4 C
so its apparent that the same range calibration holds in this

case as well. Thus, the directivity can also be represented
directly in terms of measured quantities as:
. EIPr
D=
TPr
The efficiency of the AUT is defined as the ratio of the total

radiated power to the antenna port input power. As
mentioned, the definition of APIP as incident power vs. net
power will determine whether or not the VSWR is part of the
efficiency term. If net power is used, the efficiency only
represents the Ohmic losses of the antenna and not the
mismatch effects.

Rev. A, P#399783
TRP
=
. Pt
Comparing this to the definition of gain and directivity given
earlier, its apparent that the gain is given by the product of
the directivity and efficiency:
. EIRP EIRP TRP
Gt = =
Pt TRP Pt
= D
If the AUT has no losses or mismatch, the directivity and

gain should be equivalent.
11.3.2.14 Applying the Range Calibration

Starting from the equation for the effective isotropic receive
power given above, if we define an angular dependent
effective isotropic receive power in terms of the received
power at a give angle, we get
. eip ( , ) = 4 P ( , )
r r
Similarly then, the angular dependent effective isotropic

radiated power, which is the power required for a theoretical
isotropic radiator to generate the received power for each
measurement point, becomes
, Gt eip r ( , ) Gt
eirp( , ) = = Pr ( , )
4 C C
so that the boresight EIRP defined above is given by
substituting in the angular position of the boresight
maximum. This is a convenient quantity to work with since it
has both the reference gain and the range path loss applied
to the measured data points.
Since the total radiated power is given by
Gt G 2
TRP = TPr = t Pr ( , ) sin( )d d
4C 4C =0 =0

Rev. A, P#399783
then, in terms of the angular dependent eirp, the integral for

total radiated power becomes
. 1 2
TRP =
4 =0 =0
eirp ( , ) sin( )d d
Note that these equations are presented as applying a net

correction to the net power at the measurement antenna, but
in reality there are two polarizations, each of which is likely
to have their own path loss factor and possibly even a
different reference antenna gain. In that case, the equations
are modified as follows:
Gt 2 Gt Pr ( , ) Gt Pr ( , )
4C =0 =0
TRP = + sin( )d d
C C
[eirp ( , ) + eirp ( , )]sin( )d d

1 2
=
4 =0 =0
Its important to take a look at the units involved in the

definition of eirp. The inherent assumption in defining eirp is
that the reference antenna gain, Gt, is the gain over an
isotropic radiator. In some cases, it may be desirable to use
a half-wavelength dipole radiator as the reference source, or
to tie the reference to gain over a dipole instead of gain over
isotropic, in which case the associated term would be the
effective dipole radiated power (edrp). However, the TRP
still requires the integration of the eirp, not the edrp, so there
is a 2.15 dB correction that must be applied in order to use
edrp instead of eirp.
1.64 2
4 =0 =0
TRP edrp( , ) sin( )d d
11.3.2.15 Other Antenna Properties

There are plenty of other properties that can be determined
from an antenna pattern, such as front-to-back ratio, average
radiated power, average gain, and beamwidths. The
calculation of most of these properties is pretty
straightforward, usually with simple formulas, but the most
important part of many of them is the data search algorithms
used to find values like the maximum point, minimum point, -
3 dB points, etc. In addition, some of these properties have

Rev. A, P#399783
little or no meaning for some antennas, and the orientation of

the AUT can affect the result of an automated calculation
without additional input from the user to indicate desired
alignment information. For example, the meaning of E- and
H-plane beamwidths is commonly understood. However, if
an AUT is randomly oriented for the pattern test, or has an
unusual pattern, there is no simple way to automatically
determine what constitutes each plane.
11.3.2.16 Reversing the Flow Total Isotropic Power

Received
The evaluation of an antenna in receive mode isnt quite as
obvious as it might seem. In transmit mode, a dual polarized
antenna is used to receive both polarizations of the
transmitted signal and determine the net power radiated. In
receive mode, the receive antenna can only respond to one
polarization at a time, so in order to determine its relative
response to any arbitrary polarization, its necessary to
measure the sensitivity of each transmit polarization and
then combine the results. However, combining the signals in
the conventional manner to determine the net power would
generate an erroneous result (lower sensitivity) since it
would indicate a higher received power for a given sensitivity
level.
By reversing the direction of propagation of the spherical
wavefront, the equation for total power received now
represents the integral of the power received by the AUT
from an incoming isotropic wave with equal power in both
polarizations. The integral is then:
2
TPr = PAUT ( , ) sin( )d d
=0 =0
P ( , )
where AUT is the total power measured at the AUT
antenna port at each angular position.
Using the Friis Transmission Equation to represent the
relationship between the measurement antenna and the
AUT, we get:
PMA G MA G AUT ( , )2
PAUT ( , ) =
(4r ) 2

Rev. A, P#399783
which, in terms of the range path loss, C, and the calibration

reference antenna gain, Gt, used in the range calibration is
given by:
C
PAUT ( , ) = PMA G AUT ( , )
Gt
so that the total power received becomes
PMA G MA 2 2
(4r ) 2 =0 =0
TPr = G AUT ( , ) sin( )d d
C 2
= PMA G AUT ( , ) sin( )d d
Gt =0 =0
For an isotropic receiver, for which the gain in all directions

is 1, this simplifies to:
4C
TIPr = PMA
Gt
This total isotropic power received can be written in terms of
the total power received by the AUT as:
TPr
TIPr (TPr ) = 2

=0 =0
G AUT ( , ) sin( )d d
In reality, the measurement antenna cannot transmit both

polarizations simultaneously (unless circular polarization is
used, which adds a whole new level of complexity to the
situation) so the TPr measurement will be performed using
one polarization of the MA at a time. Referring to the
spherical pattern geometries shown earlier, its apparent that
the two polarizations of the measurement antenna (now the
transmit antenna) correspond to the and directions on
the spherical measurement surface. The AUT will have a
different gain and corresponding receive power for each of
these polarizations, so that
PAUT ( , ) = PAUT ( , ) + PAUT ( , )

and the TIPr can be written as:
4 TPr
TIPr (TPr ) =
[G ]
2
AUT ( , ) + G AUT ( , ) sin( )d d
=0 =0

Rev. A, P#399783
While this equation may be interesting, its not very useful as

it is. The problem is, we need to determine the angular
dependent gains to obtain anything from the equation.
Returning to our use of the Friis transmission equation, note
that the previous formulation assumes that the power
transmitted by the MA is constant as a function of position so
that the power received by the AUT varies with angle. We
could as easily define the equation such that the power
received is constant as a function of angle, requiring that the
power transmitted by the MA must vary:
C
PAUT = PMA ( , )G AUT ( , )
Gt
More generally, it makes sense to allow either value to vary
as a function of angle:
C
PAUT ( , ) = PMA ( , )G AUT ( , )
Gt
We can define a term similar to the EIRP that was used for
the AUT in transmit mode to represent the power transmitted
by the measurement antenna for each polarization after the
range calibration factors have been applied. This angular
dependent effective isotropic receive power (eirxp) is then
defined as:
Cx P ( , )
eirxp x ( , ) = PMA x ( , ) = AUT x
Gt x G AUT x ( , )
for the two possible polarizations, x = or , of the MA.
This term has the same advantage as the angular
dependent eirp in that it incorporates the range calibration
terms so that the calculations are done after the same range
calibration has been applied to the measured data. One
important thing to note is the inversion of the calibration
terms. This results in a sign change when the terms are
applied in dB.
By solving for the gain in the previous equation and
substituting that into the equation for TIPr, we get:
4 TPr
TIPr (TPr ) =
2 PAUT ( , ) PAUT ( , )
=0 =0 eirxp ( , ) eirxp ( , ) sin( )d d

+


Rev. A, P#399783
Now, instead of holding the transmit power from the MA

constant, consider what happens when the receive power at
the AUT is kept constant for each polarization, forcing the
transmit power and thus the eirxp to vary with position of the
A
U
TPr 4
T r (TPr ) =
TIP
. PAUT 2 1 1
=0 =0 eirxp ( , ) + eirxp ( , ) sin( )d d

This equation represents the total power received by an
isotropic receiver in terms of the plane waves required to
create a given receive power level at the AUT. For the case
where the total power received by the AUT from this
collection of plane waves is set equivalent to that received
for each polarization and position (TPr=PAUT) then the total
power that an isotropic receiver would see from that same
incoming assortment of plane waves is given by:
4
TIPr ( PAUT ) =
2 1 1

=0

= 0 eirxp ( , )
+ sin( )d d
eirxp ( , )

Its interesting to note the similarities between this formula

and that for parallel resistors. Where the TRP represents
the addition of all angular eirp terms, TIPr is reduced for
each eirxp term that is added to it. Going back to the
discussion at the start of this segment, since the eirxp
represents the power necessary to make the antenna
receive a given fixed receive power from a plane wave
source, then the power necessary to generate that same
fixed receive power from an isotropic spherical wave coming
from all directions must be less than or equal to that from the
plane wave. Also, in terms of the two polarization
components, its apparent that the net eirxp at each angular
position is given by:
1 1 1
= +
eirxp Net ( , ) eirxp ( , ) eirxp ( , )

Rev. A, P#399783
11.3.2.17 CTIA Requirements

The Cellular Telecommunications and Internet Association
(CTIA) has developed some very specific antenna property
requirements in addition to the EIRP and TRP
measurements described above. One of these is the Near-
Horizon Partial Radiated Power (NHPRP), which is used to
determine the power radiated in a small band (typically
22.5 or 45) along the azimuth axis. This requirement is
intended to determine how a cellular phone will interact with
the network of cellular base stations arranged around it
along the horizon during normal operation. Note that the
orientation of the AUT will have a great impact on this result,
so the standard calls out precise positioning requirements for
the phone. Since a cellular phone has both transmit and
receive modes, the CTIA standard also contains receive
property requirements including Total Isotropic Sensitivity
(TIS) and Near-Horizon Partial Isotropic Sensitivity (NHPIS),
in addition to the radiated pattern requirements. These
values are calculated from the received power pattern
instead of the transmitted power pattern, in a method similar
to that given for TIPr in the segment above. While the TIPr
derivation was presented in a more generic context than that
used in the CTIA document, the definition for TIS may be
obtained by defining the fixed power received by the AUT as
the minimum sensitivity level of the receiver. The eirxp
necessary to drive the receiver at that sensitivity level is then
referred to as the angular and polarization dependent
Effective Isotropic Sensitivity (EIS) such that the TIS is then
given by the TIPr at that minimum sensitivity level:
4
TIS = TIPr ( Psensitivity ) =
2 1 1

=0

= 0 EIS ( , )
+ sin( )d d
EIS ( , )

It should be noted that while the CTIA derivation of TIS uses

the peak electric field value instead of the RMS value,
resulting in a difference of 3 dB between their definition of
electric field and the RMS values normally measured by test
equipment, the end result is the same since the electric field
terms used throughout their derivation cancel each other out.
The resulting equation for TIS is in terms of power, not field
levels.

Rev. A, P#399783
11.3.2.18 Numerical Considerations

When processing data acquired during a pattern
measurement, the method used to perform the integrations
required can result in significant errors if done incorrectly.
There is no way to perform a true integration of the power
density across the spherical surface. Thus, we must instead
rely on some sort of summation of a limited number of data
points to approximate these integrals.
The simplest option is to just convert the integrals to sums,
summing up all of the data points with the appropriate
weighting terms applied and dividing by the number of points
in the sum. This is a good first approximation, but can suffer
from some significant failings. First off, there is no
accounting for the step size between each data point, so if
the step size is not consistent then the points will not receive
the proper amount of weight in the sum and will skew the
results. Secondly, the approximation of a function by single
fixed points breaks down rapidly as the step size increases
or as the slope becomes increasingly large. Finally, the
treatment of end points can result in a significant error,
especially when large step sizes are used.
Figure 11 shows the elevation curve shapes for a tuned
dipole and an isotropic source from = 0-180. The shaded
area under each curve is the desired resulting integral value.
In figure 12, data points taken every 15 degrees are
summed to generate an approximation of the area under
each curve. While the summation shown doesnt appear to
do a very good job of representing the area under the curve,
figure 13 shows what happens when the corners of each
rectangle outside the curve are cut off to fill in the missing
corners inside the curve, converting the rectangles to
trapezoids. This doesnt change the total area resulting from
the summation, but rather just more clearly represents the
quality of the result. There it is evident that the summation
does do a pretty good job of representing the area under the
curve, at least for a dipole pattern. For the isotropic pattern
theres a noticeable deficiency in the result of the
summation.

Rev. A, P#399783
Tuned Dipole Isotropic Source
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 0 30 60 90 120 150 180
Figure 11. Elevation curve for tuned dipole and isotropic

source including sin() weighting. The area under the
curve represents the integral of the curve.
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 0 30 60 90 120 150 180
Figure 12. Effect of summing data points taken every 15

degrees.

Rev. A, P#399783
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 0 30 60 90 120 150 180
Figure 13. Effect of summing data points taken every 15

degrees, where the rectangles have been converted to
trapezoids to better follow the shape of the curve. This has
the same area as the previous figure.
In order to improve upon the result of a simple sum, a

trapezoidal rule summation can be used to represent the
desired integral. Instead of each individual data point
representing a rectangle (or trapezoid as in figure 13) of a
given area, the area between each point is represented by a
trapezoid as shown in figure 14. The trapezoidal rule is
implemented by multiplying the midpoint between each pair
of points (given by adding the two points and dividing by two)
by the distance between the two points. Thus, if the spacing
between points changes, it is automatically accounted for.

Rev. A, P#399783
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 0 30 60 90 120 150 180
Figure 14. Effect of trapezoidal rule on data points taken every 15

degrees.
To illustrate the effect of random step sizes on the two

techniques, figure 15 shows what happens to the previous
graphs of the tuned dipole curve when the positions of the
measured data points change slightly. The width of the
summed sections is assumed to remain constant, while the
actual point spacing does not. This causes a significant
error in the resulting integration, while the trapezoidal rule
result sees little change.

Rev. A, P#399783
Continuous Integral Summed Points
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 0 30 60 90 120 150 180

(a) (b)
Summed Points Trapezoidal Rule
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 0 30 60 90 120 150 180

(c) (d)
Figure 15. Effect of changing step sizes on summation vs. trapezoidal

rule integrals for data points taken every 10-20 degrees.
The error due to the summation integral can become much

worse with the desired end points dont line up with the edge
of the rectangles used in the sum. The CTIA has
established two near-horizon integration metrics (NHPRP
and NHPIS) with two ranges (horizon /8 (22.5) and
horizon /4 (45)). As can be seen in figure 16, when
summed per the equation in the CTIA test plan, the /4
result has a large error signified by the crosshatched
sections. It just so happens that the edge of the summed
rectangles end up on the edge of the /8 region so that the
result there is acceptable. For the trapezoidal integral, while
the end data points line up on the edge of the /4 region
and not the /8 region, it is a simple matter to interpolate
the end points in order to only cover the desired region, thus
provided an accurate result no matter what the selected
range.

Rev. A, P#399783
Continuous Integral Summed Points

3 5 3 3 5 3
4 8 8 4 4 8 8 4
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 0 30 60 90 120 150 180

(a) (b)
Summed Points Trapezoidal Rule

3 5 3 3 5 3
4 8 8 4 4 8 8 4
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 0 30 60 90 120 150 180

(c) (d)
Figure 16. Effect of truncating data at the two CTIA Near Horizon Partial
Power integration limits on summation vs. trapezoidal rule integrals for
data points taken every 15 degrees.
The previous results are presented for the 15 steps of the

radiated test used to generate the NHPRP. However,
currently the CTIA specifies a 30 step for the sensitivity test
used to generate the NHPIS value. If the sum given for
NHPIS is used, the /4 region lines up with the edge of the
rectangles and the /8 region sums only the values along
the 90 elevation! The following table details the relative
errors between the theoretical values for an isotropic source
and a tuned dipole and the results obtained by summing
individual data points vs. using the trapezoidal integration for
a number of step sizes. As shown, for the total radiated
power integral, the difference between the two methods is
negligible, with both methods having a worst-case error of -
0.1 dB for the isotropic source at 30 steps. At that step
size, both methods are underestimating the TRP since
theyre attempting to approximate a circle with course
straight lines. As predicted, the summation method has a
difficult time with the near-horizon partial results, with the

Rev. A, P#399783
/4 region giving significant errors for the 5 and 15 step

sizes (2.5 and 7.5 segments left over, respectively) while
the /8 region fails miserably for 30 steps, giving over a dB
of error for both sources. In general, the results shown in
the table support the apparent conclusion from the graphs
above, that the trapezoidal rule integration provides a better
result than the summation method, providing roughly
equivalent or significantly better results in most cases. In the
cases where the summation rule appears to produce a better
result, the difference in error magnitude between the two
methods is of the same order of magnitude as each
methods difference from the theoretical value.

Rev. A, P#399783
11.3.2.19 Summary
The need for antenna pattern information is increasing, as
the EMC community moves to higher frequencies and more
advanced techniques, and as wireless devices continue to
pervade our everyday RF environment. The techniques for
complex pattern measurement are rather straightforward, but
there are some pitfalls. However, the calculations involved
to determine certain antenna properties can be much more
complicated. Nonetheless, with appropriate care and
understanding of the associated quantities, it is not difficult to
obtain excellent results. The information provided here can
help even the novice RF or EMC Engineer to determine a
wide variety of antenna properties.

Rev. A, P#399783

Rev. A, P#399783
12 Making Pattern Measurements Using EMQuest
12.1 Introduction
EMQuest provides a variety of powerful antenna pattern
measurement tests bundled as the EMQ-100 Antenna Pattern
Measurement Software package. The pattern measurement tests
that will be available will depend on the options purchased with
your EMQuest EMQ-100 license. The available tests are designed
to perform both passive testing of antennas and active testing of
wireless devices. With the appropriate parameter settings,
measurements compliant to the Cellular Telecommunications and
Internet Associations (CTIAs) Mobile Station Over-the-Air
Performance Test Plan may be obtained. This section will describe
some of the basics for configuring each test for typical pattern
measurements. For more information on general pattern
measurement concepts, terms, and theory, refer to the Pattern
Measurement Basics section in this online manual. This section
assumes that the reader has read the Getting Started section and
is familiar with the basic operation of the EMQuest package,
including equipment configuration and parameter file generation. In
addition to the material provided here, each page of the parameters
for a selected pattern test will have additional detailed information
on those parameters. Use the context sensitive help to obtain more
information on a given parameter or page.
12.2 Pattern Measurement Test Types

The EMQ-100 package is intended primarily for performing polar or
spherical pattern measurements, although it currently also provides
rudimentary support for linear, planar, and cylindrical pattern
measurements as well. These latter capabilities are provided as a
bonus feature and may be enhanced in future releases, as the
market requires. The available post-processing and analysis
features are designed solely for the polar and spherical patterns,
and the documentation will concentrate on those tests. Given the
increasing number of pattern tests available, they have been
subdivided into categories:

Rev. A, P#399783
12.2.1 Scalar Pattern Measurements

Scalar pattern measurements are suitable for active or
passive devices. The available scalar pattern tests can be
divided into two categories based on the positioning
equipment available or the data desired. Using a single-axis
positioner (or a single-axis of a multi-axis positioner (MAPS))
produces 2-D polar patterns that plot signal magnitude as a
function of positioner angle. With a two-axis positioner such
as a MAPS, a full spherical surface is covered producing 3-D
spherical surface patterns that plot signal magnitude as a
function of the angles of both positioner axes. For either of
these test configurations, signal magnitude data can be
acquired for either a single polarization of the measurement
antenna, or for two orthogonal polarizations simultaneously.
This results in a total of four possible scalar radiated pattern
tests:
12.2.2 Vector Pattern Measurements

A bonus feature for users making passive antenna
measurements using a vector network analyzer is a set of
vector versions of the same tests. These vector tests allow
capturing both magnitude and phase or real and imaginary
parts of the vector pattern. The vector tests do not currently
support the same post-processing features as the scalar
tests above, but they will be enhanced in future releases as
the market requires.
12.2.3 Sensitivity Pattern Measurements

For sensitivity testing of cellular mobile stations, there is
another set of tests for performing sensitivity pattern
measurements. These follow the same data acquisition
processes as the scalar pattern measurements, but perform
sensitivity post-processing on the data instead of total
radiated power processing.

Rev. A, P#399783
12.2.4 Throughput Pattern Measurements

The optional EMQ-105 Network Throughput Test Package
provides four additional pattern tests for testing network
throughput of wireless networking components. These
follow the same basic data acquisition processes as the
scalar pattern measurements, but instead acquire
throughput as a function of attenuation at each position (see
Throughput Tester/Attenuator hybrid for more information).
The resulting post processing is considerably different as
well.
12.2.5 Configuring a Pattern Test

pattern test.
12.2.5.1 Hardware Setup

Normally, the required hardware for pattern testing is
installed at system setup and little day-to-day modification is
required. In general, pattern measurements require a
properly configured GPIB controlled single- or dual-axis
positioning system, a single-or dual-polarized measurement
antenna (MA), and appropriate cabling and test equipment
(network analyzer, spectrum analyzer, etc.). Testing of
wireless devices will also require a base station simulator to
establish and maintain a telephone call to the wireless
device.
For passive antennas, a cable must be routed from the
output of the network analyzer, or tracking/signal generator
to the antenna under test. For active wireless devices, the
cable is routed from the base station simulator to one or
more communication antennas placed near the device using
RF switches as necessary. The communication antennas
should be placed so as not to interfere with the pattern
measurement, while still maintaining a strong signal
connection to the wireless device. Splitters/combiners may
be used to connect the base station simulator to the
measurement antenna along with the receiver, but care
should be taken to ensure that the proper calibration is used
for the path loss and to avoid cross-talk issues between the
simulator and receiver.

Rev. A, P#399783
Each polarization of the measurement antenna should be

connected to a receiver. For dual-polarization tests, this can
be accomplished in a number of ways. Most network
analyzers have two receivers built in and can be used
directly for passive antenna testing. This requires direct
access to the receiver ports, which is standard on many
analyzers and an option on others. For other receivers, two
different receivers (spectrum analyzers, tuned receivers,
power meters) may be used, but additional testing should be
performed to determine a relative correction between the two
receivers to adjust for any difference in their readings at the
same input level. Without this correction, there may be
significant anomalies in the resulting pattern. A less
expensive solution is to use one receiver and an RF switch
to toggle between two polarizations. This is slower since the
measurements must always occur sequentially rather than
simultaneously, but it eliminates any difference between
equipment. In all cases, both paths from the antenna under
test (AUT) through the measurement antenna to the
receiver(s) must be calibrated as described in Pattern
Measurement Basics and applied as described below. For
best results, a pair of phase-matched RF cables is
recommended for dual-polarization tests.
Configure and label the required test equipment using the
Equipment Control Panel. Be sure to enable any installed
options or features that are required and use labels that
clearly identify the equipment. These labels will be used to
identify the equipment in the test parameters.
12.2.5.2 Parameters
Create a new parameter file and then select the desired test
to enter the necessary test information. Refer to the help for
each page of the parameters for more details on each
parameter. Most parameters have default settings which will
allow an almost immediate "ready to run" state. Its only
necessary to select the appropriate equipment and press the
Run button to start a test. However, these default settings
probably wont be exactly whats required for a given
application, so its necessary to review and modify the
parameters as needed.
In general, the Parameters node controls the basic
operation of the test. It allows setting the desired range of
motion of the positioner axes for the test, as well as
positioning step size or continuous (as fast as possible) data

Rev. A, P#399783
acquisition, and, for two-axis tests, the order of data

acquisition. While data acquisition order (the difference
between "Conical Section" and "Great Circle" order) has little
effect on the final data acquired, it can have significant
effects on the speed of the test. Using the "Conical Section"
order (primary axis = theta from 0-180, and secondary axis
= phi from 0-360) is recommended for the ETS-Lindgren
MAPS since the phi-axis runs twice as fast as the theta-axis,
allowing the same surface area to be covered in less time.
In addition, acquiring data in this order allows the close
pattern and single-point or extrapolate poles optimizations to
be used to reduce measurement time as well. Use the
single-point poles optimization to only measure one data
point at theta = 0 and theta = 180 and rotate the vector
sum around the phi axis to generate all of the corresponding
data points at each angle for each polarization. Use the
extrapolate poles optimization to create the data points at
theta = 0 and theta = 180 based on the average value of
the next nearest conical cut. Note that while this may not be
the correct value for this position, it will have no effect on
post processed quantities such as TRP and gain since the
net contribution of the points at the poles is zero. Use the
close surface optimization to duplicate the phi = 0 data at
phi = 360. This ensures that no gaps are seen in the 3-D
plot, due to slight differences in repeat measurements at the
same point, but more importantly it allows reducing the
amount of data measured by not ever measuring a value at
360. Just reduce the range of phi axis motion to one step
less than 360 and then check the Close Surface
optimization.
The Parameters node also allows labeling the polarization
associated with each measurement channel and control over
the actual data to be acquired (e.g. single points vs.
frequency dependent data).
The Frequency node is used to set the desired frequency
range or points for the test. The desired settings will depend
on the equipment used, the data acquisition settings in the
Parameters node and the frequency stability of the signal
source. For most simple patterns, a zero-span setting is
preferable.
Use the Equipment node to select and configure the
equipment to be used for the test. Select the desired
positioner(s), making sure that the appropriate positioner is
selected for each axis of a two-axis test. Remember, each
axis of a multi-axis positioner will have to have its own driver
Rev. A, P#399783
configured in the control panel. For ETS-Lindgren

positioners, the default GPIB addresses for the two axes will
be 8 and 9. If the positioners are selected backwards into
the equipment selection fields, or the GPIB addresses are
wrong, erroneous results will be obtained. Set the speed
settings appropriate to the test. If continuous acquisition is
used, make sure the continuous acquisition speed of the
positioner is slow enough to acquire the desired points per
revolution. For stepped acquisition, adjust the stepped
speed setting to minimize vibration at each stop while
keeping it high enough to maintain the desired test speed.
The delay setting can be used to allow vibration to dampen
between each step prior to measuring data.
Also select the desired analyzer/receiver for the
measurement. Dual-polarization tests require two channel
receivers, while single-polarization tests only need one.
Dual channel requirements can be satisfied by a dual
receiver network analyzer or by using dual-channel hybrids
to combine two devices to appear to the test as one. Adjust
the desired device settings for the chosen instrument(s).
Most spectrum analyzers allow setting resolution and video
bandwidth, or leaving them auto-coupled to the frequency
span. Sweep time settings are typically used when in zero-
span, but it is normally left auto-coupled to the bandwidth
settings when a frequency span is used. Attenuation and
reference level settings can be used to adjust the
relationship between the noise floor, the available dynamic
range in the analyzer window, and the signal level(s) to be
measured. The trigger settings are usually set to free run.
Other trigger options are normally only used for zero-span
tests to synchronize the trace to a specific event. For
network analyzers, settings such as points per trace, IF
bandwidth, averaging, and output power are available. For
single frequency pattern tests, the points per trace should be
set to the minimum for fastest acquisition rate. The
bandwidth should be set to provide sufficient dynamic range.
Note that the HP/Agilent 87XX series of network analyzers
contain a defect that will cause erroneous results for long
signal paths unless the bandwidth is set to 30 Hz or lower.
This is apparently due to the analyzer stepping to the next
frequency before the signal at the current frequency has
made it through the path and been measured. For all
receiver types, the calibration option, which performs a
cable/path loss calibration prior to the test, is normally not
used. Note that doing so will result in relative data being

Rev. A, P#399783
acquired no matter what the labeling and acquisition

selections made in the Parameters node. This is because,
when calibrated, the analyzer will subtract the reference
calibration from the current reading to provide the difference
(always a relative value in dB, not power in dBm). Improper
use of the calibration capability may result in erroneous
results.
Most equipment drivers support pre-defined parameter
configurations, which can be defined in the equipment
control panel and then selected into the equipment
parameters by right-clicking on the equipment parameter
pane to display a list. This allows common parameter
configurations to be pre-defined and quickly selected to
configure a test.
Select the desired output format under the Corrections
node. The nodes beneath Corrections provide a number of
correction selection panels for different values used in the
post processing. For dual-polarization tests, three panels
allow the application of appropriate corrections for each
polarization separately, as well as a common correction for
both. For single-polarization tests, there is only one
correction panel. For total radiated power testing, the range
calibration information should be applied using these panes.
Since the range path loss correction is in the denominator of
the TRP/EIRP formula, the measured frequency response
(typically generated from a frequency response calibration of
the range) should be subtracted from the measured data.
Thus, it should be applied as a negative correction. For dual
polarized tests there should be a separate range
measurement for each polarization of the measurement
antenna, so use the polarization specific corrections to apply
these. The gain of the reference antenna used for the range
calibration is in the numerator of the TRP/EIRP formula, so it
should be added to the measured data. For dual polarized
tests the gain data could be applied to both polarizations
separately using the individual polarization correction nodes,
but a common correction node is provided to correct both
polarizations with the same value. For sensitivity tests, the
signs of the corrections are inverted (add range path loss
and subtract gain) for TIS/EIS.
In addition to the measurement corrections node(s), there is
a node for specifying the antenna port input power (APIP),
which is used to calculate gain and efficiency using the
directivity and total radiated power. For relative
measurements, the APIP is used to offset the data from
Rev. A, P#399783
relative power in dB to absolute power in dBm. For

sensitivity patterns, the equivalent correction is the
conducted sensitivity, which allows entering a reference
value for the sensitivity of the receiver at the point where the
antenna is attached.
Use the Paths node to specify any custom output paths
and/or output templates for this data. Otherwise the test will
use those configured under the Tools : Options menu.
Use the Output node to reduce or interpolate the tabular
data shown in the Table tab and in report output. Use the
Notification tab to change the default test completion
notification for this test from that configured in the Tools :
Options dialog.
12.3 Mobile Phone Testing

EMQuest is capable of performing active testing of mobile stations,
measuring either radiated power or sensitivity data at each position.
For radiated power, patterns can be acquired using either a
dedicated receiver, such as a spectrum analyzer, or by using the
power measurement capabilities of a communication tester. Note,
however, that the receiver of a communication tester typically lacks
the dynamic range necessary to accurately measure a pattern. For
sensitivity, the communication tester is used as the measuring
instrument.
To perform fully automated radiated power measurements using a
communication tester and receiver, configure a hybrid driver for the
required equipment combination (i.e. communication tester and
receiver hybrid for single polarization tests; communication
tester/receiver/switch hybrid or communication tester/dual receiver
hybrid for dual polarization tests). The hybrid will normally only
accept list frequency data, so configure the list frequency table to
correspond to the desired test channels. Use the Wireless Channel
Tool to easily enter the test frequencies for the desired channels.
On the Parameters page, set the Receiver Mode to Absolute and
the Data Acquisition Mode to Frequency Range. The hybrid will
handle setting the analyzer to zero span and changing the channel
and center frequency for each data point, as well as ensuring that
the call is maintained. The positioner should be set to stepped
mode to ensure that all data is acquired at the same position. Use
the close surface and single point poles optimizations as described
above to reduce the total test time.
For stand-alone radiated power measurements (no automation of
communication tester) a single channel can be measured. When

Rev. A, P#399783
using a spectrum analyzer, set the Receiver Mode to Absolute and

the Data Acquisition Mode to Filtered Trace Point and configure the
Frequency Range to zero span, centered at the desired channel.
Manually establish the call and direct the mobile to the required
channel and power level.
The following table lists some recommended settings for using a
spectrum analyzer. Ensure that the analyzer has sufficient
resolution and sweep rate, and configure its parameters to the
following:
1
Dependent on available spectrum analyzer resolution. Its
important that there be enough resolution to detect all peaks
and nulls in the resulting signal. The specified value should
be acceptable for a 501 point/per/trace analyzer. For
analyzers with fewer points, reduce the span to just slightly
wider than the maximum pulse width.
2
For multislot measurements, widen this span by multiplying
by the appropriate number of timeslots to be measured and
set the GSM Timeslots to the same number of slots.
3
The positive peak detector has been used traditionally for
pulsed measurements, however the benefits of the RMS
detector make it likely that it will replace the peak detector
for pulsed power measurements in the future.

Rev. A, P#399783
4
The RMS detector is preferred, as it averages many
samples for each data point. The sample detector only
records one sample per data point. The trace is noisier,
resulting in a noisier resulting average power.
5
The trigger level should be set just above the noise floor (5-
10 dB), sufficient to avoid spurious triggers from the noise
floor, but low enough to provide maximum dynamic range.
6
The attenuation and reference level settings should be
adjusted to give maximum dynamic range (lowest noise
floor) while ensuring that the maximum signal level received
stays away from the top of the spectrum analyzer graticule.
The attenuation should be set to the minimum value possible
that still allows a reference level thats at least 5 dB above
the maximum expected input to the analyzer. For most OTA
configurations, a reference level of 0 dBm and 0 dB
attenuation work well, however for lower path losses or
stronger mobile signals, a higher reference level is required,
usually requiring the addition of some attenuation. Gain
compression is likely if the signal gets within a few dB of or
passes the top of the spectrum analyzer window, depending
on the instrument. The ceiling level setting is provided for
the filter to detect this occurrence and avoid bad data. Set
the ceiling just below the top of the spectrum window for
most configurations. The floor level is used to ensure that
valid data is detected above the noise floor. Results below
this level typically represent a dropped call. Set the floor
level a few dB above the noise floor to ensure that valid data
can be distinguished from the noise floor. If the signal
moves outside the window between the ceiling and floor, the
software will retry the specified number of times and then
pop up a dialog for user intervention.

GPRS/EGPRS and WCDMA are new test technologies that
have not be well standardized. These are preliminary
recommendations and subject to change..

Rev. A, P#399783
For sensitivity measurements, configure to use a communication

tester for single polarization tests or a communication tester/switch
hybrid for dual polarized tests. Refer to the help sections for the
given test and communication tester parameter frames for more
information on the available settings. Given the amount of time
necessary to perform each sensitivity measurement, larger angular
steps are normally used to reduce total test time. Be sure to use
the close surface and single point poles optimizations as described
above to reduce the total test time even further.
12.4 CTIA Testing

There are a number of specific settings required to perform total
radiated power (TRP) and total isotropic sensitivity (TIS) testing of
wireless devices per the CTIA test plan. The settings given here
are based on the current revision (version 2.1) of the standard and
are subject to change. Always refer to the latest standard for all
settings and procedures.
For TRP testing, start with the scalar Two-Axis Dual-Polarization
Pattern Measurement and set the step size for both axes to 15,
and the axis measurement mode to stepped. (For fast receivers,
continuous mode may be used for single frequency measurements
by specifying the appropriate 15 spacing for the output points.
However, this may not be considered to officially comply with the
standard.) Configure the test equipment selection and associated
parameters as indicated above. Refer to Appendix D of the CTIA
Mobile Station Over-the-Air Performance Test Plan for more
detailed information on power measurement requirements. Note
that the settings shown above represent settings that have been
incorporated into the current release (V2.1) or are being
recommended for incorporation into the next release of the test
plan.
For TIS testing, use a Two-Axis Dual-Polarization Sensitivity
Pattern Measurement and configure as described under Mobile
Phone Testing above, setting the step size for both axes to
30.refer to the latest version of the CTIA OTA test plan for more
detailed information on the required sensitivity settings.

Rev. A, P#399783
12.5 Running a Pattern Test

Once a parameter file has been developed for the test, the data
acquisition process is as simple as all other EMQuest tests. Make
sure that all cables, equipment, and the AUT are mounted,
connected, warmed up, and operating properly (for wireless testing,
establish a call if required), insure that the positioners are
unobstructed and free to rotate, and press the "Run" button. The
test will proceed through the automated sequence in the order
specified in the parameters. Upon completion, the test will
automatically calculate all of the post-processed pattern properties
(TRP, Gain, etc.), save the data to a time-stamped raw data file,
create a new window for the resulting data file, and display the
Graph tab.

Rev. A, P#399783
13 Post Processing
At the end of a test, all post-processing is performed automatically. The
corrections are applied as specified, for dual-polarized tests, the total
power is calculated by combining the two polarizations assuming linearly
polarized signals, and then a variety of values are calculated based on the
resulting data. For single-polarization tests, the calculations are
performed on the measured polarization as though it represents the total
power. Finally, the data is reformatted as requested in the Corrections
node of the parameters. The list below describes the various antenna
attributes that are calculated. The available values are different for single-
axis and two-axis tests, and are different for scalar tests vs. sensitivity
tests or throughput tests. Note that by default the post processing
algorithms expect the and angles to be in the range of 0-360 with no
overlap anywhere on the surface (i.e. . = 0-180 and = 0-360 or vice-
versa). Deviating from this assumption may produce unexpected/invalid
results for some of the reported values.
Ant. Port Input Pwr. (dBm) is simply a re-statement of the value entered
for the APIP correction for scalar tests.
Cond. Sensitivity (dBm) is simply a re-statement of the value entered for
the Conducted Sensitivity correction for sensitivity tests.
Tot. Rad. Pwr. (dBm) is the total radiated power determined by
integrating the surface or circle or portion thereof covered by a scalar test.
EMQuest performs its integration using the trapezoidal rule as described
in Pattern Measurement Basics. If only a partial surface is covered, the
integral will indicate the partial radiated power for that surface. This
value will not be valid without proper range calibration values entered into
the corrections.
TIS (dBm) is the total isotropic sensitivity determined by integrating the
surface or circle or portion thereof covered by a sensitivity test.
Conceptually, it corresponds to the inverse of the TRP for a radiated
power test. EMQuest performs its integration using the trapezoidal rule for
sensitivity as described in Pattern Measurement Basics. If only a partial
surface is covered, the integral will indicate the partial isotropic sensitivity
for that surface. This value will not be valid without proper range
calibration values entered into the corrections.

Rev. A, P#399783
Peak EIRP (dBm) is the traditional effective isotropic radiated power

based on the value of the maximum signal received in a scalar test, once
the range calibration has been applied. This value will not be valid without
proper range calibration values entered into the corrections.
Min. EIS (dBm) is the minimum effective isotropic sensitivity, representing
the most sensitive point measured on a sensitivity test, once the range
calibration has been applied. Conceptually, it corresponds to the inverse
of the peak EIRP for a radiated power test. This value will not be valid
without proper range calibration values entered into the corrections.
Directivity (dBi) is determined as the difference between the peak EIRP
and the TRP for scalar radiated power tests, and the difference between
the TIS and the minimum EIS (note the sign change) for a sensitivity test.
Since it is a ratio of two measured values, this value is accurate whether
or not a valid range calibration has been applied.
Efficiency (dB) is a measure of the loss of the AUT and is given by the
difference between the TRP and the APIP for scalar radiated power tests,
and by the difference between conducted sensitivity and the TIS for
sensitivity measurements. It is also represented as a relative value in %
as Efficiency (%). This value will not be valid without a proper range
calibration and the correct APIP or conducted sensitivity value entered into
the corrections.
Gain (dBi) gain is the combination of efficiency and directivity and is given
by the sum of those two values. This value will not be valid without a
proper range calibration and the correct APIP or conducted sensitivity
value entered into the corrections.
Average Gain (dBi) is defined as the difference between the TRP and
APIP (thus it will be the same value as that reported for Efficiency). This
value only has relevant meaning when analyzing the behavior of a single
cut of a pattern, where understanding the performance of the antenna in
all directions of a single plane may be useful.
NHPRP Pi/4 (dBm), NHPRP Pi/6 (dBm), and NHPRP Pi/8 (dBm) are
near-horizon partial radiated power values required for CTIA tests. They
are calculated using the same trapezoidal rule integration as the TRP,
where the endpoints have been interpolated to = 90 45, 30, or
22.5, respectively. These values will not be valid without proper range
NHPIS Pi/4 (dBm), NHPIS Pi/6 (dBm), and NHPIS Pi/8 (dBm) are
near-horizon partial isotropic sensitivity values required for CTIA tests.
They are calculated using the same trapezoidal rule integration as the TIS,
where the endpoints have been interpolated to = 90 45, 30, or
22.5, respectively. These values will not be valid without proper range

Rev. A, P#399783
Upper Hem. PRP (dBm) and Lower Hem. PRP (dBm) are partial
radiated power values representing the upper and lower hemispheres of
the TRP pattern. They are calculated using the same trapezoidal rule
integration as the TRP, where the endpoints have been interpolated to =
0 to 90 and 90 to 180, respectively. These values will not be valid
Upper Hem. PIS (dBm) and Lower Hem. PIS (dBm) are partial isotropic
sensitivity values representing the upper and lower hemispheres of the
TIS pattern. They are calculated using the same trapezoidal rule
integration as the TIS, where the endpoints have been interpolated to =
0 to 90 and 90 to 180, respectively. These values will not be valid
Partial Surface Ratios (_PRP/TRP and TIS/_PIS ratios) are provided in
both linear (%) and dB units, comparing the near horizon and
hemispherical partial surface results to the TRP/TIS results. These values
clearly indicate what percentage of the total power is included in the partial
surface results, or how much power is lost in the excluded portion(s). The
ratios for TIS are inverted to reflect equivalent quantities to those for TRP.
Front/Back Ratio (dB) is determined by taking the difference between the
peak EIRP or minimum EIS and the value on the exact opposite side of
the pattern from it.
Theta BW () and Phi BW () refer to the beamwidths along the theta and
phi polarization directions. The values + Th. BW (), - Th. BW (), + Phi
BW (), and - Phi BW () refer to the two halves of these beamwidths on
either side of the maximum. To determine these values, two cuts are
taken through the surface intersecting at the maximum EIRP or minimum
EIS point, with the first cut oriented along the theta polarization and the
second cut made perpendicular to the first (note that this cut is not the
same as a phi-angle cut, which corresponds to a conical section cut). For
each cut, the algorithm steps in one-degree increments in each direction
from the peak to find the -3 dB points or until it reaches a total of 360
degrees ( 180).
Beamwidth () refers to the beamwidth along the rotation directions. +
Beamwidth (), and - Beamwidth () refer to the two halves of the
beamwidth on either side of the maximum. To determine these values,
the algorithm steps in one-degree increments from the maximum EIRP or
minimum EIS point along the axis of rotation to find the -3 dB points. If the
beamwidth passes 180, the algorithm assumes a dipole pattern and
stops searching.
Boresight Th. (), Boresight Phi (), and Boresight Angle () refer to the
angular location of the maximum EIRP or minimum EIS.

Rev. A, P#399783
E-Plane BW () and H-Plane BW () refer to the beamwidths parallel to

and perpendicular to the electric field direction at the maximum
EIRP/minimum EIS location as determined from the available polarization
information. The values + E-Plane BW (), - E-Plane BW (), + H-Plane
BW (), and - H-Plane BW () refer to the two halves of these beamwidths
on either side of the maximum. To determine these values, two cuts are
taken through the surface and intersecting at the maximum EIRP or
minimum EIS point, with one oriented along the apparent E-field direction
and the other oriented perpendicular to the first. For each cut, the
algorithm steps in one-degree increments in each direction from the peak
to find the -3 dB points or until it reaches a total of 360 degrees ( 180).
Note: Since this calculation is made based on the available scalar pattern
information only, which has only magnitude information, there is a relative
sign missing between the two components. Therefore, there are typically
two possible orientations for the electric field vector at the boresight
location. The algorithm evaluates every point on the surface for both
possible cuts to determine the best representation of the E- and H-plane
cuts before calculating the resulting beamwidth. This value is only
available for two-axis, dual polarized patterns.
Maximum Power (dBm) is the maximum corrected signal (same as peak
EIRP).
Minimum Power (dBm) is the minimum corrected signal (same as
minimum EIS).
Average Power (dBm) is the average of all measured points. This is
different from the TRP or TIS integral in that neither step size nor any
polar weighting are taken into account.
Max/Min Ratio (dB) is given by the difference between the maximum and
minimum power.
Max/Avg Ratio (dB) is given by the difference between the maximum and
average power.
Min/Avg Ratio (dB) is given by the difference between the minimum and
average power.
Theta Src. Pwr. @ Boresight (dBm) indicates the raw (uncorrected)
source power setting of the communication tester at the boresight
(minimum EIS) direction and specified sensitivity level for the theta
polarization. This value is useful for determining the required
communication tester power level for intermediate channel sensitivity
measurements.

Rev. A, P#399783
Phi Src. Pwr. @ Boresight (dBm) indicates the raw (uncorrected) source
power setting of the communication tester at the boresight (minimum EIS)
direction and specified sensitivity level for the phi polarization. This value
is useful for determining the required communication tester power level for
intermediate channel sensitivity measurements.
Axial Ratio is only available for dual polarized vector patterns and
represents the ratio of major to minor axis for elliptically polarized signals
at boresight. A value of +INF is displayed for perfectly linearly polarized
signals.
13.1 Test Parameters
13.1.1 Parameters Pane, Single-Axis Single-

Polarization Pattern Measurement
The Parameters Pane is used to enter the majority of the
required test parameters specific to this test. The settings
are split between two tabs:
Measurement Configuration contains most of the general
test settings. These parameters include:
Rotational Axis Control controls the range of motion of the
rotational axis. The associated axis can be a turntable or
single axis positioner, or one axis of a two-axis positioner or
MAPS (see the Equipment Pane to select the desired
positioner). The available parameters here include:
Upper Rotational Limit allows the entry of the upper or
clockwise limit of this axis in degrees.
Lower Rotational Limit allows the entry of the lower or
counterclockwise limit of this axis in degrees.
The normal range of operation is 0-360, and, although the
software will support different ranges, the effects on the
antenna property calculations are undefined.
Rotational Step Size allows entry of the step size for this
axis in degrees. This control is disabled when the motion is
set to continuous.

Rev. A, P#399783
Polarization is used to indicate the polarization of the

receive antenna used for the test. The single-polarization
tests are normally used when only one receiver is available,
or when this is the only information required. If two receivers
or a dual channel network analyzer are available, a dual-
polarization pattern measurement will record both
polarizations simultaneously and calculate the net power
when done. The available choices for the polarization
setting are Horizontal and Vertical. This selection simply
labels the data appropriately.
Rotational Axis Measurement Mode controls the behavior
of the rotational axis during a measurement. The available
modes are:
Continuous, which will run the axis at the continuous speed
setting of the motor (see the documentation for the
positioner for more information) and acquire data as it
moves. This mode provides the fastest test, since the
positioner does not have to accelerate and decelerate
between each measured point, but there are some
disadvantages. The number of points measured per
revolution is given approximately by the period of rotation
divided by the data acquisition speed of the receiver. The
test records the axis position before and after each
measurement and by default assumes that each data point
was recorded at the midpoint between those two positions.
However, the data could really be measured anywhere
between the two positions, resulting in a certain amount of
skew to the measured results. The larger the resultant step
between each measured point, the larger the possible skew,
but it should always be the same relative value, assuming
the measurement is repeatable. The Skew Correction
provides a way to manually adjust for this effect. The skew
correction can be used to move the reported measurement
position anywhere between the first position (-50% skew)
and the second position (+50% skew). This mode will give
the best results with a very fast receiver or at very low
positioner speed settings. Note: This mode is susceptible to
variations due to processor loading and Windows message
processing. Any interruption during data acquisition will
cause gaps in the resulting data since the positioner will
continue to move but the test will not be able to acquire data.
For best results, the user should avoid interacting with
menus or other applications during continuous data
acquisition.

Rev. A, P#399783
Stepped, which will step the axis at the stepped speed

setting of the motor, stopping at each step to acquire a
single data point. This mode gives the best possible result
since the data is acquired at the exact position indicated.
For tests which require dwell time at each point (such as
swept frequency measurements) stepped mode is necessary
to insure that the entire measurement is performed at the
same physical position.
Antenna Position is used to record information about the
position of the antenna under test (AUT). Currently these
fields are simply informational.
Transmit Height is used to indicate an offset from boresight
in a fully anechoic environment, or to indicate a distance
above the ground plane in a semi-anechoic environment.
Note that when using a MAPS, it will normally not be
possible to offset in one absolute direction since any
mounting offset will rotate around the horizontal axis.
However, this field can still be used to represent the offset
from center if desired.
Separation Distance is used to record the separation
distance between the AUT and the receive antenna (the
range length). Future enhancements to the antenna
property calculations may use this value to determine
additional information.
Pattern Type allows selection of different single-axis pattern
acquisition modes. Note: This feature is provided as part of
a future expansion to provide non-polar pattern
measurements in addition to the default polar pattern. All
associated labeling and features may not be complete.
Polar is the default pattern type for the single-axis pattern
test. It requires a rotational positioner and is designed to
acquire data along a single circular cut around the antenna
under test.
Linear requires a linear positioner and is designed to
acquire data along a single linear axis. It is the counterpart
to a planar 2-axis measurement, or the linear axis of a
cylindrical pattern. This mode is currently only provided for
data acquisition and future expansion.
Data Format contains settings related to data acquisition
and processing modes. These parameters include:

Rev. A, P#399783
Receiver Mode determines how the receiver will be

configured for the test and how the measured data is
interpreted. The available modes are:
Absolute (Measure A and B in dBm) will use a network
analyzer as a tuned receiver and record power levels in
dBm. Most other receivers (spectrum analyzers, power
meters, etc.) only support this mode in normal operation.
For this mode to be valid, the reference (cable) calibration
should be disabled (set to none) on the equipment settings.
Relative (Measure A/R and B/R in dB) will measure the
receive channels of a network analyzer relative to its
reference signal. Other receiver types can also generate
relative measurements if a reference calibration is performed
prior to the test (see the equipment pane for the given
receiver). The reference level is set to 0 dB by the EMQuest
software. The equipment driver records the reference signal
and subtracts it from later measurements to generate a
relative result.
Data Acquisition Mode controls how the data will be read
from the receiver.
Max Marker performs a peak search with a marker after
each sweep and returns that value. This mode is used
primarily for CW signals that may not be centered in the
analyzer frequency span, or to find the peak of time
dependent signals (such as TDMA digital packets) in zero-
span mode. For tuned receivers and power meters, this
mode is the same as the center frequency mode unless the
device driver or hybrid is configured to simulate a swept
measurement. (Note that for some analyzers in zero-span
mode, the marker may not behave as described here.)
Center Frequency records the marker reading at the center
frequency of the analyzer span. This mode is best when a
frequency span is required (i.e. to support time gating on a
network analyzer) but the frequency of the maximum signal
may vary as a function of position. (Note that for some
analyzers in zero-span mode, the marker may not behave as
described here.)

Rev. A, P#399783
Frequency Range records an entire trace from the analyzer

at each data acquisition point. This mode should only be
used in stepped mode, since in continuous measurement
mode, the location of the first frequency will be different from
the last frequency, resulting in significant skew. In addition,
continuous measurement mode will acquire data at random
positions, which will result in interpolation errors in a
transposed dataset. Note: This mode can generate an
excessive amount of data! The resulting data set will be N
times the size of a traditional pattern generated by either of
the marker modes, where N is the number of frequency
points supported by the equipment used. This can result in
long load and display times as well as issues in graphing the
resulting data. In this mode, data is acquired as magnitude
vs. frequency traces as a function of position. Due to the
organization of the data in this form, normal polar plotting of
a pattern is not available. Use the transpose option under
the Corrections tab to format the data as patterns vs.
frequency. The pattern at each frequency can then be
viewed by using the reduced dataset option of the graph
control.
Filtered Trace Point is intended for use with a spectrum
analyzer in zero-span mode. It allows applying different
processing filters to a measured trace and return a single
value to be recorded. A number of filters are provided in the
various spectrum analyzer drivers for recording peak,
average, or pulse signal levels. A number of the filters
provided are compatible with the requirements of the CTIAs
Mobile Station Over-the-Air Performance Test Plan. Refer to
the help section for the particular equipment parameter
frame for more information on the available filters. Since
these filters require an entire trace be transferred from the
analyzer and processed, it is recommended that this
acquisition mode only be used in stepped measurement
mode.
Network Analyzer Ports allows overriding the default
configuration of using the network analyzer as a two-port
receiver. The available settings are:

Rev. A, P#399783
A and B Ports uses the network analyzer as a dual channel

receiver, the default configuration for a dual-polarization
measurement. This allows both polarizations to be
measured simultaneously, and therefore is ideal for a dual-
polarization measurement. While many network analyzers
provide direct access to the receivers as a standard feature,
a number of newer network analyzers provide this feature
only as an option.
S Parameters treats the network analyzer as a normal S-
parameter network analyzer, utilizing any associated
switching and directional couplers. A single channel is
configured to read S21 for the pattern measurement. This
feature is provided to allow data acquisition using a network
analyzer without the direct access described above.
Optimizations provides access to features intended to
decrease test time. Such features may have significant side
effects, so care must be taken to understand the benefits
and risks associates with these features. The available
optimizations are:
Close Pattern duplicates the first data point as the last data
point and adds 360 to the recorded position. This results in
a closed surface and avoids the "seam" sometimes visible in
polar plots. This also allows speeding up a test by not re-
measuring the end points. The requested range of motion
can be reduced and still result in complete pattern coverage.
Without this option, reducing the range of motion would
result in a partial polar plot, which would be integrated as a
partial cut rather than the complete 360 for the post-
processing calculations. This option is only valid for polar
pattern measurements.
Options allow modifying other aspects of the test. The
available options are:
Record Actual Axis Position forces the test to record the
actual physical position of the positioner at each stepped
position instead of the target position. This is only necessary
if the positioners targeting capability is insufficient to position
to the target within the desired positioning uncertainty.

Rev. A, P#399783
13.1.2 Parameters Pane, Single-Axis Dual-Polarization

Pattern Measurement
set to continuous.
Polarization (Channel 1/Channel 2) assigns the
corresponding polarization of the dual polarized receive
antenna to each channel of the dual channel receiver. Note
that a dual-polarization pattern measurement will record both
when done. While two separate antennas may be used
instead of a single dual-polarized antenna, there is no
provision for accommodating any offset in position between
the two. Thus, the net pattern and associated antenna
properties will be incorrect if there is any boresight offset
between the two antenna polarizations. Selecting
Horizontal/Vertical will make channel 1 record the
horizontal polarization and channel 2 record the vertical,
while selecting Vertical/Horizontal will reverse this.
modes are:

Rev. A, P#399783

between each measured point, but there are som
divided by the data acquisition speed of the receivers. The
acquisition.

Rev. A, P#399783

under test.
Receiver Mode determines how the receivers will be

Rev. A, P#399783

relative result.
from the receivers.
described here.)
transposed dataset.

Rev. A, P#399783
Note: This mode can generate an excessive amount of

data! The resulting data set will be N times the size of a
traditional pattern generated by either of the marker modes,
where N is the number of frequency points supported by the
equipment used. This can result in long load and display
times as well as issues in graphing the resulting data. In this
mode, data is acquired as magnitude vs. frequency traces as
a function of position. Due to the organization of the data in
this form, normal polar plotting of a pattern is not available.
Use the transpose option under the Corrections tab to format
the data as patterns vs. frequency. The pattern at each
frequency can then be viewed by using the reduced dataset
option of the graph control.

mode.
optimizations are:

Rev. A, P#399783
Measure Polarizations Sequentially will cause the dual
polarized test to perform two single polarization tests
sequentially, pausing in between each test sequence to
allow manually changing the polarization of the
measurement antenna. This option is only available for dual
polarized tests.
13.1.3 Parameters Pane, Two-Axis Single-Polarization

Pattern Measurement
Primary/Secondary Axis Control controls the range of
motion of each axis of the two-axis positioner or MAPS and
selects which positioner to use for each. For a two-axis test,
the primary axis is stepped, while the secondary axis can be
stepped or run continuously while data is being acquired.
The secondary axis will make a complete circuit from one
limit setting to the other between each step of the primary
axis. The available parameters here include:

Rev. A, P#399783

To cover the surface of an entire sphere once, one axis
should have its upper limit set to 180, while the other should
be set to 360. The lower limits should normally be set to
zero. Going beyond the 0-180 range on both axes will
result in duplicate points being measured, and will yield
unpredictable antenna property calculation results. The
system can also measure fractional surfaces by reducing the
range of the limits for either or both axes, but again, the
effect on the calculations is undefined. For proper antenna
property calculation results, a full spherical surface should
be measured, with one axis set from 0-180 and the other
from 0-360.
axis in degrees. This control is disabled for the secondary
axis when the motion is set to continuous.
Positioner allows selection of which axis (Phi Angle or
Theta Angle for spherical patterns, X or Y for planar
patterns, and Phi Angle or Z for cylindrical patterns) of the
two-axis positioner to use for the primary or secondary axis.
The controls are linked between the primary and secondary
axis so that selecting Phi Angle/X/Phi Angle for one will
automatically set the other to Theta Angle/Y/Z.
tests are normally used when only one receiver is available,
or when this is the only information required. If two
receivers, a receiver and remote RF switch, or a dual-
channel network analyzer are available, a dual-polarization
pattern measurement will record both polarizations
simultaneously and calculate the net power when done.
To minimize confusion in interpreting data, the polarizations
are labeled to correspond to the motion direction that is
parallel to the polarization direction. That is, for spherical
patterns, the Theta polarization should be set perpendicular
to the theta rotational axis (parallel to the measurement
antennas rotation about that axis) and the Phi polarization
should be set perpendicular to the phi rotational axis.
Similarly for cylindrical patterns, the Phi polarization should
be perpendicular to the rotational axis. For linear positioners

Rev. A, P#399783
(X, Y, and Z), the polarization should be along the

corresponding axis of motion. This is simply a labeling
convention and does not affect the resultant data. If a non-
standard configuration is used where the polarization
direction does not correspond to the directions of motion, the
labels may be used arbitrarily, and their meanings
interpreted as such.
The available selections are Theta or Phi for spherical
patterns, X or Y for planar patterns, and Phi or Z cylindrical
patterns.
Secondary Axis Measurement Mode controls the behavior
of the secondary axis during a measurement. The available
modes are:
acquisition.

Rev. A, P#399783

For tests that require dwell time at each point (such as swept
frequency measurements) stepped mode is necessary to
insure that the entire measurement is performed at the same
physical position.
Pattern Type allows selection of different two-axis pattern
a future expansion to provide non-spherical pattern
measurements in addition to the default spherical pattern.
All associated labeling and features may not be complete.
Spherical is the default pattern type for the two-axis pattern
test. It requires two orthogonal rotational positioners and is
designed to acquire data along the theta and phi axes of a
spherical coordinate system (i.e. the longitude and latitude
lines of a globe).
Planar requires two orthogonal linear positioners and is
designed to acquire data along an X-Y planar grid. This
mode is currently only provided for data acquisition and
future expansion.
Cylindrical requires one linear positioner and one rotational
positioner with parallel axes (orthogonal axes of motion) and
is designed to acquire data along a cylindrical grid. This
future expansion.

Rev. A, P#399783

Receiver Mode determines how the receiver will be
relative result.
from the receiver.
described here.)

Rev. A, P#399783

transposed dataset.

this form, normal 3-D plotting of a pattern is not available.

mode.
optimizations are:

Rev. A, P#399783
Single Point Poles are only valid for full spherical pattern
measurements using the conical section (stepped theta)
data acquisition order. When checked, the program will only
measure the points at theta = 0, 180, and 360 at the initial
phi angle. The corresponding data will then be rotated
around the Z-axis for all other phi angles. The assumption is
that the total field is constant at these points and only the
polarization direction changes. In an effort to maintain the
appearance of the 3-D plots for both polarizations, the vector
component is rotated through the range of phi values to
generate new values for each polarization. However, a
single scalar measurement is insufficient to determine the
vector direction of the resultant field, so there is a 50%
chance that the rotation will be in the wrong direction. This
can be mitigated by starting from a known polarization such
that the rotation is symmetrical (polarization at phi = 0 is
along one of the two measurement polarizations) or
increases in the expected rotation direction. These issues
will not affect the total field/power plot or any quantities
derived from it. Future revisions may offer a two-point pole
option to determine the actual vector direction.
Close Pattern duplicates the first phi-axis data point as the
last data point and adds 360 to the recorded position. This
results in a closed surface and avoids the "seam" sometimes
visible in polar or 3-D plots. This also allows speeding up a
test by not re-measuring the end points. The requested
range of motion can be reduced for the "seam" axis and still
result in complete pattern coverage. Without this option,
reducing the range of motion would result in a partial
surface, which would be integrated as a partial surface
rather than the complete surface for the post-processing
calculations. This option is only valid for polar, cylindrical, or
full spherical pattern measurements using the conical
section (stepped theta) data acquisition order.

Rev. A, P#399783
Extrapolate Poles provides another optimization for cases

where the exact pattern at the poles is not critical. Since the
spherical integration applies a sin() term to the measured
data, the values of the poles do not affect the integral.
However, EMQuest requires these points to be present in
the data set in order to differentiate between a full surface
integration and a partial surface integration. Selecting this
option will replace the points at theta = 0, and either 180 or
360 with the linear average of all phi values at the next
nearest theta angle. This substitution only occurs if the end
point is not expressly measured. Thus, specifying a theta
range from 0 to 180 will not extrapolate either pole. This
option is only valid for full spherical pattern measurements
using the conical section (stepped theta) data acquisition
order.
receiver. The available settings are:
only as an option.

Rev. A, P#399783
13.1.4 Parameters Pane, Two-Axis Dual-Polarization

Pattern Measurement
from 0-360.

Rev. A, P#399783
Polarization (Channel 1/Channel 2) assigns the

corresponding polarization of the dual polarized receive
antenna to each channel of the dual channel receiver. Note
that a dual-polarization pattern measurement will record both
when done. While two separate antennas may be used
instead of a single dual-polarized antenna, there is no
provision for accommodating any offset in position between
the two. Thus, the net pattern and associated antenna
properties will be incorrect if there is any boresight offset
between the two antenna polarizations.
are labeled to correspond to the motion direction that is
parallel to the polarization direction. That is, for spherical
patterns, the Theta polarization should be set perpendicular
to the theta rotational axis (parallel to the measurement
antennas rotation about that axis) and the Phi polarization
should be set perpendicular to the phi rotational axis.
Similarly for cylindrical patterns, the Phi polarization should
be perpendicular to the rotational axis. For linear positioners
(X, Y, and Z), the polarization should be along the
corresponding axis of motion. This is simply a labeling
Selecting Theta/Phi will make channel 1 record the theta
polarization and channel 2 record the phi, while selecting
Phi/Theta will reverse this. The same is true for X/Y vs. Y/X
for planar patterns and Phi/Z vs. Z/Phi for cylindrical
patterns.
modes are:

Rev. A, P#399783

divided by the data acquisition speed of the receivers. The
and the second position (+50% skew). Continuous mode will
give the best results with a very fast receiver or at very low
acquisition.
physical position.
Rev. A, P#399783

lines of a globe).
future expansion.
future expansion.
Receiver Mode determines how the receivers will be

Rev. A, P#399783

relative result.
from the receivers.
described here.)
transposed dataset. .

Rev. A, P#399783

mode.
optimizations are:
Single Point Poles are only valid for full spherical pattern
measurements using the conical section (stepped theta)
data acquisition order. When checked, the program will only
measure the points at theta = 0, 180, and 360 at the initial
phi angle. The corresponding data will then be rotated
around the Z-axis for all other phi angles. The assumption is
that the total field is constant at these points and only the
polarization direction changes. In an effort to maintain the
appearance of the 3-D plots for both polarizations, the vector
component is rotated through the range of phi values to
generate new values for each polarization. However, a

Rev. A, P#399783
single scalar measurement is insufficient to determine the

vector direction of the resultant field, so there is a 50%
chance that the rotation will be in the wrong direction. This
can be mitigated by starting from a known polarization such
that the rotation is symmetrical (polarization at phi = 0 is
along one of the two measurement polarizations) or
increases in the expected rotation direction. These issues
will not affect the total field/power plot or any quantities
derived from it. Future revisions may offer a two-point pole
option to determine the actual vector direction.
Close Pattern duplicates the first phi-axis data point as the
last data point and adds 360 to the recorded position. This
results in a closed surface and avoids the "seam" sometimes
visible in polar or 3-D plots. This also allows speeding up a
test by not re-measuring the end points. The requested
range of motion can be reduced for the "seam" axis and still
result in complete pattern coverage. Without this option,
reducing the range of motion would result in a partial
surface, which would be integrated as a partial surface
rather than the complete surface for the post-processing
calculations. This option is only valid for polar, cylindrical, or
full spherical pattern measurements using the conical
section (stepped theta) data acquisition order.
Extrapolate Poles provides another optimization for cases
where the exact pattern at the poles is not critical. Since the
spherical integration applies a sin() term to the measured
data, the values of the poles do not affect the integral.
However, EMQuest requires these points to be present in
the data set in order to differentiate between a full surface
integration and a partial surface integration. Selecting this
option will replace the points at theta = 0, and either 180 or
360 with the linear average of all phi values at the next
nearest theta angle. This substitution only occurs if the end
point is not expressly measured. Thus, specifying a theta
range from 0 to 180 will not extrapolate either pole. This
option is only valid for full spherical pattern measurements
using the conical section (stepped theta) data acquisition
order.

Rev. A, P#399783

polarized tests.
13.1.5 Parameters Pane, Single-Axis Sensitivity Pattern

Measurement
required test parameters specific to this test.
set to continuous.
tests are normally used when only one vector network
analyzer signal path is available (i.e. S21), or when this is
the only information required. If two signal paths are
available (i.e. Ports A and B) or a hybrid is used to generate
a dual channel vector analyzer, a dual-polarization pattern
measurement will record both polarizations simultaneously.

Rev. A, P#399783
The available choices for the polarization setting for single-

polarization tests are Horizontal and Vertical. For dual-
polarization tests, selecting Horizontal/Vertical will make
channel 1 record the horizontal polarization and channel 2
record the vertical, while selecting Vertical/Horizontal will
reverse this. These selections simply label the data
appropriately.
modes are:
acquisition.
Rev. A, P#399783

under test.
optimizations are:

Rev. A, P#399783

Remove Single Point Frequency Axis provides a data set
reduction that removes the frequency axis from frequency
dependent data sets having only one frequency point in the
list. The option defaults to "on".
polarized tests.
13.1.5.1 Parameters Pane, Two-Axis Sensitivity Pattern

Measurement
Rev. A, P#399783

from 0-360.
for dual-axis tests are labeled to correspond to the motion
direction that is parallel to the polarization direction. That is,
for spherical patterns, the Theta polarization should be set
perpendicular to the theta rotational axis (parallel to the
measurement antennas rotation about that axis) and the Phi
polarization should be set perpendicular to the phi rotational
axis. Similarly for cylindrical patterns, the Phi polarization
should be perpendicular to the rotational axis. For linear
positioners (X, Y, and Z), the polarization should be along
the corresponding axis of motion. This is simply a labeling

Rev. A, P#399783

The available selections for a single-polarization test are
Theta or Phi for spherical patterns, X or Y for planar
patterns, and Phi or Z for cylindrical patterns. For a dual
polarized test, Selecting Theta/Phi will make channel 1
record the theta polarization and channel 2 record the phi,
while selecting Phi/Theta will reverse this. The same is true
for X/Y vs. Y/X for planar patterns and Phi/Z vs. Z/Phi for
cylindrical patterns.
modes are:
acquisition.

Rev. A, P#399783

physical position.
lines of a globe).
future expansion.

Rev. A, P#399783

future expansion.
optimizations are:
polarized tests.

Rev. A, P#399783
13.1.6 Parameters Pane, Single-Axis Throughput

Pattern Measurement
set to continuous.
appropriately.
modes are:

Rev. A, P#399783

acquisition.

Rev. A, P#399783

under test.
optimizations are:

Rev. A, P#399783

13.1.7 Parameters Pane, Two-Axis Throughput Pattern

Measurement
from 0-360.

Rev. A, P#399783

modes are:

Rev. A, P#399783

positioner speed settings.
Note: This mode is susceptible to variations due to

processor loading and Windows message processing. Any
interruption during data acquisition will cause gaps in the
resulting data since the positioner will continue to move but
the test will not be able to acquire data. For best results, the
user should avoid interacting with menus or other
applications during continuous data acquisition.

physical position.

Rev. A, P#399783

lines of a globe).
future expansion.
future expansion.
optimizations are:

Rev. A, P#399783
13.1.8 Parameters Pane, Single-Axis Vector Pattern

Measurement

Rev. A, P#399783

set to continuous.
appropriately.
modes are:

Rev. A, P#399783

acquisition.

Rev. A, P#399783

under test.
Vector Data Format controls how the vector data is
reported. The available formats are:
Real/Imaginary will record the vector information in unitless
linear real and imaginary pairs.
Log Magnitude/Phase will record the vector information as
log magnitude in dB and phase in degrees.
from the receiver.
described here.)
the last frequency, resulting in significant skew.

Rev. A, P#399783

this form, normal polar plotting of a pattern is not available.

receiver. This setting is not available for dual-polarized
tests. The available settings are:
only as an option.
optimizations are:

Rev. A, P#399783

polarized tests.
13.1.9 Parameters Pane, Two-Axis Vector Pattern

Measurement

Rev. A, P#399783

from 0-360.

Rev. A, P#399783

modes are:
acquisition.

Rev. A, P#399783

physical position.
lines of a globe).
future expansion.
future expansion.

Rev. A, P#399783

Vector Data Format controls how the vector data is
reported. The available formats are:
Real/Imaginary will record the vector information in unitless
linear real and imaginary pairs.
Log Magnitude/Phase will record the vector information as
log magnitude in dB and phase in degrees.
from the receiver.
described here.)
the last frequency, resulting in significant skew.


Rev. A, P#399783

receiver. This setting is not available for dual-polarized
tests. The available settings are:
only as an option.
optimizations are:

Rev. A, P#399783

polarized tests.
13.1.10 Equipment Pane, Pattern Measurement Test

The Equipment Pane is used for selection of test equipment
supported by the selected pattern measurement test. Select
the desired equipment from the available equipment listed in
each combo box. If there is no equipment listed, configure
the appropriate equipment type in the Equipment Control
Panel. (Note that it will be necessary to switch panes in
order to refresh the equipment list after changing settings in
the control panel.) Each selected piece of equipment will
add a node to the tree-view beneath the Equipment node,
allowing entry of test specific equipment configuration
information (i.e. bandwidth, points per trace, rotational
speed, etc.) The available equipment for the various pattern
measurement tests include:
Phi Axis Positioner is used to select the positioner to be
used for phi axis rotation for a two-axis (spherical) pattern
measurement test. For the ETS-Lindgren MAPS, the phi
positioner is the horizontal axis.
Theta Axis Positioner is used to select the positioner to be
used for theta axis rotation for a two-axis (spherical) pattern
measurement test. For the ETS-Lindgren MAPS, the theta
positioner is the vertical (turntable) axis.
Rotational Positioner is used to select the positioner to be
used for rotation for a single-axis (polar) pattern
measurement test. This can be either axis of a MAPS or a
single axis positioner or turntable.
Analyzer is used to select the receiver(s) to be used for the
test. A dual polarization test will require a dual channel
receiver, while a single polarization test only needs one
receiver channel. Depending on the configuration, and with
the appropriate drivers, the pattern test can support vector or
scalar network analyzers in absolute or relative mode,
spectrum analyzers, tuned receivers, or power meters. Dual
channel hybrids (configured under the equipment control
panel) can be used to combine two single channel devices
(i.e. two spectrum analyzers), or one single channel device
and an RF switch, to be used as one dual channel receiver.

Rev. A, P#399783
13.1.11 Correction Preferences Frame, Radiated

Patterns
The Corrections node for radiated pattern measurements
expands to provide corrections for each polarization of a
pattern test. The Correction Preferences Frame appears
in the parameter pane for the corrections node and provides
control over the final format of the data after the post-
processing calculations have been performed. These
parameters include:
Display Final Data As: controls the format of the resultant
data. The available formats include:
Power (dBm) the default setting, leaves the measured and
corrected data as is and labeled as measured.
Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (dBm) changes the
labeling to indicate the true nature of properly corrected
power data. Once the corrections have been applied
properly, the data represents angular dependent EIRP. This
is a change in label only and does not affect the numeric
values of the data.
Effective Dipole Radiated Power (dBm) applies a 2.15 dB
correction to the corrected power data to convert properly
corrected power data (angular dependent EIRP) to EDRP
and labels the data accordingly.
Normalized Pattern (dB) finds the maximum point of the
pattern and normalizes all data to that point. After
normalization, the maximum is zero and all other values are
negative. Normalization is not allowed for patterns of
frequency dependent data, however, after transposing,
frequency dependent patterns can be normalized.
Other Options allow additional formatting. The available
choices include:
Transpose Frequency Dependent Data, when checked,
will transpose patterns of frequency dependent data
(produced using the Frequency Range data acquisition
mode) to frequency dependent patterns. This will allow
viewing pattern graphs for each frequency using the reduced
dimension depth option of the graph control.
Transpose Frequency Dependent Antenna Attributes,
when checked, will transpose the antenna attributes table of

Rev. A, P#399783
frequency dependent data (produced using the Frequency

Range data acquisition mode) to frequency dependent
attributes. This will allow viewing frequency dependent
graphs for each attribute. Note that the attributes will share
one graph, so scaling and labeling will be mixed. By
reducing the dimension depth of the graph, each attribute
can be viewed separately.
Show Attributes for Each Polarization, when checked, will
calculate the antenna attributes table for each polarization of
a dual-polarized pattern test.
Reverse Single Point Poles reverses the rotation direction
of the single point pole optimization for a two-axis dual
polarization test when checked.
13.1.12 Correction Preferences Frame, Sensitivity

Patterns
The Corrections node for sensitivity pattern measurements
expands to provide corrections for each polarization of a
pattern test. The Correction Preferences Frame appears
in the parameter pane for the corrections node and provides
control over the final format of the data after the post-
processing calculations have been performed. These
parameters include:
Display Final Data As: controls the format of the resultant
data. The available formats include:
Power (dBm) the default setting, leaves the measured and
corrected data as is and labeled as measured.
Effective Isotropic Sensitivity (dBm) changes the labeling
to indicate the true nature of properly corrected power data.
Once the corrections have been applied properly, the data
represents angular dependent EIS. This is a change in label
only and does not affect the numeric values of the data.

Rev. A, P#399783
Effective Dipole Sensitivity (dBm) applies a 2.15 dB

correction to the corrected power data to convert properly
corrected power data (angular dependent EIS) to EDS and
labels the data accordingly.
Normalized Pattern (dB) finds the maximum point of the
pattern and normalizes all data to that point. After
normalization, the maximum is zero and all other values are
negative. Normalization is not allowed for patterns of
frequency dependent data, however, after transposing,
Other Options allow additional formatting. The available
choices include:
Transpose Frequency Dependent Data, when checked,
will transpose patterns of frequency dependent data
(produced using the Frequency Range data acquisition
mode) to frequency dependent patterns. This will allow
viewing pattern graphs for each frequency using the reduced
dimension depth option of the graph control.
Transpose Frequency Dependent Antenna Attributes,
when checked, will transpose the antenna attributes table of
frequency dependent data (produced using the Frequency
Range data acquisition mode) to frequency dependent
attributes. This will allow viewing frequency dependent
graphs for each attribute. Note that the attributes will share
one graph, so scaling and labeling will be mixed. By
reducing the dimension depth of the graph, each attribute
can be viewed separately.
calculate the antenna attributes table for each polarization of
a dual-polarized pattern test.
Reverse Single Point Poles reverses the rotation direction
of the single point pole optimization for a two-axis dual
polarization test when checked.
Invert Sensitivity Pattern (1/P (-dBm)) will, when checked,
invert (negate) the EIS data. Since relative EIS is
mathematically equivalent to 1/EIRP, inverting the data will
give recognizable pattern shapes similar to those produced
for radiated power tests. Otherwise, an EIS pattern will have
large spikes caused by nulls in the pattern and will in general
produce unrecognizable pattern images.

Rev. A, P#399783
13.1.13 Corrections Pane, Vector Pattern Tests

The Corrections Pane for the vector pattern tests allows the
entry of constant and/or frequency dependent corrections to
be applied to measured data. A given test may have one or
more correction sets to be applied to different portions of the
data. Each set of corrections will have its own pane in the
parameter tree. The available settings are as follows:
The Corrections list box holds a list of response file names
for frequency dependent corrections. The response files can
be either .RSP files or raw data files (.RAW) from a response
or vector response measurement. Each file name will have
a "+" or "-" in front of it to indicate that the corresponding
data will be either added to or subtracted from the measured
data. This notation follows the standard corrections notation
for familiarity. The corrections are treated as complex
corrections that are converted to complex (real and
imaginary) numbers before applying to the data. The data is
then either multiplied (+) or divided (-) by each complex
correction. This allows the use of a variety of correction data
types that can be properly expressed as valid complex
numbers. These types include vector response files
containing real and imaginary pairs, or any combination of
magnitude, log magnitude, and/or phase information in either
vector or scalar response files. It is not possible to apply
real or imaginary components separately. Note: The user
must ensure that the files in the list match the expected
format, units, and required frequency range to avoid
unpredictable results. Otherwise extrapolation or other
errors may result. While it is possible to apply specialized
corrections to intentionally change the data type and
meaning of the resulting data (i.e. apply a correction of +107
dB to convert from dBm to dBV), the data will still maintain
the original labeling information. Therefore, while the expert
user can take advantage of this capability, appropriate
measures should be taken to provide comments or other
indications to document the intended effect of the special
corrections.
Add displays the file open dialog box to search for a
selected file will be appended to the end of the list with a "+"
in front of it to indicate that the data will be added to the
measured result.

Rev. A, P#399783

selected file will be appended to the end of the list with a "-"
in front of it to indicate that the data will be subtracted from
the measured result.
complex correction (log magnitude and phase) to be applied
to all data points.

Rev. A, P#399783
14 Response Measurement
14.1 Making Response Measurements using

EMQuest
14.1.1 Introduction
The Response Measurement is the workhorse of the
EMQuest software package. Designed to measure a signal
as a function of frequency (frequency response) or time
(time response), the response test is a useful tool for
obtaining frequency or time dependent information on an
instrument under test (IUT).
The response file generated by a response measurement
can be used as a correction factor or reference value for
other tests. While the response test (with the appropriate
test equipment) can measure a variety of values, including
path loss, VSWR, gain, or absolute signal magnitude; when
used as a correction, most tests assume that a response file
contains relative response in dB. Care should be taken to
avoid using response files containing other types of
information in a manner that would produce erroneous
results.
A vector response measurement is a variant to the standard
scalar response measurement. It captures vector
information and can be used as a correction factor for other
vector measurements.
There are also a number of other variants to the response
measurement, that measure different types of response.
These are not covered directly in this section, but have
similar features. These include the new time dependent
response measurement, that takes multiple readings of an
instrument (either traces or single points) as a function of
time for a specified period. There are also several response
measurements included in the EMQ-105 option, including
throughput vs. time and throughput vs. attenuation response
tests. None of these response measurements are intended
for use as corrections to other measurements.

Rev. A, P#399783
This section will describe some of the basics for configuring

a response measurement, and assumes that the reader has
read the Getting Started section and is familiar with the basic
operation of the EMQuest package, including equipment
configuration and parameter file generation. In addition to
the material provided here, each page of the parameters for
the response test will have additional detailed information on
those parameters. Use the context sensitive help to obtain
more information on a given parameter or page.
14.1.2 Configuring a Response Test

response test.
14.1.2.1 Hardware Setup

Normally, the required hardware for testing is installed at
system setup and little day-to-day modification is required.
In general, response measurements require a properly
configured GPIB controlled piece of test equipment with
frequency or time trace information, such as a network
analyzer or spectrum analyzer and appropriate cabling for
connecting the IUT.
Configure and label the required test equipment using the
Equipment Control Panel. Be sure to enable any installed
options or features that are required and use labels that
clearly identify the equipment. These labels will be used to
identify the equipment in the test parameters.
14.1.2.2 Parameters
Create a new parameter file and then select the Response
Measurement test to enter the necessary test information.
Refer to the help for each page of the parameters for more
details on each parameter. Most parameters have default
settings which will allow an almost immediate "ready to run"
state. Its only necessary to select the appropriate
equipment and press the Run button to start a test.
However, these default settings probably wont be exactly
whats required for a given application, so its necessary to
review and modify the parameters as needed.

Rev. A, P#399783
In general, the Parameters node controls the basic

operation of the test. For a response test, it allows selecting
the desired measurement configuration and data format to
be acquired. The entire range of settings provided is
normally only valid for vector network analyzers. Using other
equipment to acquire data types not supported by that
instrument will produce undefined results.
The Frequency Ranges node contains a list of one or more
frequency ranges (multiple frequency ranges will be
supported in a future release). Each range is used to set the
desired frequency range or points for the test. If a zero span
is selected, the equipment must support time dependent
response in zero-span.
Use the Equipment node to select and configure the
equipment to be used for the test in that range. Select the
desired analyzer/receiver for the measurement. Most
spectrum analyzers allow setting resolution and video
bandwidth, or leaving them auto-coupled to the frequency
span. Sweep time settings are typically used when in zero-
span, but it is normally left auto-coupled to the bandwidth
settings when a frequency span is used. Attenuation and
reference level settings can be used to adjust the
relationship between the noise floor, the available dynamic
range in the analyzer window, and the signal level(s) to be
measured. The trigger settings are usually set to free run.
Other trigger options are normally only used for zero-span
tests to synchronize the trace to a specific event. For
network analyzers, settings such as points per trace, IF
bandwidth, averaging, and output power are available. For
single frequency pattern tests, the points per trace should be
set to the minimum for fastest acquisition rate. The
bandwidth should be set to provide sufficient dynamic range.
Note that the HP/Agilent 87XX series of network analyzers
contain a defect that will cause erroneous results for long
signal paths unless the bandwidth is set to 30 Hz or lower, or
the sweep time is increased. This is apparently due to the
analyzer stepping to the next frequency before the signal at
the current frequency has made it through the path and been
measured.
For relative measurements, the calibration option(s) are
used to perform a cable/path loss calibration prior to the test.
Spectrum analyzer drivers only support a simple response
calibration that records a reference measurement to subtract
from the measured response. Most network analyzers

Rev. A, P#399783
support more advanced calibration modes for both

transmission and reflection measurements.
Most equipment drivers support pre-defined parameter
configurations, which can be defined in the equipment
control panel and then selected into the equipment
parameters by right-clicking on the equipment parameter
pane to display a list. This allows common parameter
configurations to be pre-defined and quickly selected to
configure a test.
The Corrections node provides a correction selection panel
for applying additional relative corrections to the measured
data. This can be used to apply previously measured
gain/loss curves for cables, amplifiers, etc., which may not
be accounted for in the reference calibration.
Use the Paths node to specify any custom output paths
and/or output templates for this data. Otherwise the test will
use those configured under the Tools : Options menu.
Use the Output node to reduce or interpolate the tabular
data shown in the Table tab and in report output. Use the
Notification tab to change the default test completion
notification for this test from that configured in the Tools :
Options dialog.
14.1.2.3 Running a Response Test

Once a parameter file has been developed for the test, the
data acquisition process is as simple as all other EMQuest
tests. Make sure that all cables and equipment are
connected, warmed up, and operating properly, and press
the "Run" button. If a calibration step has been requested,
EMQuest will prompt the user through the various calibration
steps required. Once the equipment has been configured,
the user will be prompted to attach the IUT prior to initiating
the measurement. Upon completion, the test will
automatically apply any corrections, save the data to a time-
stamped raw data file, create a new window for the resulting
data file, and display the Graph tab.

Rev. A, P#399783
14.1.2.4 Parameters Pane, Response Measurement

required test parameters specific to this test. These
parameters include:
Measurement Configuration allows selection of the desired
configuration for a vector network analyzer. For spectrum
analyzers and other scalar equipment, this information is
used primarily for labeling the type of data acquired. The
assumption is that the equipment has been configured with
the necessary accessories (i.e. directional couplers, etc) and
correction factors to give the resulting data meaning. The
available selections include:
S11 measures the forward reflection response using an S-
parameter test set.
S12 measures the reverse transmission response using an
S-parameter test set.
S21 measures the forward transmission response using an
S22 measures the reverse reflection response using an S-
parameter test set.
Port A/R measures the ratio of receiver port A to the
reference port.
Port B/R measures the ratio of receiver port B to the
reference port.
Port A/B measures the ratio of receiver port A to receiver
port B.
Port A measures receiver port A. This is an absolute value
measurement unless the analyzer is calibrated.
Port B measures receiver port B. This is an absolute value
Data Format allows selection of the desired data to be
measured. Most of the formats are only valid for vector
network analyzers. For spectrum analyzers and other scalar
equipment, only the log magnitude or linear magnitude
formats are valid. The available selections include:
Log Magnitude records the magnitude of the received
signal in dB for relative measurements and dBm for
absolute.

Rev. A, P#399783
Linear Magnitude records the magnitude of the received

signal without units for relative measurements and in
milliwatts for absolute.
Phase records the phase relationship in degrees. This
format is only valid for vector network analyzers performing
ratio measurements (no Port A or Port B configurations).
Use with other configurations and equipment is undefined.
Real records the real part of the signal without units. This
Imaginary records the imaginary part of the signal without
units. This format is only valid for vector network analyzers
performing ratio measurements (no Port A or Port B
configurations). Use with other configurations and
equipment is undefined.
Group Delay records the group delay of the signal in
microseconds. This format is only valid for vector network
analyzers performing ratio measurements (no Port A or Port
B configurations). Use with other configurations and
VSWR records the voltage standing wave ratio of the signal
without units. This format is only valid for vector network
analyzers measuring S11 or S22. Use with other
configurations and equipment is undefined.
14.1.2.5 Equipment Pane, Response Measurement

The Equipment Pane is used for selection of test equipment
supported by the selected response measurement test.
Select the desired equipment from the available equipment
listed in the combo box. If there is no equipment listed,
configure the appropriate equipment type in the Equipment
Control Panel. (Note that it will be necessary to switch
panes in order to refresh the equipment list after changing
settings in the control panel.) The selected piece of
equipment will add a node to the tree-view beneath the
Equipment node, allowing entry of test specific equipment
configuration information (i.e. bandwidth, points per trace,
etc.) The available equipment selection for a response test
is:
Analyzer is used to select the analyzer, receiver, or hybrid
to be used for the test. Depending on the configuration, and

Rev. A, P#399783
with the appropriate drivers, the response test can support

vector or scalar network analyzers in absolute or relative
mode, spectrum analyzers, tuned receivers, or oscilloscopes
(for time domain response traces). Hybrids may be used to
combine a signal generator and power meter or other
receiver to create a hybrid capable of generating a frequency
response trace.
14.1.2.6 Parameters Pane, Time Dependent Response

Measurement
The Time Dependent Response Measurement allows
acquiring measured data repeatedly as a function of time for
a specified period. The Parameters Pane is used to enter
the majority of the required test parameters specific to this
test. These parameters include:
Timing controls the duration and sample spacing of the time
dependent response measurement.
Test Duration indicates the target length of the
measurement, in seconds. The test will stop taking samples
once the total duration has exceeded this time. Note that the
last recorded sample will always be at a time less than or
equal to this value since the sample time is recorded at the
start of each sample measurement.
Time Step allows entering the desired time between the
start of each sample, in seconds. Note that if the sample
takes longer to measure than the time specified, the
resulting sample spacing will be larger than this value.
from the receiver.
frequency of the analyzer span. (Note that for some

Rev. A, P#399783

described here.)
at each data acquisition point.
frame for more information on the available filters.
configuration for a vector network analyzer. For spectrum
analyzers and other scalar equipment, this information is
used primarily for labeling the type of data acquired. The
assumption is that the equipment has been configured with
the necessary accessories (i.e. directional couplers, etc) and
correction factors to give the resulting data meaning. The
available selections include:
S11 measures the forward reflection response using an S-
parameter test set.
S12 measures the reverse transmission response using an
S21 measures the forward transmission response using an
S22 measures the reverse reflection response using an S-
parameter test set.
Port A/R measures the ratio of receiver port A to the
reference port.
Port B/R measures the ratio of receiver port B to the
reference port.
Port A/B measures the ratio of receiver port A to receiver
port B.
Port A measures receiver port A. This is an absolute value
Port B measures receiver port B. This is an absolute value

Rev. A, P#399783
Data Format allows selection of the desired data to be

measured. Most of the formats are only valid for vector
network analyzers. For spectrum analyzers and other scalar
equipment, only the log magnitude or linear magnitude
formats are valid. The available selections include:
Log Magnitude records the magnitude of the received
signal in dB for relative measurements and dBm for
absolute.
Linear Magnitude records the magnitude of the received
signal without units for relative measurements and in
milliwatts for absolute.
Phase records the phase relationship in degrees. This
Real records the real part of the signal without units. This
Imaginary records the imaginary part of the signal without
units. This format is only valid for vector network analyzers
performing ratio measurements (no Port A or Port B
configurations). Use with other configurations and
Group Delay records the group delay of the signal in
microseconds. This format is only valid for vector network
analyzers performing ratio measurements (no Port A or Port
B configurations). Use with other configurations and
VSWR records the voltage standing wave ratio of the signal
without units. This format is only valid for vector network
analyzers measuring S11 or S22. Use with other
configurations and equipment is undefined.

Rev. A, P#399783
14.1.2.7 Parameters Pane, Communication Tester Frequency

Response Measurement
The Communication Tester Frequency Response
Measurement allows acquiring data from a communication
tester as a function of frequency/channel. This
measurement is ideal for conducted power or sensitivity
measurements of a mobile station and for intermediate
channel testing per the CTIA OTA Performance Test
requirement. The Parameters Pane is used to enter the
majority of the required test parameters specific to this test.
These parameters include:
measurement quantity. Not all communication
testers/options will support these functions. The available
selections include:
Mobile Station Transmit Power records the reverse/uplink
power of the mobile as measured by the communication
tester.
Mobile Station Sensitivity records the forward/downlink
power setting of the communication tester (to within the
specified step size) required to reach the specified digital
error rate (BER/FER/BLER/PER) at the mobile station.
Mobile Station BER/FER records the digital error rate
(BER/FER/BLER/PER) at the mobile station for the
forward/downlink power level configured in the
communication tester driver.
BER/FER Pass/Fail records the pass/fail condition of a
digital error rate (BER/FER/BLER/PER) measurement at the
mobile station for the forward/downlink power level and
pass/fail criteria configured in the communication tester
driver.
BER/FER vs. Forward Power records the digital error rate
(BER/FER/BLER/PER) at the mobile station as a function of
forward/downlink power starting at the first detected error
and proceeding until the targeted error rate is exceeded.
Mobile Station RSSI records the Received Signal Strength
Indicator level reported from the mobile station for the
forward/downlink power level configured in the
communication tester driver.

Rev. A, P#399783
14.2 Equipment
14.2.1 Equipment Types

EMQuest supports a wide variety of equipment for different
applications. The following list gives a brief description of
the available equipment types and associated terminology,
as well as some of their typical applications. Depending on
the application for which the package is bundled, and the
options purchased with the package, not all of the equipment
types listed here may be available.
Signal Generator refers to an RF signal source. Usually the
source produces a continuous sine wave (CW) signal at a
single tunable frequency, although most also support a
variety of modulation capabilities. Other non-tunable signal
generators include things like fixed oscillators, comb
generators, and noise sources.
Receiver refers to an RF receiver. This is usually used as a
generic term and may encompass simple tuned receivers,
which only tune a specific frequency for each measurement,
power meters, which typically have no frequency selection,
and swept devices, which scan a range of frequencies and
provide frequency dependent RF levels.
Spectrum Analyzers refers to the class of receivers that
produce a swept frequency or time dependent trace.
Traditionally, spectrum analyzers imply a relatively simple
tuning and analog-to-digital process, where built in
attenuators and ADC reference level adjustments are used
to adjust the tuned signal into the available display range.
The noise floor is fixed with respect to the ADC circuitry and
the available dynamic range is controlled by the attenuator
and reference adjustments. Any signal approaching the top
of the display window suffers gain compression or clipping.
More recently, a new class of machines has appeared with
similar outward characteristics, but considerably different
operation. This is the swept tuned receiver. While still
producing the same spectrum type measurement, the
dynamic range of these instruments is usually fixed at a
much wider range than the ADC of a traditional spectrum
analyzer, and a valid level is measured anywhere within the
dynamic range (subject to noise floor and compression
considerations) whether or not the measured level falls into
the current display window.

Rev. A, P#399783
Many spectrum analyzers are equipped with Tracking

Generators, which are signal generators designed to sweep
in frequency with the receiver in order to make "black box"
transmission response measurements. The synchronization
of the two sweeps is often an accuracy issue, and high
frequency tracking generators are rare.
Network Analyzers normally refers to vector network
analyzers, which are integrated units containing a
synchronized signal generator and one or more highly
accurate wide dynamic range tuned receivers. A reference
receiver and mixer combination is used to track the
transmitted signal and compare it with the received
measurement signal. The synchronized RF signal allows
determination of both relative magnitude and phase
information. Integral directional couplers and specialized
calibration functions allow measuring both transmitted and
reflected signals (S-parameters) from a "black box"
instrument under test. Additionally, although not a primary
function, many network analyzers can be used as narrow-
band tuned receivers for stable CW signals.
Power Meters encompass a class of typically broadband
power sensors with no frequency discrimination. They
usually have very accurate measurement capability since the
reference dynamic range calibration is usually valid at DC (0
Hz). Power meters use a variety of sensing/detector
technologies, including diodes and resistive/thermocouple
sensors. These sensors respond to any RF energy applied,
and the response to different frequencies will vary, so power
meters are usually used in applications where the applied
frequency is known and controlled (i.e. from a signal
generator). In this case, a frequency dependent calibration
factor can be applied to correct for frequency response
effects.
Communication Testers or Base Station Simulators
provide wireless call simulation and testing capabilities for
mobile phones and other wireless devices.
Positioners refers to a general class of devices designed to
move an instrument under test (IUT) and/or a measurement
antenna to change their position or directional orientation in
order to obtain position or direction dependent
measurements. EMQuest classifies positioners into two
general categories, Linear Positioners and Rotational
Positioners. Linear positioners include devices like antenna
towers and X-Y positioners, which translate the position of

Rev. A, P#399783
the attached object. Rotational positioners include devices

like turntables and MAPS, which rotate the directional
orientation of the attached object. For devices with more
than one axis of motion (X-Y, MAPS), each axis is treated as
a separate positioner.
Switches provide automated control of signaling and signal
paths. Switches may be used to switch RF signals to
different measurement configurations or change the
configuration or operating mode of an IUT. EMQuest
provides a versatile method of handling switching, where a
single switch driver may provide any number of switch states
(i.e. switch poles) that can have any combination of physical
switch settings of the switch or switches controlled by that
driver. Thus, a single change in switch state can activate a
complicated combination of switch changes.
Throughput Testers refers to a special class of driver
included with the optional EMQ-105 Network Throughput
Test Package. These testers measure network throughput
vs. time.
RF Attenuators include a range of programmable variable
attenuators. These are currently only supported for network
throughput testing with the EMQ-105 package.
Special Types
EMQuest also includes some special equipment driver types
to accomplish specific tasks. These types are treated
slightly differently in that they arent required to be
configured in the device control panel. Instead, they will
automatically be listed alongside similar device
configurations in test parameter equipment select fields
where applicable. These special types include the following
drivers.
Hybrids refers to the concept of combining two or more
standard devices in such a manner as to make them appear
to function like another more complicated device. For
instance, a signal generator and power meter could be
combined to produce a spectrum analyzer-like behavior,
when used in a closed system where other signals would not
interfere. EMQuest currently supports the following hybrid
drivers:

Rev. A, P#399783
Hybrid Dual Receivers combines two identical or different

receivers with similar capabilities into one dual-channel
receiver. This capability is typically used to satisfy the dual
channel requirements for dual polarized measurements.
Hybrid Receiver and Switch provides another dual-channel
option using a single receiver and an RF switch to create two
signal channels. While less costly than a dual receiver
hybrid, it can be significantly slower since all measurements
must be performed sequentially, and settling time must be
allowed between channel switching.
Hybrid Positioner and Switch allows automated switching
to different switch states as a function of position. As the
positioner is monitored, the current position is compared to a
range of values corresponding to different switch states and
the appropriate state is set.
Communication Tester Hybrids are actually three principle
classes of hybrids (Hybrid Communication Tester and
Receiver; Hybrid Communication Tester, Receiver, and
Switch, and Hybrid Communication Tester and Dual
Receivers) that combine an RF Communication Tester
(Base Station Simulator) with the functionality of a single
receiver or the dual receiver or receiver/switch hybrids.
These hybrids support tracking of traffic channel and
receiver center frequency settings in order to perform
frequency dependent measurements of wireless devices.
For dual polarization sensitivity testing, or radiated power
testing using the communication tester as a receiver, there is
also a Hybrid Communication Tester and Switch, which is
provides the same functionality as the Hybrid Receiver and
Switch.
Throughput Tester Hybrids refers to several classes of
hybrids included with the optional EMQ-105 Network
Throughput Test Package. These hybrids allow combining a
throughput tester with a variable attenuator for the purpose
of measuring throughput as a function of path loss between
two wireless network devices, and with an RF switch for
measuring throughput as a function of polarization or other
diversity antenna configuration.
Manual Drivers provide acquisition and logging capabilities
for applications where automation may not be available.
Drivers are provided for manual positioners, which prompt
the user to change the position at each step of a positioner
based test, and for each analyzer variety, to allow user
entered data logging at each step of a test. The manual

Rev. A, P#399783
analyzer drivers may also be used to enter data from

another source (i.e. an antenna calibration or amplifier gain
values) into a response file in order to use them for
corrections in a test.
Generic Equipment drivers are provided for a number of
the standard types. With these drivers, the user can provide
GPIB commands to address basic functional requirements of
the device type. This allows the generic driver to be
customized for equipment that may not be supported by
existing drivers. These drivers are considered bonus
technology and are not guaranteed to work in all cases.
14.3 Communication Testers
14.3.1 Agilent 8960

See Help File for more information.
14.3.2 Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200
14.3.2.1 Tips for using the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200

The Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 Universal Radio
Communication Tester drivers are designed to be used with
one of the communication tester hybrids to automate testing
of mobile stations. This section gives a few tips and tricks
for configuring and using the CMU for wireless testing. It is
assumed that the users of this driver are intimately familiar
with the operations and features of the CMU-200 and have
the user manual readily available. Refer to the CMU
documentation for details on the specific device settings
provided by the drivers.
In general, no wireless communication testers/base station
simulators available today were designed for over-the-air
(OTA) testing. Due to this unfortunate oversight, they do not
typically support the operational dynamic range normally
expected and required of most test equipment used for
antenna measurement. This limitation can make it extremely
difficult to establish and maintain a call. However, with a
little up-front effort, reliable results can be achieved.

Rev. A, P#399783
The CMU receiver consists of an RF Analyzer having about

40 dB of dynamic range (less in some modes) with a
variable front end. The RF Analyzer defaults to an auto-
ranging mode where it uses the External Attenuation Input
setting to determine the expected receive power and adjust
the front end, and the associated dynamic range,
accordingly. For most protocols, it also supports manual
control over the RF Analyzer front end, which allows setting
a max value for the expected RF level (RF Max Level) and
fixing the dynamic range that way. This is similar to
adjusting the reference level and attenuation settings on a
spectrum analyzer. Doing so moves the location of the peak
measured signal and/or noise floor within the spectrum
window. While the CMU may be able to maintain a call
when the received signal is outside this range, any
measurements performed by the CMU when the received
signal is outside the analyzers range are not likely to be
valid. The CMU cannot establish a call or change channels
unless the received signal for both the control and traffic
channels (both before and after the change) are well within
the available range of the RF analyzer.
In any case, the first requirement for performing OTA testing
is to determine suitable settings to account for the path loss
and the expected range of signals. The path loss will
depend on the communication antenna setup used, but
values of 30-60 dB are not uncommon. Since the path loss
between the mobile and the CMU varies as a function of
position (due to the orientation of the antenna pattern), there
is no perfect choice. This causes some problems in the
auto-ranging mode, since the variation in signal cannot be
accounted for by the CMU. In the manual (fixed) range
mode, it may be possible to select a fixed setting that will
cover the range of received signals with the available
dynamic range, but that cannot be guaranteed either. For
this reason, several of the CMU drivers support a software
auto range function that attempts to keep the received signal
within the available window of the RF analyzer. Note that
this adds overhead to the data acquisition process and may
increase test time. Note: This function is in development
and may not perform reliably. It is provided as bonus
technology on an as-is basis, and not supported under the
software maintenance agreement.
The solution that has seen the best success to date is to
resolve the dynamic range issue by controlling the input level
to the CMU using external hardware. This is accomplished

Rev. A, P#399783
by adding an RF Limiting Amplifier into the signal path

before the input to the CMU. This will require using separate
ports for input and output. Limiting or compression
amplifiers accept a wide range of input powers and provide a
narrow range of output powers. Input dynamic ranges of 70
dB are available commercially.
Another hardware issue that affects digital RF
communication is standing waves in cables. For systems
with a number of RF switches, there are always
imperfections that can cause reflections, resulting in signal
fading issues that interfere with communication. Thus, even
when the signal is in the available range, the CMU may fail
to lock on after a channel change. In this case, it may be
necessary is to add small (3-6 dB) attenuators before each
switch or other discontinuity in the signal path from the
communication antenna to the CMU receive port. Note that
even though a discontinuity may not cause a significant
change in path loss, the effect of multiple discontinuities can
have significant influence on the digital communication.
Determination of a suitable level for either the External
Attenuation Input or RF Max Level settings is something of a
trial and error process of setting an initial estimated value
and watching for registration or attempting to establish a call.
Once the call has been established, the value can be
tweaked to bring the mobile power monitor reading into the
correct range. The acceptable value may vary depending on
the mobile station being tested, but once the level has been
adjusted to center the reading in the expected dynamic
range, a complete single channel test can usually be
performed without dropping a call. For multi-channel tests, it
takes a bit more fine-tuning, and may require rotating the
positioner(s) through a range of positions and watching for
over/under range conditions. If deep nulls exist in the
pattern, it may not be possible to perform multi-channel tests
without losing calls, especially if the nulls go below the
minimum signal level that the receiver can respond to.
On the base station side, the forward power should be set as
high as necessary to keep the phone in a good signal range.
In general, full power seems to work well given the path
losses typically involved. It is not recommended to use the
External Attenuation Output setting, since it will just interfere
with readings of the output level of the CMU that will be
required for sensitivity tests. EMQuest has its own
correction factor capabilities that can be applied to the test
data. This allows frequency dependent correction of the
Rev. A, P#399783
data rather than fixed offsets. However, for CDMA tests, it

may be necessary to enter values for both the input and
output attenuation values, as the auto power control appears
to use both settings to control the behavior of the link.
Normally, dropped calls are caused at the CMU, not the
mobile station. If the signal level moves out of the narrow
range that the CMU considers acceptable to perform
measurements, it will drop the call. For radiated power
measurements performed using a separate receiver, disable
or extend any timeout settings that are available for the
given driver. For measurements performed by the CMU,
extending the timeout may result in the CMU reporting a
measurement failure upon a dropped call while still reporting
that the call is connected. This will result in retries and/or
data point failures, possibly to the point of aborting the test.
For this reason, it is important to avoid extending the timeout
beyond the point where dropped calls are not reported as
such at the end of a measurement.
Make sure that the network protocols and initial control and
traffic channel settings are correct for the mobile station to
be tested. The manufacturer should be able to provide all
the necessary information.
We have contacted Rohde & Schwarz asking them to
improve the firmware and provide additional range control
and timeout disable options for all modes, and we encourage
you to do the same.
Refer to the CMU documentation for other details on
configuring the CMU and establishing a call. Note that some
parameter settings for the CMU may be currently disabled in
the drivers, either due to lack of support in the CMUs GPIB
command set or complexity of implementation. These will
be addressed when possible.
Refer to the documentation on hybrid drivers and the other

sections of the CMU-200 documentation for more
information.

Rev. A, P#399783
14.3.2.2 Band Handoffs

The CMU-200 drivers for GSM and CDMA-2000 now
support basic band handoff capability. Handoff can be made
between non-overlapping (i.e. Cell and PCS) bands of the
same protocol only. The target handoff band must have the
desired settings pre-configured manually on the CMU, and
the CMU does not support handoff between all possible
band combinations. Support for more complicated handoff
scenarios and configuration of all necessary parameters will
be introduced in the next full version. To use the option,
simply enter the additional channel frequencies into the list
frequency table and the driver will perform handoffs as
required. Ideally, the first frequencies would be for the same
band as that used to establish the call, and channels for
each band would be grouped together. In addition, for
normal graph operation, the frequencies should always be
entered in ascending order. The wireless channel tool can
still be used to set the channels for each band by simply
changing the band selection in the tool and entering the
channels for that band. The frequencies for other bands will
remain even thought the corresponding channel disappears
when the band selection changes.
14.3.2.3 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200

AMPS
This panel provides control over the settings of the Rohde &
Schwarz CMU-200 Universal Radio Communication Tester
with the AMPS Mobile Station options. It provides access to
most available user configurable parameters for active
testing of AMPS mobile stations. The available settings are
spread across several tabbed pages and include:
General contains basic band selection and driver functional
control. Settings include:
AMPS Mobile Station Band allows selection of the desired
band and signaling mode of the CMU.
Signaling Mode selects the desired signaling mode of the
CMU; Signaling or Non-Signaling. Currently, only Signaling
is supported.
Options contains various options for driver functionality
Release call at end of test causes the CMU driver to
release the call (hang up the phone) at the end of a test
when checked.

Rev. A, P#399783
Registration channel required causes the driver to force

the CMU back to the voice channel specified under the Base
Station Signal tab when a call is dropped, no matter what the
current measurement channel. This is necessary for some
mobiles that may only allow registration to occur on a
specified channel.
Prompt for manual configuration causes the driver to
pause after downloading parameters to the CMU and allow
the user to make adjustments to any settings of the CMU as
needed. This option is intended to allow adjustment of
parameters not fully implemented in the CMU-200 driver and
should not be used to change existing parameter settings or
unexpected behavior may result.
NOTE: The use of manual configuration is only

recommended for expert users and is not covered under
EMQuest technical support.
Settling Times contains settings to add delays after various

changes to the CMU settings. These delays may be
necessary to ensure stable operation of the DUT before
measurements are made.
Call Established Settling Time indicates how long to wait
after establishing a call and setting the VMAC before
continuing a measurement.
Channel Change Settling Time indicates how long to wait
after changing the voice channel before continuing a
measurement.
The remaining tabs contain device specific settings grouped
similar to their groupings under the CMU user interface.
Refer to appropriate operations manuals for the CMU-200
for more detailed descriptions of each available setting.
Note that some settings may be currently disabled, either
due to lack of support in the CMUs GPIB command set or
complexity of implementation. These will be addressed
when possible.
Mobile Station Signal contains settings found under the MS

Signal tab of the CMU-200 menu. Settings under this tab
are primarily used for setting the mobile output power by
setting the CMAC and VMAC settings.

Rev. A, P#399783
Base Station Signal contains settings found under the BS

are primarily used for setting up the initial channel and
forward power level of both the control and voice channels.
Network contains settings found under the Network tab of
the CMU-200 menu, and primarily controls network
identification, registration, and timeouts.
AF/RF Connectors & Analyzer contains settings found
under the AF/RF and Analyzer tabs of the CMU-200 menu.
These settings control the I/O ports of the CMU and the
range control of the RF and AF Analyzers. These settings
are critical for establishing and maintaining a call. When the
RF Analyzer is in Manual mode, the RF Max Level fixes the
available dynamic range of the measurement receiver (about
20 dB for AMPS). In the other modes, the input attenuation
value for the selected RF port is used by the CMU to
determine the appropriate range. Refer to Tips for using the
Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 for more information.
Right clicking on the pane will bring up the pre-configured
settings list, if any configurations exist. Selecting an item
from the menu will copy all settings from the pre-defined
configuration. Pre-configurations can be defined in the
device configuration control panel.

CDMA
with the CDMA Mobile Station (CDMA One) options. It
provides access to most available user configurable
parameters for active testing of CDMA mobile stations. The
available settings are spread across several tabbed pages
and include:
CDMA Mobile Station Band allows selection of the desired
Option Select selects the desired CDMA software option
(communication band) for the CMU. The selected option
must be installed and enabled in the CMU in order to run a
test.

Rev. A, P#399783

is supported.
after establishing a call and setting the power control bits
before continuing a measurement.
after changing the RF channel before continuing a
measurement.
when checked.
Auto establish/re-establish call attempts to establish a call
automatically as needed and continue the test without user
intervention when checked. Since CDMA test mode calls
auto-answer, this allows fully automated tests without any
user intervention. If the auto-establish attempt fails, the
normal establish call dialog is displayed.
Max Connection Attempts specifies the number of times to
attempt paging the mobile automatically before displaying
the establish call dialog.
Connection Attempt Interval specifies the amount of time
to wait, in milliseconds, between each attempt to establish a
call. Extend this value to give the mobile more time to
respond to each paging attempt. Entering a value of zero
will result in randomly spaced retry intervals ranging from 1
to 10 seconds.
the CMU back to the RF channel specified under the Base
specified channel.
Rev. A, P#399783

unexpected behavior may result. The use of manual
configuration is only recommended for expert users and is
not covered under EMQuest technical support.
Automatic Retry Settings controls the behavior of various
retry loops. These retry loops are implemented to address
issues where dropped calls or other measurement difficulties
would prevent normal completion of a test.
Data Point Auto Retry sets the number of times to
automatically retry measuring a data point before prompting
the user for intervention. After retrying the specified number
of times, the user is prompted to abort, retry, or ignore the
failure.
Sensitivity contains settings for the sensitivity search
algorithms and FER testing control. Settings include:
Sensitivity Threshold defines the target sensitivity level.
Frame Error Rate defines the target FER for the sensitivity
measurement. The reported sensitivity level will have a FER
less than or equal to this value.
Confidence Level defines the statistical confidence interval
to be applied to the FER data. This controls early pass/fail
behavior and ensures that enough frames are taken to
determine the FER to the specified level of certainty.
Pwr Ctrl at Sense Lvl allows running the coarse search for
the sensitivity level at one power control setting (i.e. Auto) as
defined by the "On Call Established" setting, and then
switching to another power control setting (i.e. All Up) at the
sensitivity level. This may be useful for preserving battery
life.
Power Control Bits sets the mobile station power control
loop to the specified mode during FER measurements at the
sensitivity level. This setting overrides the equivalent
settings during the FER measurement.
Frames Per Data Point controls the required number of
frames for the FER measurement.

Rev. A, P#399783
Max Frames defines the maximum number of frames to

measure for the FER measurement. FER measurements
near the sensitivity threshold will require this number of
frames to be measured to determine pass or fail. For
absolute FER measurements (no confidence level applied)
this indicates the required number of frames for the
measurement.
Min Frames defines the minimum number of frames to
measure for a FER measurement. Early exit can only occur
after measuring the required minimum number of frames.
Power Settling Times allows adding delays after adjusting
power control on either the mobile or base station, prior to
continuing the measurement. These parameters can have
significant effect on test time.
Mobile PC Bits defines the amount of time to delay after
adjusting the power control bits setting of the mobile. It may
require some time for the mobile to transition to the new
power level as directed by the CMU.
CDMA Power defines the amount of time to delay after
adjusting the forward channel power. This may be
necessary to account for any settling time of the CMU output
channel, or for settling of the mobile power level when in
Auto mode.
Signal Level Steps controls the sensitivity search algorithm.
Max Step Size specifies the maximum step size to be used
in the fast search for the sensitivity floor. This should be set
as large as practical, but small enough that a single step will
not push the forward power so far below sensitivity that the
call is dropped. For the CDMA One option, around 6 dB
appears to be the maximum suitable value.
Fine Step Size specifies the minimum step size to be used
in the fast search for the sensitivity floor, and the starting
step size for the full sensitivity search. This value should be
set as small as practical, but ideally, it should be large
enough that the desired FER is within one fine step of the
last zero FER value. Once the sensitivity floor is located, the
sensitivity search then uses a binary search algorithm to
divide down to the minimum step size with as few
measurements as possible. For this reason, it is also
recommended that this be a power of two multiple (i.e. 2, 4,
8, 16) of the minimum step size setting, in order to
maintain sensitivity as a multiple of the minimum step size.

Rev. A, P#399783
Min Step Size specifies the minimum step size to be used in

the final search for the sensitivity level. This value
determines the granularity or residual uncertainty in the
determination of the sensitivity level. This value should be
set as large as practical (or as large as allowed, in the case
of CTIA testing) to reduce test time.
Initial Signal Level (Max) defines the starting level for the
sensitivity search. This value is also taken as the maximum
sensitivity level. A sensitivity search will not be done above
this level. This value is also used as the fixed forward power
level for constant power FER measurements.
CDMA Power specifies the desired initial or fixed forward
power level.
similar to their groupings under the CMU user interface. The
most important settings are described briefly below. Refer to
appropriate operations manuals for the CMU-200 for more
detailed descriptions of each available setting. Note that
some settings may be currently disabled, either due to lack
of support in the CMUs GPIB command set or complexity of
implementation. These will be addressed when possible.

Signal tab of the CMU-200 menu.
Mobile Settings
loop to the specified mode after establishing a call.
are primarily used for setting up the initial RF and traffic
channels, forward power levels, and call mode.
Signaling
RF Channel sets the RF channel used to register and
communicate with the mobile station. Note that CDMA
mobile stations may be configured to only register on
specific registration channels. Consult the mobile phone
manufacturer or service provider for more information.
the CMU-200 menu, and primarily controls the network
standard and identification.

Rev. A, P#399783
AF/RF Connectors contains settings found under the AF/RF

tab of the CMU-200 menu. These settings control the I/O
ports of the CMU and are critical for establishing and
maintaining a call. The input and output attenuation values
for the selected RF port are used by the CMU to determine
the appropriate range. Refer to Tips for using the Rohde &
Schwarz CMU-200 for more information.
Note: Rohde & Schwarz has discontinued support for the B-
81 (CDMA One) plug-in and is no longer making
enhancements to the associated firmware. Existing
limitations in the available functionality limit the capabilities
of this CDMA driver. It is provided on an as-is basis and
support is not guaranteed for future releases. Users of the
B-81 option should upgrade to the B-83 (CDMA 2000) option
for continued support.

CDMA 2000
with the CDMA 2000 Mobile Station options. It provides
access to most available user configurable parameters for
active testing of CDMA One and CDMA 2000 mobile
stations. The available settings are spread across several
tabbed pages and include:
CDMA Mobile Station Band allows selection of the desired
Option Select selects the desired CDMA 2000 software
option (communication band) for the CMU. The selected
option must be installed and enabled in the CMU in order to
run a test.
is supported.

Rev. A, P#399783

after changing the RF channel before continuing a
measurement.
when checked.
intervention when checked. Since CDMA test mode calls
auto-answer in test mode, this allows fully automated tests
without any user intervention. If the auto-establish attempt
fails, the normal establish call dialog is displayed.
to 10 seconds.
the CMU back to the RF channel specified under the Base
specified channel.

Rev. A, P#399783


failure.
algorithms and FER testing control. Settings include:
Sensitivity Threshold defines the target sensitivity level.
Frame Error Rate defines the target FER for the sensitivity
measurement. The reported sensitivity level will have a FER
less than or equal to this value.
to be applied to the FER data. This controls early pass/fail
determine the FER to the specified level of certainty.
the sensitivity level at one power control setting (i.e. Auto) as
defined by the "On Call Established" setting, and then
switching to another power control setting (i.e. All Up) at the
sensitivity level. This may be useful for preserving battery
life.
loop to the specified mode during FER measurements at the
settings during the FER measurement.
frames for the FER measurement.
measure for the FER measurement. FER measurements
near the sensitivity threshold will require this number of
frames to be measured to determine pass or fail. For
absolute FER measurements (no confidence level applied)

Rev. A, P#399783
this indicates the required number of frames for the

measurement.
measure for a FER measurement. Early exit can only occur
after measuring the required minimum number of frames.
CDMA Power defines the amount of time to delay after
channel, or for settling of the mobile power level when in
Auto mode.
call is dropped. For the CDMA 2000 option, around 6 dB
appears to be the maximum suitable value.
enough that the desired FER is within one fine step of the
last zero FER value. Once the sensitivity floor is located, the

Rev. A, P#399783

level for constant power FER measurements.
CDMA Power specifies the desired initial or fixed forward
power level.
Service Configuration contains settings found under the
Service Cfg. tab of the CMU-200 menu. It contains settings
for selecting the desired service and service option.
Service Settings contains settings for the primary service
class and connection options.
Primary Service Class specifies the primary service class
used for measurements. The primary service classes used
for testing with EMQuest are Loopback Service for testing
voice communication functionality and Test Data Service
(Service Option 32) for testing 1xRTT data communication.
Service Options contains sub-option selections for selected
primary service classes.
Loopback Service Option allows selecting the desired
service option for the loopback service class. Service Option
2 is commonly used.
Speed Service Option allows selecting the desired service
option for the speech service class.
Note: Each service option may have additional settings

available on the CMU-200 that are not currently
implemented here. The user should ensure that the default
settings are suitable for their application or make
modifications manually as needed.

Rev. A, P#399783

are primarily used for setting up the initial RF and traffic
channels, forward power levels, and call mode.
Signaling contains channel control and various options.
RF Channel sets the RF physical channel pair used for
communication between the mobile and base station. This
should be set to the desired channel to be measured, or, for
multi-channel tests, to the channel required to register the
mobile station.
Call Loss Detect allows adjustment of the timeout required
for the CMU to report that a call has been dropped. When
enabled, if the CMU does not see a valid signal from the
mobile for longer than the specified time period, it will drop
the call. Warning! Extending the call loss detect timeout for
fully automated tests such as sensitivity measurements may
result in undesired results since the CMU will report that a
connection is active when none exists. This results in non-
recoverable measurement failures since the CMU cannot
perform a measurement in this state, however EMQuest
cannot determine why the measurement is failing.
Enable CLDet. allows completely disabling the call loss
detect timer on the CMU. This can prevent the loss of
connections when the CMU is unable to detect the mobile
stations signal due to out of range signal levels caused by
pattern variations, etc. Warning! Never disable the call lost
detect timeout for fully automated tests such as sensitivity
measurements. See above for details.
Mobile Station Power Control
loop to the specified mode after establishing a call.
CDMA Levels contains the absolute power control for the
entire CDMA channel as well as the relative power control
for each of the CDMA subchannels.
CDMA Power specifies the forward CDMA channel RF
output power used to establish and maintain a connection
throughout the test. This level is varied automatically for
sensitivity searches and returned to its original setting at the
end of each sensitivity point measurement.
standard, system parameters, and identification information.

Rev. A, P#399783
14.3.2.6 Network
Network Standard sets the network standard band
classification (area localization) for the given CDMA band
selection.
RF Connectors & Analyzer contains settings found under
the AF/RF and Analyzer tabs of the CMU-200 menu. These
settings control the I/O ports of the CMU and the range
control of the RF Analyzer. These settings are critical for
establishing and maintaining a call. When the RF Analyzer
is in Manual mode, the RF Max Level fixes the available
dynamic range of the measurement receiver (about 40 dB
for CDMA). Note that the behavior of the dynamic range
window of the CMU varies with respect to the RF Max Level
depending on if the power control bits are configured for
Auto versus All Up. In the other RF modes, the input
attenuation value for the selected RF port is used by the
CMU to determine the appropriate range. Refer to Tips for
using the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 for more information.
Custom settings under this menu are:
Auto Range fixes the RF Mode to Manual and uses the RF
Max Level parameter as an initial RF Max Level setting.
When in auto range mode, the CMU driver will perform a
quick power measurement before and/or after changing
certain control settings (i.e. channel changes or mobile
power level changes) or performing certain measurements.
If the received signal is determined to be over or under
range, or too near the edge of the available dynamic range,
the RF Max Level is adjusted automatically to attempt to
move the received power closer to the middle of the range.
Note: This function is provided as a work-around to a

weakness in the available instrumentation. It cannot be
guaranteed that it will work in all cases. The use of a limiting
amplifier is highly recommended for OTA testing to avoid the
dynamic range limitations of the CMUs receiver.


Rev. A, P#399783

GSM
with the GSM Mobile Station options. It provides access to
testing of GSM mobile stations in both circuit switched, and,
with the optional GPRS/EGPRS driver, packet switched
modes. The available settings are spread across several
tabbed pages and include:
GSM Mobile Station Band allows selection of the desired
Option Select selects the desired GSM software option
test.
is supported.
after changing the RF traffic channel before continuing a
measurement.
when checked.
intervention when checked. This mode will only work if the
mobile has an auto-answer function enabled, or in data
modes that auto-answer. If so, this allows fully automated

Rev. A, P#399783
tests without any user intervention. If the auto-establish

attempt fails, the normal establish call dialog is displayed.
to 10 seconds.
Re-close loop on changes provides a work-around for
some mobile stations that may fail to maintain a previously
closed loop when the channel or PCL settings are changed.
Checking this box will cause a close loop command to be
sent after each of these changes, however overall
measurement speed may be degraded.
the CMU back to the RF traffic channel specified under the
Base Station Signal tab when a call is dropped, no matter
what the current measurement channel.
unexpected behavior may result. The use of manual
configuration is only recommended for expert users and is
not covered under EMQuest technical support.
failure.
algorithms and BER/BLER testing control. Settings include:

Rev. A, P#399783
RBER Threshold defines the target sensitivity levels when

performing residual bit error rate (RBER) measurements.
These values are used to determine the early exit condition
for the RBER test functions of the CMU. Refer to the CMU-
200 documentation for more information.
Class II BER defines the target BER for Class II bits during
the sensitivity measurement. The reported sensitivity level
will have a Class II BER less than or equal to this value.
This value normally dominates the measurement.
Class Ib BER defines the target BER for Class Ib bits during
the sensitivity measurement. The reported sensitivity level
will have a Class Ib BER less than or equal to this value.
Frame Erasure Rate defines the target FER for the
sensitivity measurement. The reported sensitivity level will
have a FER less than or equal to this value.
to be applied to the BER data. This controls early pass/fail
determine the BER to the specified level of certainty.
BLER Threshold defines the target sensitivity level when
performing block error rate (BLER) measurements.
BLER defines the target BLER during the sensitivity
measurement. The reported sensitivity level will have a
BLER less than or equal to this value.
to be applied to the BLER data. This controls early pass/fail
determine the BLER to the specified level of certainty.
frames for the RBER or BLER measurement.
measure for the RBER/BLER measurement. RBER/BLER
measurements near the sensitivity threshold will require this
number of frames to be measured to determine pass or fail.
For absolute RBER/BLER measurements (no confidence
level applied) this indicates the required number of frames
for the measurement.
measure for a BLER measurement only. Early exit can only
occur after measuring the required minimum number of
frames. This parameter does not affect RBER
measurements.
Rev. A, P#399783

Mobile Settling Time defines the amount of time to delay
after adjusting the PCL setting of the mobile. It may require
some time for the mobile to transition to the new power level
as directed by the CMU.
Base Settle Time defines the amount of time to delay after
channel, or for settling of the mobiles automatic gain control
(AGC).
AGC Holdoff Time defines the amount of time to delay for
the automatic gain control of the mobile to adjust to a
change in the received power before starting a BER
measurement. This is a CMU parameter controlling each
BER measurement. It has been determined that reducing
this setting to zero may cause problems with the
performance of BER measurements in the CMU-200. Refer
to the CMU-200 documentation for more information.
BER Bitstream defines the bit sequence sent to the mobile
station for the BER test.
PSR Bit Pattern selects the desired pseudo-random bit
pattern used for the bitstream.
call is dropped.
enough that the desired BER is within one fine step of the
last zero BER value. Once the sensitivity floor is located, the

Rev. A, P#399783

level for constant power BER measurements.
Used Timeslot Level specifies the desired initial or fixed
forward power level.
the sensitivity level at one power control setting (i.e. low
power) as defined by the "Mobile Station Signal" PCL
setting, and then switching to another power control setting
(i.e. full power) at the sensitivity level. This may be useful for
preserving battery life. Note: This setting is not available for
multislot tests, including packet switched measurements,
since each slot can be set to a different level. The desired
multislot levels must be set on the Slot Configuration page
and will remain constant throughout the test.
PCL sets the mobile station power control level to the
specified mode during RBER/BLER measurements at the
settings during the RBER/BLER measurement.
14.3.2.8 Measurement Optimization

Sensitivity Search Algorithm allows selecting alternate
search algorithms for the sensitivity measurement in order to
reduce test time. These options may not be suitable for all
mobiles or configurations.
Fast probing search uses the original search algorithm
implemented for GSM. During the sensitivity floor probing
measurements, an average RBER measurement is
performed continuously as the power levels are changing.
This allows the results to be obtained more quickly, but
imposes some hysteresis on the search, resulting in
"bounce" near the sensitivity level. It also has been known

Rev. A, P#399783
to cause the CMU to hang in certain instances, although

modifications have been made to try to eliminate this issue.
For BLER measurements, this mode is identical to the Full
probing search. It is recommended that the "Use RSSI to
replace probing search" option be used in place of this
option. Due to continued issues with using the average BER
functionality in the CMU-200, this option will likely be
removed in future releases.
Full probing search uses an individual RBER measurement
at each power level. This method can be slower than the
fast probing mode, but ensures that the probing
measurement is performed at a stable power level at each
step.
Use RSSI to shorten probing search uses the Received
Signal Strength Indicator from the mobile to replace the Max
Step Size portion of the probing search after the first full
probing sensitivity measurement has been performed. The
RSSI level at the Initial Signal Level is used to determine the
approximate location of the sensitivity level and fall through
to probing around that level using the fine step size. This
mode is less likely to drop a call due to non-linearity of the
RSSI, but is slower than using the RSSI to replace the
probing search.
Use RSSI to replace probing search uses the Received
Signal Strength Indicator from the mobile to completely
replace the probing search for the sensitivity after the first full
probing sensitivity measurement has been performed. The
RSSI level at the Initial Signal Level is used to determine the
approximate location of the sensitivity level and immediately
begin full RBER/BLER measurements starting with the fine
step size. This method may be prone to dropped calls if
non-linearity in the RSSI curve causes the predicted
sensitivity level to fall significantly below the actual sensitivity
level. In this case, the RSSI Probe Bias can be used to
offset the predicted value to remain above sensitivity.
Use RSSI to determine sensitivity uses the Received
replace the sensitivity measurement after the first full probing
sensitivity measurement has been performed. The RSSI
level at the Initial Signal Level is used to determine the
approximate sensitivity level based on the relative value
determined from the initial measurement. This mode can
greatly reduce test time, but does so at the cost of increased
measurement uncertainty. All results are dependent on the

Rev. A, P#399783
stability of the first sensitivity measurement performed and

the linearity of the RSSI reporting of the mobile station. This
mode is not currently acceptable for CTIA testing. Note:
Since all results rely on the sensitivity measured at the first
data point, it is critical that the mobile be stable for this
measurement. Fluorescent backlights, etc. can cause
desensitization for some period after connecting the mobile.
Note: For the purposes of this document, RSSI also refers
to the "C Value" term used for packet switched data
measurements.
Note: For all RSSI based optimizations, the Initial Signal
Level must result in an RSSI value that is within the
reportable range of the RSSI scale (i.e. RSSI from 1-62) to
provide suitable results. Otherwise, any resulting predictions
based on deltas in the RSSI will be invalid.
RSSI Probe Bias specifies an offset, in number of Min Step
Size increments, from the default target sensitivity level.
This offset may be used to bias the target level of the
probing search if needed to ensure that the sensitivity
measurement always starts above the actual sensitivity
level.
Options lists a range of options that can change the way the
sensitivity search algorithm and BER measurements operate
in certain cases.
Disable early exit on probing measurements removes the
statistical pass/fail determination based on confidence
interval when probing the sensitivity level. During the initial
probing search, the full number of probing frames (typically
5) will be measured at each power level.
Disable early exit on sensitivity measurements removes
the statistical pass/fail determination based on confidence
interval when measuring near the sensitivity level. Each
RBER/BLER measurement will use the full number of frames
(Max Frames) specified in the parameters.
Always ignore initial probe failures avoids a popup dialog
that could interrupt the test sequence by choosing the
"Ignore All" option, which treats failing probing
measurements performed at the Initial Signal Level as failing
RBER/BLER results, recording the default value for this data
point. It will usually be safe to leave this option on (restoring
the original behavior of the sensitivity search algorithm), but
the associated error dialog was added to allow the user to

Rev. A, P#399783
verify that a data point was truly a null rather than a

problematic failure that should be retried.
Always treat repeat dropped calls as failures avoids a
popup dialog that could interrupt the test sequence by
choosing the "Ignore All" option, which treats repeated
dropped calls as an indication of being below the sensitivity
point. Checking this box restores the original behavior of the
sensitivity search algorithm.
Always treat unexpected BER results as failures avoids a
popup dialog that could interrupt the test sequence by
choosing the "Ignore All" option, which treats cases where
the CMU-200 is unable to perform a RBER/BLER
measurement, and where the mobile is still connected, as
failing RBER/BLER measurements. Previously, these
conditions would cause an exit of the sensitivity
measurement algorithm and prompt the user to retry the
entire measurement.
Treat early pass with BER above target as failure
attempts to eliminate the 1.5X "Bad DUT" bias applied to the
statistical early pass calculation in the CMU by failing any
early pass RBER/BLER measurements that report failing
BER/BLER levels.
Initial Probe Retries allows user defined retry control for
failures detecting when probing the Initial Signal Level at the
start of the sensitivity search. Previously, this retry was fixed
at one retry attempt. The default was increased to three
retries (four total attempts) to reduce the chance of
erroneously recording the starting level as the sensitivity
level.
Probe Drop Retries allows the user to specify how many
times a call should be reconnected and an attempt made to
re-measure the target power level during the sensitivity
probing measurements before deciding that it is below the
sensitivity level of the mobile.
Floor Drop Retries allows the user to specify how many
times a call should be reconnected and an attempt made to
re-measure the target power level during the full
RBER/BLER measurements performed near sensitivity
before deciding that it is below the sensitivity level of the
mobile.

Rev. A, P#399783
Measurement Configuration contains settings for

controlling specialized measurement functionality when the
CMU-200 is used for power measurement and/or BER/FER
vs. power measurements.
Absolute Power Measurements allows selecting the
desired measurement quantity when the CMU is used for
measuring power quantities such as would occur when
measuring a scalar pattern with the CMU as the
measurement instrument. The choices are the Mobile
Power received from the reverse link of the mobile, or the
Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) reported by the
mobile based on the forward link power of the
communication tester.
BER/FER Measurement Source Selection allows selection
of the desired BER or FER value to record for
measurements that record the RBER value as opposed to
just checking for a pass/fail condition. The choices are
Class II BER, Class Ib BER, and Frame Erasure Rate (FER).
14.3.2.9 P/T Measurement

Measurement Type selects the type of power measurement
performed between single slot GMSK and 8PSK or multi-slot
transmissions from the mobile station.
P/t Multislot Measurement Timeslot (MTS) contains
settings for configuring the result returned from multi-slot
power measurements.
Recorded Measurement Result selects the value that will
be recorded when the measurement is performed. Choose
between the current peak power of a burst, the current
average power of a burst, and the running average of the
average power of a burst.
Analyzed Measurement Timeslots allows defining which
measurement timeslots will be used to determine the
reported value. The CMU is configured to measure all four
possible measurement timeslots and then the results of each
are processed as indicated.
Note: The base MTS offset is defined by the default settings

of the CMU. Future versions may support configurable MTS
offsets if the need arises.

Rev. A, P#399783
MTS-1 includes data from one timeslot before the base MTS
in the analysis.
MTS 0 includes data from the base MTS in the analysis.
MTS+1 includes data from one timeslot after the base MTS
in the analysis.
MTS+2 includes data from two timeslots after the base MTS
in the analysis.
Recorded Timeslot Analysis selects the way the data from
the selected time slots will be analyzed.
Default (single timeslot) records the data from the first
selected timeslot, starting with MTS 0.
Average of all selected timeslots computes the linear
average of the power across all selected timeslots.
Peak of all selected timeslots records the maximum value
measured on all selected timeslots.
Minimum of all selected timeslots records the minimum
value measured on all selected timeslots.
primarily control the mobile power control level (PCL).
General contains general settings for the mobile station
behavior.
Slot Mode selects between single and mutlislot modes for
circuit switched communication. Selecting Multislot causes
the Slot Configuration tab to be displayed.
Single Slot Settings / Main Slot Settings contains settings
for controlling the behavior of a single slot and the main slot
of a multislot transmission from the mobile station.
PCL sets the Power Control Level of the mobile to the
specified value after establishing a call.

Rev. A, P#399783

are primarily used for setting up the initial control and traffic
channels and their forward power levels.
TX/AUX TX Control sets up the behavior of the control
channel (BCCH) and related options.
TX Mode selects whether the control channel (BCCH) is
transmitted while the call is up (BCCH & TCH) or only while
registering the mobile (BCCH or TCH). Most mobiles expect
to see the BCCH during a call, and BCCH is required for
channel handoffs while a call is established.
AUX TX Ch. Type enables the auxiliary transmitter option
(B-95 or B-96) required for creating the BCCH for packet
switched data connections and specifies the type of BCCH
to generate.
Control Channel (BCCH) contains RF settings for the
control channel.
RF Channel selects the desired RF channel for the BCCH.
This channel is used to register the mobile station, control
traffic channel handoffs, etc.
RF Level sets the RF output level of the BCCH. This level
must be set within the dynamic range of the mobile for the
phone to register.
Traffic Channel (TCH) contains RF settings for the traffic
channel.
RF Channel selects the desired RF channel for the TCH.
This channel is used to carry communication or data traffic
between the mobile and the tester.
Time Slot (Single) specifies the timeslot used for single slot
communication.
Slot Mode selects between single and mutlislot modes for
circuit switched communication. Selecting Multislot causes
the Slot Configuration tab to be displayed.
Used Timeslot Lvl sets the RF output level of the TCH for
the timeslots used to communicate to the mobile. This level
must be set within the dynamic range of the mobile for the
phone to maintain a call. This level is varied automatically
for sensitivity searches and returned to its original setting at
the end of each sensitivity point measurement.

Rev. A, P#399783
Unused Slot Lvl specifies the relative level of traffic

generated by the CMU on timeslots not used to
communicate with the mobile. This traffic is intended to
simulate traffic to other mobile stations on the network.
P0 (BCCH/TCH) specifies the relative relationship between
the power level settings of the BCCH and TCH when in
packet switched mode.
identification and timeouts.
Network Identity contains settings to identify the network to
the mobile station. Consult the mobile manufacturer for
appropriate settings as needed.
Timeouts contains settings for controlling timeouts on
connections and connection attempts when no response is
seen from the device at the other end of the link.
Mobile Radiolink allows adjustment of the timeout required
for the mobile to drop a call due to not seeing a signal from
the CMU.
Testset Link allows adjustment and disabling of the timeout
required for the CMU to report that a call has been dropped.
When enabled, if the CMU does not see a valid signal from
the mobile for longer than the specified time period, it will
drop the call. Warning! Extending this timeout for fully
automated tests such as sensitivity measurements may
result in undesired results since the CMU will report that a
connection is active when none exists. This results in non-
recoverable measurement failures since the CMU cannot
perform a measurement in this state, however EMQuest
cannot determine why the measurement is failing. Never
disable the call lost detect timeout for fully automated tests
such as sensitivity measurements.
MTC allows adjustment and disabling of the timeout that the
CMU uses to decide that a page to a mobile has failed.
Extending this timeout will give the user more time to answer
the mobile station when a call setup is attempted.
Network Service Selection Settings controls the network
support, service selections, traffic modes, and coding
schemes for the network. These options select the type of
connection to be made, between GSM Circuit Switched,
GPRS, and EGPRS (EDGE).

Rev. A, P#399783
Network Support selects the desired network support,

between GSM Only, GSM + GPRS, or GSM+EGPRS
(EDGE). For the latter two modes to be available, the CMU-
200 GPRS/EGPRS packet switched mode driver option must
be enabled in EMQuest along with the GSM driver. The
appropriate options must also be installed in the CMU-200
(GPRS = Option K42, EGPRS = Option K43).
Main Service/Packet Mode Service Selection combines
the selection between Circuit Switched (standard GSM) or
Packet Switched mode (GPRS or EGPRS) connection with
the available service selections for packet switched tests.
The Block Error Rate service is required to perform BLER
based sensitivity measurements in GPRS/EGPRS modes.
The remaining modes that support sensitivity measurements
use the RBER test.
Circuit Switched Traffic Mode allows selection of the traffic
mode and data rate for circuit switched connections.
Packet Data Coding Scheme allows selecting the coding
scheme for GPRS (CS 1-4) and EGPRS (MCS 1-9)
connections.
Slot Configuration tab groups all of the settings for multislot
control of circuit switched and packet switched data modes.
Slot Level Settings controls how the forward/downlink
transmit power from the CMU is determined for each slot.
The values can either be linked to the global Used and
Unused timeslot variables or can be set individually.
Slot PCL/Gamma controls how the reverse/uplink power
control for the mobile station is set for each slot. The values
can either all be set to the Main Timeslot be linked to the
global Used and Unused timeslot variables or can be set
individually.
Used Timeslot Level sets the reference RF output level of
the TCH for the timeslots used to communicate to the
mobile. This level (plus any offsets for each time slot) must
be set within the dynamic range of the mobile for the phone
to maintain a call. This level is varied automatically for
sensitivity searches and returned to its original setting at the
end of each sensitivity point measurement. This setting is
linked to the equivalent control on the Base Station Signal
tab.

Rev. A, P#399783
Unused Slot Lvl specifies the relative level of traffic

generated by the CMU on timeslots not used to
communicate with the mobile when Slot Level Settings is set
to "Use Used/Unused Timeslot Settings". This traffic is
intended to simulate traffic to other mobile stations on the
network. This setting is linked to the equivalent control on
the Base Station Signal tab.
Main Timeslot specifies the main timeslot used for multislot
communication. The main timeslot cannot be disabled.
Configuration Slot 0 Slot 7 allow enabling each
timeslot for downlink and/or uplink and setting the downlink
level relative to the Used Timeslot Level and the uplink
PCL/Gamma setting if allowed by the Slot Level Settings and
Slot PCL/Gamma selections.
dynamic range of the measurement receiver (about 40 dB
for GSM). In the other RF modes, the input attenuation
value for the selected RF port is used by the CMU to
determine the appropriate range. Refer to Tips for using the
Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 for more information. Custom
settings under this menu are:
Note: This function is provided as a work-around to a


Rev. A, P#399783

14.3.2.10 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-

200 TDMA
with the TDMA Mobile Station options. It provides access to
testing of TDMA mobile stations. The available settings are
spread across several tabbed pages and include:
TDMA Mobile Station Band allows selection of the desired
Option Select selects the desired TDMA software option
test.
is supported.
when checked.
On Call Established contains settings to be applied to the
CMU once a call to the mobile has been established. These
settings allow adjustment of configuration settings used to
establish a call in order to ensure the desired mobile
operation during a test.
DTC MAC sets the Mobile Attenuation Code for the Data
Traffic Channel to the specified value after establishing a
call. This setting overrides the DTC MAC setting under the
Mobile Station Signal tab once the call has been established.
Settling Time indicates how long to wait after establishing a
call and setting the power control level before continuing a

Rev. A, P#399783
measurement. It may also be used after changing other

settings that may affect measured data.
similar to their groupings under the CMU user interface.
Refer to appropriate operations manuals for the CMU-200
for more detailed descriptions of each available setting.
Note that some settings may be currently disabled, either
due to lack of support in the CMUs GPIB command set or
complexity of implementation. These will be addressed
when possible.
primarily control the mobile attenuation control (MAC) level.
are primarily used for setting up the initial control and traffic
channels and their forward power levels.
identification and timeouts.
dynamic range of the measurement receiver. In the other
RF modes, the input attenuation value for the selected RF
port is used by the CMU to determine the appropriate range.
Refer to Tips for using the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 for
more information.
14.3.2.11 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-

200 WCDMA
with the WCDMA UE Signaling options. It provides access

Rev. A, P#399783
to most available user configurable parameters for active

testing of WCDMA (UMTS) mobile stations. (For the
purpose of this document, the terms mobile or mobile station
will be used in place of, or interchangeably with, the term
user equipment (UE).) The available settings are spread
across several tabbed pages and include:
WCDMA Mobile Station Band allows selection of the
desired band and signaling mode of the CMU.
Option Select selects the desired WCDMA communication
band for the CMU. The selected option must be installed
and enabled in the CMU in order to run a test.
is supported.
after changing the RF traffic channel before continuing a
measurement.
when checked.
intervention when checked. This mode is intended for test
modes where the mobile will automatically answer when
paged, allowing for fully automated tests without any user
intervention. If the auto-establish attempt fails, the normal
establish call dialog is displayed.

Rev. A, P#399783

to 10 seconds.
the CMU back to the RF traffic channel specified under the
Base Station Signal tab when a call is dropped, no matter
what the current measurement channel.


failure.
algorithms and BER/BLER testing control. Settings include:

Rev. A, P#399783
Sensitivity Threshold defines the target sensitivity levels

when performing Bit or Block Error Rate (BER/BLER)
measurements. All thresholds are evaluated simultaneously,
so any one value that fails will cause the test to return a
failing result. To restrict the pass/fail criteria to one threshold
only, set the other values to 100%.
Bit Error Rate defines the target BER during the sensitivity
measurement. The reported sensitivity level will have a BER
less than or equal to this value. BER = Data bit errors / total
number of data bits * 100%.
Block Error Rate defines the target BLER during the
have a BLER less than or equal to this value. BLER =
Blocks with erroneous data or CRC fields / total number of
blocks * 100%.
Data Block Error Rate defines the target DBLER during the
have a DBLER less than or equal to this value. DBLER =
Blocks with erroneous data fields / total number of blocks *
100%.
to be applied to the BER/BLER data. This controls early
pass/fail behavior and ensures that enough frames are taken
to determine the BER/BLER to the specified level of
certainty.
frames for the BER/BLER measurement.
measure for the BER/BLER measurement. BER/BLER
measurements near the sensitivity threshold will require this
number of frames to be measured to determine pass or fail.
For absolute BER/BLER measurements (no confidence level
applied) this indicates the required number of frames for the
measurement.
measure. Early exit can only occur after measuring the
required minimum number of frames. This parameter does
not affect RBER measurements.

Rev. A, P#399783

Output Channel Pwr defines the amount of time to delay
after adjusting the downlink channel power. This may be
channel, for settling of the mobiles automatic gain control
(AGC), or for closed loop power control to stabilize.
call is dropped. For the WCDMA option, around 4-6 dB
appears to be the maximum suitable value as the sensitivity
curve is extremely steep.
enough that the desired BER is within one fine step of the
last zero BER value. Once the sensitivity floor is located, the
this level. This value is also used as the fixed downlink
power level for constant power BER/BLER measurements.
Output Channel Pwr specifies the desired initial or fixed
downlink power level.

Rev. A, P#399783
the sensitivity level at one power control setting (i.e. Closed
Loop) as defined by the "UE Transmit Power Control" TPC
Pattern setting, and then switching to another power control
setting (i.e. All 1) at the sensitivity level. This may be useful
for preserving battery life.
TPC Pattern Type sets the mobile station power control
pattern to the specified mode during BER/BLER
measurements at the sensitivity level. This setting overrides
the equivalent settings during the BER/BLER measurement.
14.3.2.12 Measurement Optimization

Sensitivity Search Algorithm allows selecting alternate
search algorithms for the sensitivity measurement in order to
reduce test time. These options may not be suitable for all
mobiles or configurations.
Full probing search is the default search algorithm for
finding the sensitivity. During the sensitivity floor probing
measurements, a BER/BLER measurement is performed
with a small number of blocks at each power level to quickly
determine if the level is near sensitivity.
Use RSCP to shorten probing search uses the CPICH
Received Signal Code Power reported from the mobile to
replace the Max Step Size portion of the probing search after
the first full probing sensitivity measurement has been
performed. The RSSI level at the Initial Signal Level is used
to determine the approximate location of the sensitivity level
and fall through to probing around that level using the fine
step size. This mode is less likely to drop a call due to non-
linearity of the RSCP, but is slower than using the RSCP to
replace the probing search.
Use RSCP to replace probing search uses the CPICH
Received Signal Code Power reported from the mobile to
completely replace the probing search for the sensitivity after
the first full probing sensitivity measurement has been
performed. The RSCP level at the Initial Signal Level is
used to determine the approximate location of the sensitivity
level and immediately begin full BER/BLER measurements
starting with the fine step size. This method may be prone to
dropped calls if non-linearity in the RSCP curve causes the
predicted sensitivity level to fall significantly below the actual
sensitivity level. In this case, the RSCP Probe Bias can be

Rev. A, P#399783
used to offset the predicted value to remain above

sensitivity.
Use RSSI to determine sensitivity uses the Received
replace the sensitivity measurement after the first full probing
sensitivity measurement has been performed. The RSCP
level at the Initial Signal Level is used to determine the
approximate sensitivity level based on the relative value
determined from the initial measurement. This mode can
greatly reduce test time, but does so at the cost of increased
measurement uncertainty. All results are dependent on the
stability of the first sensitivity measurement performed and
the linearity of the RSCP reporting of the mobile station.
This mode is not currently acceptable for CTIA testing.
Note: For all RSCP based optimizations, the Initial Signal

Level must result in an RSCP value that is within the
reportable range of the RSCP scale (i.e. RSCP from -25 to -
115 dBm) to provide suitable results. Otherwise, any
resulting predictions based on deltas in the RSCP will be
invalid.
RSCP Probe Bias specifies an offset, in number of Min Step

Size increments, from the default target sensitivity level.
This offset may be used to bias the target level of the
probing search if needed to ensure that the sensitivity
measurement always starts above the actual sensitivity
level.
Probe Measurement Frames allows setting the number of
frames used in the probing measurement for determining
when the output channel power is near sensitivity.

Rev. A, P#399783
User Equipment Signal contains settings found under the

UE Signal tab of the CMU-200 menu. Settings under this
tab primarily control the uplink behavior from the mobile to
the CMU.
14.3.2.13 Signaling
RF Channel Uplink specifies the uplink RF channel
UARFCN (UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel
Number). This setting is linked to the RF Channel Downlink
by a fixed frequency separation determined by the selected
operating band.
UE Transmit Power Control sets up the power control bit
pattern and the settings for closed loop control of the power
from the mobile station.
TPC Pattern Type selects the pattern to be used to control
the mobiles output power. Normally set to "All 1" to force
the mobile to full power.
are primarily used for setting up the initial uplink RF channel
including the output power levels.
Node-B Settings control the basic behavior of the downlink
channel.
RF Channel Downlink specifies the downlink RF channel
UARFCN (UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel
Number). This setting is linked to the RF Channel Uplink by
a fixed frequency separation determined by the selected
operating band.
Output Channel Pwr specifies the total power output from
the CMU for the downlink. The code domain power of each
of the individual code channels is represented relative to this
number. Output power measurement results (i.e. sensitivity)
are recorded based on this setting.
Level Reference controls whether the power in each of the
code channels is represented relative to the primary
common pilot channel (P-CPICH) power represented in dB,
or the total output channel power. In either case, all
measurement results are based on the total output channel
power value.

Rev. A, P#399783
Dedicated Channel (DCH) contains settings to configure

the type of dedicated channel to be used and the associated
data rates.
Dedicated Channel Type selects the basic mode of
communication to the mobile. For sensitivity or BER/BLER
measurements, the Reference Measurement Channel
(RMC) mode must be selected.
Test Mode selected available test mode loops. For
sensitivity or BER/BLER measurements, the test mode must
be in Loop Mode 2.
Downlink Physical Channels contains settings to configure
the code channel power for all possible downlink code
channels.
P-CPICH Level specifies the primary common pilot channel
power relative to the Output Channel Power. It is only visible
with the level reference is set to Output Channel Power.
When the level reference is set to P-CPICH, the absolute P-
CPICH level is set automatically by the CMU based on the
remaining physical code channels including the OCNS level.
OCNS Level specifies the Orthogonal Channel Noise
Simulator relative level used to make up the difference
between the sum of all of the remaining code channels and
the Output Channel Power. It is only visible when the level
reference is set to P-CPICH. Refer to the CMU-200
documentation for more information.
identification, mobile identification, and timeouts.
WCDMA Band Selection allows selection of the desired
WCDMA band.
Operating Band selects the desired WCDMA
communication band for the CMU. The selected option must
be installed and enabled in the CMU in order to run a test.
This control is linked to the Band Selection on the General
tab.
Network Identity contains settings to identify the network to
the mobile station. Consult the mobile manufacturer for
appropriate settings as needed.
Default IMSI allows pre-defining the IMSI of the mobile
under test. This is intended to allow connection to the
mobile immediately without requiring registration.

Rev. A, P#399783
Requested UE Data contains settings to identify the

determine capabilities of the mobile station and control
timeouts. The security settings must match those of the test
USIM used, if enabled. Consult the mobile or USIM
manufacturer for appropriate settings as needed. Refer to
the CMU-200 manual for more information.
dynamic range of the measurement receiver. In the other
RF modes, the input attenuation value for the selected RF
port is used by the CMU to determine the appropriate range.
Refer to Tips for using the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 for
more information. Custom settings under this menu are:
Note this function is provided as a work-around to a
14.3.2.14 Establish Call Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200

This dialog is used to establish a call to a mobile station
using the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 Universal Radio
Communication Tester. It provides control over the
registration signal, monitors signal status, and allows paging
of the mobile station. The available functions include:
Control Signal On enables the CMUs registration control
signal when checked.
Signaling State displays the current signal and connection
state of the CMU.

Rev. A, P#399783
Page Mobile tells the CMU to page the mobile when

pressed.
Cancel closes the dialog and cancels the connection
attempt. Connection retries (including additional displays of
the establish call dialog) may still occur, depending on the
current location within a given test procedure. Pressing this
button is the equivalent of pressing the button.
Abort closes the dialog with a user abort exception to force
an exit of all retry loops. This is similar to pressing the Abort
Test button on the menu bar.
Resume I/O is only visible when communication errors with
the CMU have broken the background polling loop used to
update the display. Pressing this button will attempt to re-
establish normal polling operation.
Max RF Analyzer Level is only visible when the software
auto ranging function is in operation. This allows manual
adjustment of the RF Max Level setting as needed to allow
registration or connection of the mobile.
14.3.3 Initiating a Call

Under most situations, the connection can be established
either by paging from the CMU or initiating a call from the
mobile. For CDMA calls, however, initiation of the call from
the mobile will typically result in a voice call rather than a test
call.
Start by enabling the registration signal if it is off, and wait for
the mobile station to register. It can take several minutes for
a mobile to register to a new mode, and proper
attenuation/RF power level, network, and channel settings
are required in many cases. It is often quicker to power the
mobile station off and back on to force a power-on
registration. Ensure that the mobile is isolated from any real
network to force registration to the CMU. Toggling the
control signal off and back on can also result in quicker
registration and or connection in some cases. It may be
possible to establish a call prior to registration, but results
vary.

Rev. A, P#399783
To initiate a call from the CMU, press the Page Mobile

button and wait for the mobile to alert. Answer the mobile
and place it back into test position. (Note that CDMA
mobiles can auto-answer in test mode.)
To initiate a call from the mobile, dial any three numbers and
press send to establish the test call. The CMU should
answer automatically. Note that some test modes require
the call to be established from the CMU in order to set the
appropriate test mode.
Upon detection of a valid connection, the dialog will display a
connect message and close automatically.
14.3.4 Aborting a Call Attempt

Closing the dialog by pressing the either the Cancel or Abort
button or the close button in the upper right corner will abort
the attempt to establish a call.
14.3.5 Exercise Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200

This dialog provides manual control over the Rohde &
Schwarz CMU-200 Universal Radio Communication Tester.
It provides the ability to establish and monitor a call, and
direct it to a desired traffic channel and power level. The
available displays and functions are spread across two tabs
and include:
User Interface provides the active user interface to the
CMU, with the following features:
Signaling State shows the current signal and connection
state of the CMU.
Traffic Channel shows and allows modification of the
current traffic channel of the mobile station.
Mobile Pwr Lvl shows and allows modification of the current
transmit power level setting (VMAC, DTC MAC, or PCL) of
the mobile station.
Establish Call displays the establish call dialog when
pressed.

Rev. A, P#399783

Equipment Settings displays and sets the equipment
parameters for the particular CMU option that is active.
Changing to this tab downloads the settings. Changing back
to the User Interface tab uploads the modified settings to the
CMU. Note that the CMU cannot be in an active call for
most settings to be changed. Use the context sensitive help
to obtain information on the available settings under this tab.

CDMA
with the CDMA Mobile Station option. It provides the ability
to establish and monitor a call, and direct it to a desired RF
channel and power control mode. The available displays
and functions are spread across two tabs and include:
state of the CMU.
RF Channel shows and allows modification of the current
RF channel of the mobile station.
Power Ctrl Bits shows and allows modification of the
current mobile power control loop mode setting of the CMU.
pressed.
most settings to be changed, and that a number of settings

Rev. A, P#399783
require the registration signal to be off as well. Use the

context sensitive help to obtain information on the available
settings under this tab.

CDMA 2000
with the CDMA 2000 Mobile Station option. It provides the
ability to establish and monitor a call, and direct it to a
desired RF channel and power control mode. It also
provides access to several basic real-time testing functions.
The available displays and functions are spread across two
tabs and include:
Communication Control provides access to the basic
communication control required to establish and maintain a
call. These functions include:
Band Selection allows switching the current operating band
(option) for the given driver. This should be used in
preference over the equivalent setting under the Equipment
Settings tab, as this will change the band selection without
attempting to update the CMU to settings from another band.
state of the CMU.
current mobile power control loop mode setting of the CMU.
pressed. If the driver supports auto-establishing a call and
that option is selected under Equipment Settings, an auto-
establish sequence will be initiated first.
Pause I/O stops the background polling loop that is used to
update the display. The dialog will no longer display the
current status of the CMU until the I/O loop is resumed.
Resume I/O is only visible when the user has paused the
background polling loop, or when communication errors with

Rev. A, P#399783
the CMU have broken the loop. Pressing this button will
attempt to re-establish normal polling operation.
Measurement Power Levels control the various CDMA
power levels affecting CMU measurements.
Overview provides a continuous overview measurement
with the same quantities as reported by the Overview tab on
the CMU.
Sensitivity allows executing a single sensitivity test point.
Refer to the Equipment Parameters help under Sensitivity for
more information. The available controls include:
Test Point Status reads out the status of the sensitivity
measurement as it progresses.
Run Sensitivity Test initiates a sensitivity measurement.
This button toggles to an abort button to cancel the test.
Last Sensitivity Value reports the actual output port power
of the CMU representing the sensitivity level determined at
the end of the last test. Any output port attenuation value
entered into the CMU is ignored.
settings under this tab, and refer to the CMU-200
documentation for more information on the available
settings.

GSM
with the GSM Mobile Station option. It provides the ability to
establish and monitor a call, and direct it to a desired RF
channel and forward power level. It also provides access to
several basic real-time testing functions. The available
displays and functions are spread across two tabs and
include:

Rev. A, P#399783

state of the CMU.
Mobile Power Lvl shows and allows modification of the
current mobile transmit power level setting.
Measurement Power Levels control the various control and
traffic channel power levels affecting CMU measurements.
Overview provides a continuous overview measurement
with the same quantities as reported by the Overview tab on
the CMU.
Receiver Quality provides a continuous readout of the
receiver quality reported by both the mobile station and a
continuous BER test from the CMU.

Rev. A, P#399783

settings.

WCDMA
with the WCDMA UE Signaling options. It provides the
ability to establish and monitor a call, and direct it to a
desired RF channel and forward power level. It also
provides access to basic real-time testing functions. The
available displays and functions are spread across two tabs
and include:
state of the CMU.

Rev. A, P#399783
RF Chan Dnlnk shows and allows modification of the

current RF channel of the base station. It is linked to the
uplink channel by the band separation of the selected band.
RF Chan Uplnk shows and allows modification of the
current RF channel of the mobile station. It is linked to the
downlink channel by the band separation of the selected
band.
current mobile power control setting of the CMU.

Rev. A, P#399783

settings.
14.4 Positioners
14.4.1 ETS-Lindgren Model 2090 Positioner
14.4.1.1 Positioner Ancillary Frame

This panel provides control over the settings of standard
positioners for each ancillary state available in the Ancillary
Equipment Pane. The ancillary positioner allows setting the
positioner to a desired target position at each ancillary state
of the test. This is useful for obtaining position dependent
information from tests that arent designed to have
positioning capability, and for performing different single axis
cuts of a pattern using multi-axis positioners.
Positioner State contains all the settings for the given
ancillary state. These include:
Target Position specifies the desired target position for the
ancillary state. The positioner will move to this target prior to
the test continuing.
Speed Setting to Target allows selection of the desired
operational speed of variable speed positioners for the target
seek operation. The actual speed associated with a given
speed selection is dependent on the type and configuration
of the positioner.

Rev. A, P#399783
Pause Time After Seek indicates the period of time to wait,

in milliseconds, after the target motion has been completed,
prior to proceeding with the test process. This is intended to
allow forced delays for settling of any vibration due to
movement.
Override Positioner Limits If Necessary will cause the
positioner to adjust the upper or lower soft limit as necessary
to ensure that the target position can be reached. If this box
is unchecked and the target position is not within the
available range of motion of the positioner, an exception will
occur and the test will abort.
14.4.1.2 Positioner Equipment Frame

This parameter frame controls the speed and motion settings
for standard positioners.
Positioner Speed Settings allows selection of the desired
operational speed of variable speed positioners for a number
of common operational modes. The actual speed
associated with a given speed selection is dependent on the
type and configuration of the positioner.
Continuous Acquisition Operations selects the speed
setting to be used when data will be acquired while the
device is in motion. For program controlled acquisition, the
slower the speed setting, the finer the available resolution.
For externally triggered acquisition, the speed setting should
be slow enough to insure that the test equipment triggers at
the desired interval. Triggering the equipment too fast may
result in missing data points and unpredictable results.
Stepped Acquisition Operations selects the speed setting
to be used when data will be acquired between steps in
position. Lower this setting to reduce vibration and settling
time issues. Increase it to reduce the duration of each step
and thus the overall test time. However, since acceleration
and deceleration times may prevent reaching full speed for
small step sizes, increasing the speed setting may not
always shorten the test time.
Non Acquisition Operations selects the speed setting to
be used for motion unrelated to data acquisition. This is the
speed setting used for operations such as initialization and
finalization of a test, where the positioner moves from the
home position to the starting position, and from the ending
position back to the home position. This would normally be

Rev. A, P#399783
set to the highest speed setting to minimized test time

overhead.
Positioner Settling Time provides control over the test
sequence, delaying data acquisition after positioner motion.
These settings are intended to allow forced delays for
settling of any vibration due to movement.
Pause Time After Cont. Seek indicates the period of time to
wait, in milliseconds, after a continuous acquisition operation
target motion has been completed, prior to proceeding with
the test process.
Pause Time After Stepped Seek indicates the period of
time to wait, in milliseconds, after a stepped acquisition
operation target motion has been completed, prior to
proceeding with the test process.
Pause Time After Non-Acq. Seek indicates the period of
time to wait, in milliseconds, after a non-acquisition target
motion has been completed, prior to proceeding with the test
process.
Position Offset allows applying a fixed offset from the
position and limit information returned from the positioner to
the readings used by the test. This feature can be used to
change the range of motion or position readout of a
positioner without having to reset the limits or current
position setting. EMQuest will treat the positioner as though
all readings are offset by the requested amount.
Offset to actual positioner reading indicates the desired
offset in degrees (rotational positioners) or centimeters
(linear positioners).
14.4.1.3 Positioner Exercise Dialog

This dialog allows the user to manually exercise the
functions of the associated positioner. The available
functions will be dependent on the capabilities of the
positioner. The functionality of the dialog is split between
two tabs, the User Interface tab and the Equipment Settings
tab. The available controls include:
User Interface provides the active user interface for
controlling the positioning functions of the positioner and
providing positioning feedback to the user.
The Positioner Display block provides position and limit
information to the user. These displays include:

Rev. A, P#399783
Upper Limit displays the upper limit in centimeters (linear

positioners) or the clockwise limit in degrees (rotational
positioners).
Current Pos displays the current position of the positioner in
centimeters (linear positioners) or degrees (rotational
positioners).
Lower Limit displays the lower limit in centimeters (linear
positioners) or the counterclockwise limit in degrees
(rotational positioners).
Inst. Vel. displays the instantaneous velocity of the
positioner in centimeters per second (linear positioners) or
degrees per second (rotational positioners). This value is
the difference between the current position reading and the
previous reading, divided by the time between readings
(typically around 0.1 seconds). This term will give a more
realistic value than the average velocity during acceleration
and deceleration, but is somewhat unstable due to variations
in communication timing between the positioner, controller,
and computer.
Avg. Vel. displays the average of the last several (typically
10, or 1.0 seconds worth) instantaneous velocity readings.
This term is more stable than the instantaneous velocity and
provides a more accurate measure of continuous speed, but
will lag the instantaneous velocity reading during
acceleration, deceleration, and reversal. Together, these
two velocity terms can be used to analyze the actual
performance of a positioner at a given speed setting in order
to determine the optimum speed setting for a continuous
acquisition test.
Speed Setting displays the current speed setting selection
of a variable speed positioner. The actual speed associated
with a given speed selection is dependent on the type and
configuration of the positioner. This control will only contain
valid information on multi-speed and variable speed devices.
The Motion Control block is in the middle of the dialog, and
allows direct control of the motion of the positioner, as well
as providing motion direction feedback. The available
motion control buttons include:

Rev. A, P#399783
Up initiates motion in the up or clockwise direction until the

positioner reaches the upper or clockwise limit, or until Stop
is pressed. The indicator above this button will light to
indicate motion in the up or clockwise direction no matter
how that motion is initiated (seek, step, up, increment, or
scan).
Stop stops positioner motion. The indicator above this
button will light to indicate the stopped condition whenever
the device is not in motion. The indicator may not
immediately change to Stop when the Stop button is pressed
since there may be deceleration time required before
stopping. Also, the indicator will change to Stop momentarily
during the reverse delay between direction changes.
Down initiates motion in the down or counterclockwise
direction until the positioner reaches the lower or
counterclockwise limit, or until Stop is pressed. The
indicator above this button will light to indicate motion in the
down or counterclockwise direction no matter how that
motion is initiated (seek, step, down, decrement, or scan).
Increment initiates motion in the up or clockwise direction
until the button is released or the positioner reaches the
upper or clockwise limit.
Scan toggles scan mode on or off. In scan mode, the
positioner will scan repeatedly between the upper/CW and
lower/CCW limits. The duration of the scan depends on the
scan cycle settings of the positioner (refer to the positioning
controller documentation for more information). Pressing
Stop will also end scan mode.
Decrement initiates motion in the down or counterclockwise
direction until the button is released or the positioner
reaches the lower or counterclockwise limit.
The Polarization control block is only visible for linear
positioners, and only affects positioners equipped with
automated polarization functionality. Selecting one of the
two radio buttons will instruct the positioner to set the
polarization to the Horizontal or Vertical setting. Note that
there is no feedback from the positioner to indicate when the
polarization is complete. The polarization indicator only
indicates the setting, not the actual state of the positioner.
Sufficient time should be allowed for the positioner to reach
the desired polarization before proceeding with other
operations.

Rev. A, P#399783
The Seek Target control block allows the user to specify an

exact target position, or a delta from the current position and
instruct the positioner to move to that position.
Target allows entry of a target value for a seek operation.
Press the Seek button or press Enter while in the edit field to
direct the positioner to seek the target. The target must be
between the upper/CW and lower/CCW limit settings of the
positioner.
Step allows entry of a step value for a seek operation.
Pressing the Step button (or pressing Enter while in the edit
field) will cause the positioner to seek a target position
equivalent to the current position plus the step value. The
target must be within the limits of the positioner. Entering a
positive step value will cause the positioner to step in the
positive (up/CW) direction, while entering a negative value
will cause the positioner to step in the negative (down/CCW)
direction.
Resume Update is only visible when communication errors
with the positioner have broken the background polling loop.
Pressing this button will attempt to re-establish normal
polling operation.
Close closes the exercise dialog.
Equipment Settings displays and sets various parameters
of the positioner. Changing back to the User Interface tab
uploads the modified settings to the positioner. The
available Settings include:
Upper Limit displays and sets the upper limit in centimeters
(linear positioners) or the clockwise limit in degrees
(rotational positioners). The positioner is restricted to motion
between this value and the lower limit.
Current Pos displays and sets the current position of the
positioner in centimeters (linear positioners) or degrees
(rotational positioners). This allows the user to adjust the
settings of the positioner to reflect changes due to different
IUT size/position, etc.
Lower Limit displays and sets the lower limit in centimeters
(linear positioners) or the counterclockwise limit in degrees
(rotational positioners). The positioner is restricted to motion
between this value and the upper limit.

Rev. A, P#399783
Speed Setting displays and selects the current speed

setting selection of a variable speed positioner. The actual
speed associated with a given speed selection is dependent
on the type and configuration of the positioner. This control
will only be enabled on multi-speed and variable speed
devices.
Acceleration displays and sets the acceleration setting of a
variable speed/variable acceleration positioner. The
acceleration is represented in the number of seconds to full
speed. This control will only be enabled on variable speed
devices that support variable acceleration.
all readings are offset by the requested amount. Enter the
desired offset in degrees (rotational positioners) or
centimeters (linear positioners).
Scan Cycles displays and sets the scan cycle setting of the
positioner in full cycles. The value can be set in increments
of half cycles (i.e. on motion from top to bottom or vice
versa). A value of zero indicates infinite scan mode.
14.4.2 ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth

Positioner
14.4.2.1 Ancillary Parameter Frame, ETS-Lindgren Model 2005

Light Duty Azimuth Positioner
This panel provides control over the settings of the ETS-
Lindgren Model 2005 positioners for each ancillary state
available in the Ancillary Equipment Pane. The ancillary
positioner allows setting the positioner to a desired target
position at each ancillary state of the test. This is useful for
obtaining position dependent information from tests that
arent designed to have positioning capability, and for
performing different single axis cuts of a pattern using multi-
axis positioners.
Positioner State contains all the settings for the given
ancillary state. These include:

Rev. A, P#399783
Target Position specifies the desired target position for the

ancillary state. The positioner will move to this target prior to
the test continuing.
Speed Setting to Target allows selection of the desired
operational speed of variable speed positioners for the target
seek operation. The actual speed associated with a given
of the positioner.
Pause Time After Seek indicates the period of time to wait,
in milliseconds, after the target motion has been completed,
prior to proceeding with the test process. This is intended to
allow forced delays for settling of any vibration due to
movement.
Override Positioner Limits If Necessary will cause the
positioner to adjust the upper or lower soft limit as necessary
to ensure that the target position can be reached. If this box
is unchecked and the target position is not within the
available range of motion of the positioner, an exception will
occur and the test will abort.
14.4.2.2 Configuration Settings, ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light

Duty Azimuth Positioner
This configuration control panel allows configuration of the
interface and features of an ETS-Lindgren Model 2005
positioner. The available settings are:
Communication Configuration is used to identify and
communicate with a particular instance of the selected piece
of equipment. Each piece of equipment must have unique
COM settings, but EMQuest can support more than one
identical piece of equipment.
COM Port indicates the RS-232 serial port to use to
communicate with this equipment.
Options controls the way EMQuest will configure the
positioner, depending on the firmware version. These
options are only supported on later versions of the 2005.
Acceleration controls the acceleration rate of the variable
speed drive. This value is in machine timer units and does
not have an exact correlation to a given acceleration rate.
Smaller numbers produce faster acceleration. Increase this
number to slow acceleration/deceleration for larger loads or
if the positioner loses position during operation (indicating
the stepper drive is overloaded).
Rev. A, P#399783
Use Velocity Index makes newer firmware versions of the

2005 operate the same as older versions. In newer
firmware, the velocity can vary in a continuous range rather
than just four preset speeds. Checking this box will use
preset speed settings rather than continuously variable
speed settings.
14.4.2.3 Exercise Dialog, ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty

Azimuth Positioner
This dialog allows the user to manually exercise the
functions of the ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 positioner.
The top of the dialog contains the Display/Settings control
block, which displays information on the current settings of
the positioner and allows adjustment of those settings.
These include:
Current Position displays the current position of the
positioner in degrees. When the positioner is stopped, the
user can enter a new setting for the current position and
press the Set button to change the current position setting.
This allows the user to adjust the settings of the positioner to
reflect changes due to different IUT size/position, etc.
Target allows entry of a target value for a seek operation.
Press the Seek button to direct the positioner to seek the
target. The target must be between the CW and CCW limit
settings of the positioner.
Step allows entry of a step value for a seek operation.
Pressing the Step button will cause the positioner to seek a
target position equivalent to the current position plus the step
value. The target must be within the limits of the positioner.
Entering a positive step value will cause the positioner to
step in the positive (CW) direction, while entering a negative
value will cause the positioner to step in the negative (CCW)
direction.

Rev. A, P#399783
CW Limit displays the upper limit clockwise limit in degrees.

When the positioner is stopped, the user can enter a new
setting for the limit and press the Set button to change the
setting. The positioner will ignore the Set button while in
motion.
CCW Limit displays the counterclockwise limit in degrees.
When the positioner is stopped, the user can enter a new
setting for the limit and press the Set button to change the
setting. The positioner will ignore the Set button while in
motion.
Speed Setting displays and selects the current speed
setting selection. The actual speed associated with a given
of the positioner and the settings in the equipment control
panel. The value can represent either one of several presets
or a value in the continuous range of available speeds.
Inst. Vel. displays the instantaneous velocity of the
positioner in degrees per second . This value is the
difference between the current reading and the previous
reading, divided by the time between readings (typically
around 0.1 seconds). This term will give a more realistic
value than the average velocity during acceleration and
deceleration, but is somewhat unstable due to variations in
communication timing between the positioner, controller, and
computer.
Avg. Vel. displays the average of the last several (typically
10, or 1.0 seconds worth) instantaneous velocity readings.
This term is more stable than the instantaneous velocity and
provides a more accurate measure of continuous speed, but
will lag the instantaneous velocity reading during
acceleration, deceleration, and reversal. Together, these
two velocity terms can be used to analyze the actual
performance of a positioner at a given speed setting in order
to determine the optimum speed setting for a continuous
acquisition test.
all readings are offset by the requested amount. Enter the
desired offset in degrees.

Rev. A, P#399783
The Motion Control block is in the middle of the dialog, and

allows direct control of the motion of the positioner, as well
as providing motion direction feedback. The available
motion control buttons include:
CW initiates motion in the clockwise direction until the
positioner reaches the clockwise limit, or until Stop is
pressed. The indicator above this button will light to indicate
motion in the clockwise direction no matter how that motion
is initiated (seek, step, up, increment, or scan).
Stop stops positioner motion. The indicator above this
button will light to indicate the stopped condition whenever
the device is not in motion. The indicator may not
immediately change to Stop when the Stop button is pressed
since there may be deceleration time required before
stopping. Also, the indicator will change to Stop momentarily
during the reverse delay between direction changes.
CCW initiates motion in the down or counterclockwise
direction until the positioner reaches the counterclockwise
limit, or until Stop is pressed. The indicator above this
button will light to indicate motion in the counterclockwise
direction no matter how that motion is initiated (seek, step,
down, decrement, or scan).
Increment initiates motion in the clockwise direction until the
button is released or the positioner reaches the clockwise
limit.
Scan toggles scan mode on or off. In scan mode, the
positioner will scan repeatedly between the CW and CCW
limits. The duration of the scan depends on the scan cycle
settings of the positioner (refer to the positioning controller
documentation for more information). Pressing Stop will
also end scan mode.
Decrement initiates motion in the counterclockwise direction
until the button is released or the positioner reaches the
counterclockwise limit.
Enable Current Position/Limit Changes locks out the Set
buttons when unchecked to prevent accidental alteration of
settings.
Resume Update is only visible when communication errors
with the positioner have broken the background polling loop.
Pressing this button will attempt to re-establish normal
polling operation.

Rev. A, P#399783
14.4.2.4 Equipment Parameters, ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light

Duty Azimuth Positioner
This parameter frame controls the speed and motion settings
for the ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 positioner.
Positioner Speed Settings allows selection of the desired
operational speed of variable speed positioners for a number
of common operational modes. The actual speed
associated with a given speed selection is dependent on the
type and configuration of the positioner.
Continuous Acquisition Operations selects the speed
setting to be used when data will be acquired while the
device is in motion. For program controlled acquisition, the
slower the speed setting, the finer the available resolution.
For externally triggered acquisition, the speed setting should
be slow enough to insure that the test equipment triggers at
the desired interval. Triggering the equipment too fast may
result in missing data points and unpredictable results.
Stepped Acquisition Operations selects the speed setting
to be used when data will be acquired between steps in
position. Lower this setting to reduce vibration and settling
time issues. Increase it to reduce the duration of each step
and thus the overall test time. However, since acceleration
and deceleration times may prevent reaching full speed for
small step sizes, increasing the speed setting may not
always shorten the test time.
Non Acquisition Operations selects the speed setting to
be used for motion unrelated to data acquisition. This is the
speed setting used for operations such as initialization and
finalization of a test, where the positioner moves from the
home position to the starting position, and from the ending
position back to the home position. This would normally be
set to the highest speed setting to minimized test time
overhead.
Positioner Settling Time provides control over the test
sequence, delaying data acquisition after positioner motion.
These settings are intended to allow forced delays for
settling of any vibration due to movement.
Pause Time After Cont. Seek indicates the period of time to
wait, in milliseconds, after a continuous acquisition operation
target motion has been completed, prior to proceeding with
the test process.

Rev. A, P#399783
Pause Time After Stepped Seek indicates the period of

time to wait, in milliseconds, after a stepped acquisition
operation target motion has been completed, prior to
proceeding with the test process.
Pause Time After Non-Acq. Seek indicates the period of
time to wait, in milliseconds, after a non-acquisition target
motion has been completed, prior to proceeding with the test
process.
all readings are offset by the requested amount.
Offset to actual positioner reading indicates the desired
offset in degrees (rotational positioners) or centimeters
(linear positioners).
14.5 Power Meters
14.5.1 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz NRVD

Power Meter
This pane provides the Equipment Parameters for the
Rohde & Schwarz NRVD power meters. These are
equipment specific parameters that are not directly related to
the measurement process, but are required to properly
configure the equipment in order to perform the test. These
parameters include:
Measurement Settings control the configuration of the
power meter and its behavior during measurements. Refer
to the NRVD documentation for more details on each of
these settings.
Measurement Mode selects from the available
measurement modes of the NRVD. Not all power sensors
support all modes.
Pulse Duty Cycle allows specifying the desired duty cycle
when Pulse Power measurement mode is selected.

Rev. A, P#399783
Filter Control controls the behavior of the sample averaging

filter. The choices are to allow the NRVD to automatically
adjust the filter based on power range and sensor type (see
the NRVD data sheet), or to manually set the filter value.
Filter (Average) Count specifies the number of samples to
average when the filter control is set to Manual.
Power Sensor Zeroing controls the zero offset correction.
The choices including re-zeroing the sensor at the start of
each test, using the existing zero offset, or disabling the zero
correction.
Auto Range enables or disables the auto ranging function of
the NRVD.
Power Range (Max) specifies the maximum expected input
level when auto ranging is Off.
Sensor Settling Time specifies how long the driver should
delay before initiating a measurement on the power meter.
This allows thermal sensors time to react to changes in input
level.
Data Point Filter controls the behavior of the Filtered Trace
Point data acquisition mode, which applies pass/fail criteria
on each measured data point.
Ceiling Level specifies the maximum allowed signal level for
a filtered data point. Values above this level result in a
measurement retry.
Floor Level specifies the minimum allowed signal level for a
filtered data point. Values below this level result in a
measurement retry.
Filter Retry specifies the number of times to automatically
retry the measurement when one of the above filter criteria
fails.

Rev. A, P#399783
14.6 Network Analyzers
14.6.1 Configuration Settings, Generic Network

Analyzer
This is the configuration control panel for a generic network
analyzer, and assumes dual channel capability. This control
panel allows the user to implement basic functionality of any
GPIB based network analyzer, provided the appropriate
GPIB commands are available in the equipments command
set. The user must enter the GPIB commands for each field
in order to define the necessary functionality. This driver is
considered bonus technology and is not guaranteed to work
in all cases. The available settings are as follows:
GPIB Configuration is used to identify and communicate
with a particular instance of the selected piece of equipment.
Each piece of equipment must have unique GPIB settings,
but EMQuest can support more than one identical piece of
equipment. Currently, EMQuest only supports the National
Instruments line of GPIB interfaces.
Board Id indicates the National Instruments GPIB board
number to use to communicate with this equipment. On
most systems, the default of zero will be correct. However,
for systems with more than one GPIB card, or with special
settings in the NI drivers, select the board number that the
equipment will be attached to.
GPIB Address is the primary GPIB address of the test
equipment. Refer to the documentation for the equipment to
determine the appropriate setting.
Timeout specifies the expected sweep time of a trace. This
value is padded with an additional ten seconds when
determining a sweep timeout error. This value is also used
in zero span mode to specify the time scale of the acquired
data.
Equipment Command Strings contains a range of fields for
entering the GPIB commands necessary to control the
analyzer. In general, all fields must be filled for full
functionality. Any field containing a question mark (?) is
automatically assumed to be a query and will be treated as
such.

Rev. A, P#399783
Equipment Initialization is the initial command sequence

used to configure the device. At a minimum, it should
configure the analyzer for ASCII output of data, and dual
channel mode if supported. An additional initialization string
is provided in the equipment parameters page to set test
specific parameters such as bandwidth, number of points,
etc.
Sweep initiates a sweep of the receiver(s) and waits for
completion. This command should use an operation
complete query (*OPC?) or similar command that will only
execute upon completion of the sweep to synchronize the
driver with the sweep. Otherwise, the results may be
queried before completion of the sweep, resulting in
unpredictable behavior.
Channel 1 switches the trace output reading to return
channel one.
Channel 2 switches the trace output reading to return
channel two.
Start Frequency sets the start frequency of a trace. This is
just the initial command prefix, including any spacing
required before the frequency value. The value in MHz will
be inserted after this command, and the frequency unit will
be appended to the result.
Stop Frequency sets the end frequency of a trace. This is
Frequency Unit specifies the command suffix for setting the
start and stop frequency. It is appended to the command
string after the frequency in MHz.
Write Operation Complete Query allows specifying an
optional operation complete query to be added after all GPIB
writes, in cases where a suitable query function containing a
question mark does not exist for synchronizing a sweep, etc.
Points Per Trace specifies the expected number of points
per trace. If needed, an appropriate command should be
sent in the equipment initialization to ensure that the sweeps
return this number of data points.
Return Trace is the command to read a trace for the current
channel. It is always treated as a query.

Rev. A, P#399783
Trace Delimiter is a hexadecimal value representing one or

two ASCII characters that are used as delimiters between
each field in the text string returned by the Return Trace
query. The delimiters should be represented in hex as either
0xNN or 0xNNMM, where NN and MM are the hexadecimal
ASCII values of the desired characters. Thus, a comma
would be 0x2C, and a carriage return/linefeed pair would be
0x0D0A. Use the Character Map utility in
Accessories/System Tools program group under the
Windows Start menu to determine other hex representations
of required characters.
Readings Skipped controls the number of trace elements to
ignore between each returned value. This is provided to
support instruments that return data in complex pairs.
Return Marker specifies the command to set and output the
marker for all marker calls. No distinction is made between
marker or max marker readings.
14.6.2 Advantest R376x Series
14.6.2.1 Configuration Settings, Advantest R376x Series

This is the configuration control panel for the Advantest
R376x series of vector network analyzers. The available
settings are as follows:

Rev. A, P#399783
Installed Options lists available options that are supported

by the driver and may be installed in the equipment. Care
should be taken not to enable options that are not installed
as GPIB errors may occur which may not be detected,
resulting in erroneous data.
Time domain capability indicates that the analyzer has the
time domain option installed. Checking this box will allow
time gating to be used.
Driver Options controls the way certain features of the
analyzer are treated by the driver.
Read vector components sequentially, when checked,
causes the driver to use the default data transfer sequence
for reading vector information from the analyzer by
transferring each component separately. The presence of
this setting indicates that this driver supports an optimized
measurement routine to read both vector components
simultaneously and will do so by default when this box is left
unchecked.
Port Definitions allows user definition of standard ports. In
order to standardize the interface between the various test
modules and equipment modules, EMQuest supports a
standardized set of custom measurement configurations for
network analyzers, beyond the standard S-Parameter
settings. These are based on common two-port + reference
port network analyzers, but since the R376x analyzers can
have up to four S-parameter ports, the user is allowed to
configure each of the standard types to be any port
combination they desire. These settings will be used in
place of the standard setting as required. Note that the
calibration modes are still based on a given S-parameter, so
calibrations may be invalid on overridden ports.
S11 is used to define the desired reflectivity S-parameter to
be labeled as S11 from the available reflectivity ports. Note
that calibrations for ports above S22 arent currently
supported unless performed manually.
S12 is used to define the desired transmission S-parameter
to be labeled as S12 from the available transmission paths.
Note that calibrations for paths to a third or fourth port arent
currently supported unless performed manually.

Rev. A, P#399783

A/R is used to define the relative ratio measurement defined
as port A divided by the reference port. This port setting is
typically used for single channel tests and as channel 1 for
dual channel tests.
B/R is used to define the relative ratio measurement defined
as port B divided by the reference port. This port setting is
typically used as channel 2 for dual channel tests.
A/B is used to define the relative ratio measurement defined
as port A divided by port B.
A is used to define the absolute magnitude measurement of
port A. This port setting is typically used for single channel
tests and as channel 1 for dual channel tests.
B is used to define the absolute magnitude measurement of
port B. This port setting is typically used as channel 2 for
dual channel tests.
14.6.2.2 Equipment Parameters, Advantest R376x Series

Advantest R376x series of vector network analyzers. These
are equipment specific parameters that are not directly
related to the measurement process, but are required to
properly configure the equipment in order to perform the test.
These parameters have been spread across several tabbed
windows on the equipment pane, and include:
The General tab contains most of the available parameter
settings for the analyzer. The available parameter groups on
this tab are:
14.6.2.3 Trace Information settings, including:

Smoothing Factor controls the smoothing window applied
to the received trace. When enabled, the analyzer will
average points from the specified percentage of the trace to
generate each frequency point. This feature is useful for
eliminating sharp noise spikes, etc., but may lose
measurement details. To enable, select the checkbox and
enter the desired smoothing factor, from 0 to 50%.

Rev. A, P#399783
Averaging Factor controls the number of sweeps that are

averaged to generate one trace. When enabled, the
analyzer will measure the specified number of sweeps and
display the resulting average. This function will reduce the
random noise level in the resulting data. To enable, select
the checkbox and enter the desired number of sweeps to
average, from 1 to 999.
Points Per Trace controls the number of points measured
per trace displayed or returned. Selecting more points will
increase the frequency resolution, but will slow the sweep
speed accordingly. Select from 3 to 1201 points per trace.
14.6.2.4 IF Bandwidth/Sweep Time settings, including:

Bandwidth Setting allows the selection of the IF bandwidth
setting. Narrowing the bandwidth will drop the noise floor,
but it will also increase the required sweep time. The
allowed settings range from 10 to 20,000 Hz.
Manual Sweep Time allows entry of the desired sweep time
in milliseconds. The sweep time cannot be set shorter than
the time required based on the bandwidth setting.
Auto Couple Sweep Time, when checked, (the default) will
set the sweep time based on the bandwidth setting.
Port Settings - Calibration and Measurement: There are two
sets of Port Settings, one for the calibration step, and one for
the measurement step. This allows the output power level or
port attenuation levels to be changed between the calibration
step and measurement step. This feature is useful in cases
where the requirements of the measurement may cause an
overload condition during the calibration, or where linearity
concerns require similar insertion losses during calibration
and measurement. The available settings include:
Output Power Level allows setting the source power level

in dBm. The range allowed by the analyzer will be
dependent on the analyzer type and installed options. It may
not correspond to the total range of values provided by this
control. It is up to the end user to verify the capabilities of
their equipment to insure that they dont specify a value that
is outside its operating range.

Rev. A, P#399783
Note that boosting the power level above the recommended

output level can affect flatness and may result in non-
linearity and/or harmonics in the measured signal. The user
should also take care to avoid overloading the input(s) when
increasing the output power.
The Calibration tab contains parameter settings related to

calibration selection. These settings allow the selection of
the desired analyzer calibration type, if any, prior to initiating
a measurement. Prior to starting a test, the test parameter
settings will be compared to those already in the analyzer,
and, if they differ, the analyzer will be reset and the new
parameters downloaded prior to initiating the requested
calibration. The available parameter groups on this tab are:
Calibration Kit and Test Port Genders includes settings for
selection of the desired calibration kit and specifying the
associated genders of the test ports. The available settings
include:
Calibration Kit allows selection of one of the standard
calibration kits. The available standard calibration kits are:
3.5 mm, 7 mm, 50 Ohm Type N, and 75 Ohm Type N.
Port 1 allows the selection of the gender of test port 1 for
calibration kits that have different calibration terms for each
gender. The available selections are Male and Female. For
genderless connectors, or calibration kits with the same
corrections for each gender, this selection is disabled.
Channel 1 and Channel 2 allow the selection of the desired
calibration type to be used for each channel of the network
analyzer. For single channel tests, the second channel is
ignored. For dual channel tests where one calibration will
satisfy both channels (i.e. a full two-port calibration for S-
parameter measurements) the second channel should be set
to Manual Calibration to prevent duplicating the calibration
for the second channel.

Rev. A, P#399783
Calibration Type allows the selection of the desired

calibration type. The user should take care to insure that the
selected calibration method is applicable to the test
measurement to be performed. Some tests may override
this setting automatically, while others may provide the user
the flexibility to control this setting, even though the end
result may not make sense. The available calibration types
include:
No Calibration skips the calibration step and insures that no
calibration is enabled.
Response Short performs a frequency response calibration
using a reference short, obtaining a single reference curve
that subsequent sweeps are compared to.
Response Thru performs a frequency response calibration
using a thru connection, obtaining a single reference curve
that subsequent sweeps are compared to.
Response & Isolation obtains both a frequency response
reference as describe above, and an isolation reference,
which is used to bound the opposite (noise floor) end of the
calibration.
Full 1-port performs a full reflectivity calibration, obtaining
responses for short, open, and load standard terminations.
Full 2-Port performs a full reflectivity calibration on both
ports, followed by an isolation measurement, and finally a
forward and reverse response thru calibration and match.
This calibration is only valid for S-parameter measurements.
Full 2-Port, Omit Isolation performs a full reflectivity
calibration on both ports, followed by a forward and reverse
response thru calibration and match. The isolation step is
omitted. This calibration is only valid for S-parameter
measurements.
Manual Calibration pauses the initialization process to
allow the user to make custom calibrations and manual
adjustments to parameters not supported by the driver.
The Driver Settings tab contains parameters related to
driver specific settings. These settings normally refer to
capabilities added to the driver to enhance the functionality
of the equipment for a specific test. These may include
various emulation functions and data filters. The available
parameter groups on this tab are:

Rev. A, P#399783
Filtered Trace Settings allows selection of the desired filter

to apply to the acquired data. The current filters are
primarily designed for use with spectrum analyzers, but
some may apply to traces generated with a network
analyzer. Refer to the Filtered Trace Settings reference for
more information.
14.6.3 Agilent/HP 8510
14.6.3.1 Configuration Settings, Agilent 8510

This is the configuration control panel for the Agilent/HP
8510 and equivalent series of vector network analyzers. The
available settings are as follows:
Output Power Level Range allows specifying the available
range of output power levels for the network analyzer to
restrict the available range that may be selected in a
parameter file. Refer to the documentation included with the
network analyzer to determine the valid range of settings.
Minimum is used to enter the minimum output power level
to be allowed in dBm.

Rev. A, P#399783
Maximum is used to enter the maximum output power level

Time Domain Capability indicates that the analyzer has the
Synthesized Source (Step Mode) indicates that the signal
generator used with the 8510 supports step mode sweeps in
addition to ramp mode sweeps.
Increase Sweep Timeout Period By allows adjusting for
unexpected delays due to slow equipment, etc. by putting a
fixed increase in the allowed sweep time. This does not
affect the operation of the 8510, but just allows the driver to
account for its operation by allowing more time to complete a
sweep.
unchecked.
Absolute/Relative Port Definitions allows user definition of
standard ports. In order to standardize the interface
between the various test modules and equipment modules,
EMQuest supports a standardized set of custom
measurement configurations for network analyzers, beyond
the standard S-Parameter settings. These are based on
common two-port + reference port network analyzers, but
since the 8510 can support a more complicated set of
measurement ports, the user is allowed to configure each of
the standard types to be any port combination they desire.
These settings will be used to customize the USER port
definitions of the 8510 as needed.

Rev. A, P#399783

dual channel tests.
dual channel tests.
Numerator allows the selection of the measurement port for
each port definition. The available ports are a1, a2, b1, or
b2.
Denominator allows the selection of the reference port for
each port definition. The available ports are a1, a2, or b1.
The reference port selection is not available for the absolute
magnitude port settings.
Phase Lock allows the selection of the port to phase lock
the received signal(s) to. The available ports are a1, a2, or
None.
Drive Port allows the selection of the main port to apply
drive power to on units equipped with the S-Parameter test
set. The available ports are Port 1, Port 2, or None.
14.6.3.2 Equipment Parameters, Agilent 8510

Agilent/HP 8510 series of vector network analyzers. These
this tab are:

Rev. A, P#399783
14.6.3.3 Trace Information Settings, including:

Averaging Factor controls the number of sweeps or points
that are averaged to generate one trace. When enabled, the
analyzer will measure the specified number of sweeps or
points and display the resulting average. This function will
reduce the random noise level in the resulting data. The
method of averaging is dependent upon the sweep type
selected. In Ramp mode, the analyzer will average repeated
sweeps to generate the resulting trace, while in Step mode,
each data point will be measured the specified number of
times before stepping to the next point. To enable, select
the checkbox and enter the desired number of sweeps or
points to average, from 1 to 4095.
speed accordingly. Select from 1, 51, 101, 201, 401, or 801
points per trace. Note: Selecting 1 point per trace will
automatically put the analyzer in the single point mode,
regardless of the Sweep Mode setting.
Sweep Mode allows the selection of the desired sweep
mode for analyzer configurations that support more than one
mode. This selection will only be visible if the Synthesized
Source option is checked in the equipment configuration
panel. The available choices are Ramp, which uses an
analog synchronization signal between the analyzer and the
signal source, and Step, which uses the system interface to
step the signal source to each frequency. Ramp mode is
typically faster unless a number of traces are being
averaged, but frequency accuracy will suffer due to the
analog sweep signal. Step mode takes longer between each
step due to the digital communication required, but does not
slow down much as averaging is increased since the same
frequency point is measured repeatedly.

Rev. A, P#399783

set the sweep time based on the bandwidth and frequency
range.
the time required based on the bandwidth and sweep mode
settings.
is outside its operating range. Note that boosting the power
level above the recommended output level can affect
flatness and may result in non-linearity and/or harmonics in
the measured signal. The user should also take care to
avoid overloading the input(s) when increasing the output
power.
Port 1 Attenuation allows setting of a built in attenuator for
Port 1 of the analyzer when so equipped.
Time Gate Settings allow the application of a time gate to
frequency domain data if the analyzer has the time domain
option installed. These settings are only available if the
Time Domain Option is checked in the equipment
configuration panel. The time gate can be used to remove
path dependent effects from a frequency response
measurement. The user must make sure that the specified
gating values are valid for the requested frequency range.
The Fast Fourier Transform process used by the analyzer
will also introduce certain artifacts into the resulting
measurements, so users should consult their equipment

Rev. A, P#399783
documentation to become familiar with the FFT process prior

to using this function. The available settings include:
Use Time Gating will setup and enable the time domain
gating when checked.
Center accepts the center time position of the time gate.
Span accepts the time span of the gate.
Gate Shape allows entry of the desired gate shape. The
available selections are Maximum, Minimum, Normal, and
Wide. Refer to the network analyzer documentation for
more information on these settings.
Calibration Kit includes settings for selection of the desired
calibration kit. The available settings include:
Cal Kit 1, and Cal Kit 2.
calibration type and standard to be used for each channel of
the network analyzer. For single channel tests, the second
channel is ignored. For dual channel tests where one
calibration will satisfy both channels (i.e. a full two-port
calibration for S-parameter measurements) the second
channel should be set to Manual Calibration to prevent
duplicating the calibration for the second channel.
include:

Rev. A, P#399783

Response performs a single frequency response calibration,
obtaining a single reference curve that subsequent sweeps
are compared to. The reference can be an open, short, or
thru connection.
calibration.
S11 1-port performs a full reflectivity calibration, obtaining
This calibration is only valid if the analyzer is in S11 mode.
ports, followed by an optional isolation measurement and
finally a forward and reverse response thru calibration and
match. This calibration is only valid for S-parameter
measurements.
One-Path 2-Port performs a full reflectivity calibration on
port 1, followed by an optional isolation measurement and
finally a forward response thru calibration and match. This
calibration is only valid for S-parameter measurements.
Calibration Standard allows the selection of the desired
calibration standard for Response and Response & Isolation
calibrations. For other calibrations, this setting is disabled.
The available standards include:
Auto automatically selects an appropriate calibration
standard for the specified measurement type. It selects an
Open for S11 and S22, and a Thru for all others.
Short specifies the use of a standard short circuit
termination.
Open specifies the use of a standard open circuit
termination.
Thru specifies the use of a thru connection between transmit
and receive ports.

Rev. A, P#399783

of the equipment for a specific test. These may include
various emulation functions and data filters. The available
more information.
14.6.4 Agilent/HP 872X Series


Rev. A, P#399783

Equipment Revision allows control over some option
variations between different versions of the 8720. This is
primarily needed to eliminate certain "unsupported option"
messages that may occur.
GPIB Delay allows adding additional delay between each
GPIB call to address issues with older units with slower
processors.
Revision A Measurement Types is only visible when the
Rev A analyzer is selected. The 8720A does not support
ratios and can only use S-parameters. These fields allow
defining which S-parameter to use for each ratio
measurement.
dual channel tests.

Agilent/HP 872X series of vector network analyzers. These

Rev. A, P#399783

this tab are:

speed accordingly. Select from 3, 11, 26, 51, 101, 201, 401,
801, or 1601 points per trace.

allowed settings are 10, 30, 100, 300, 1000, and 3000 Hz.

Rev. A, P#399783

power.

Rev. A, P#399783

include:
7 mm, 3.5 mm, 50 Ohm Type N, and 75 Ohm Type N.
include:

Rev. A, P#399783

thru connection.
calibration.
measurements.
termination.
termination.
and receive ports.
of the equipment for a specific test. The may include various

Rev. A, P#399783
emulation functions and data filters. The available

more information.
14.6.5 Agilent/HP 875X Series


Rev. A, P#399783

HP 85047-A Frequency Doubler indicates that the 8753
series analyzer has the frequency doubler installed and can
function to 6 GHz when enabled.
Support older firmware versions causes the driver to add
delay between each GPIB command to support older units
with slower processors.
unchecked.

Rev. A, P#399783

Agilent/HP 875X series of vector network analyzers. These
this tab are:
speed accordingly. Select from 3, 11, 26, 51, 101, 201, 401,
801, or 1601 points per trace.

allowed settings are 10, 30, 100, 300, 1000, and 3000 Hz.

Rev. A, P#399783




Rev. A, P#399783
include:
7 mm, 3.5 mm, 50 Ohm Type N, and 75 Ohm Type N.

Rev. A, P#399783

include:
thru connection.
calibration.
measurements.

Rev. A, P#399783

termination.
termination.
and receive ports.
more information.
14.6.6 Agilent ENA Series
14.6.6.1 Configuration Parameters, Agilent ENA Series

This is the configuration control panel for the Agilent ENA
series of vector network analyzers. The available settings
are as follows:

Rev. A, P#399783

unchecked.
port network analyzers, but since the ENA analyzers can
have up to four S-parameter ports, the user is allowed to

Rev. A, P#399783

dual channel tests.
dual channel tests.
14.6.6.2 Equipment Parameters, Agilent ENA Series

Agilent ENA series of vector network analyzers. These are
parameters have been spread across several tabbed
this tab are:

Rev. A, P#399783


range.
Man. Sweep Time allows entry of the desired sweep time in
milliseconds. The sweep time cannot be set shorter than the
time required based on the bandwidth and sweep mode
settings.
Port Settings - Calibration and Measurement: There are
two sets of Port Settings, one for the calibration step, and
one for the measurement step. This allows the output power
level or port attenuation levels to be changed between the
calibration step and measurement step. This feature is
useful in cases where the requirements of the measurement
may cause an overload condition during the calibration, or
where linearity concerns require similar insertion losses
during calibration and measurement. The available settings
include:

Rev. A, P#399783
Attenuation allows setting of a built in attenuator(s) of the

analyzer when so equipped.
Port 1 Output Pwr allows setting the source power level in
dBm for output on Port 1. The range allowed by the
analyzer will be dependent on the analyzer type and
installed options. It may not correspond to the total range of
values provided by this control.
Port 2 Output Pwr allows setting the source power level in
dBm for output on Port 2. The range allowed by the
analyzer will be dependent on the analyzer type and
installed options. It may not correspond to the total range of
values provided by this control.
It is up to the end user to verify the capabilities of their
equipment to insure that they dont specify a value that is
outside its operating range.

Time Gate settings allow the application of a time gate to


Rev. A, P#399783

Gate Type allows selecting between a bandpass or notch
gate. The Bandpass gate removes everything outside the
gate, while the notch gate removes everything inside the
gated area.
include:
calibration kits. The driver supports numbered cal kits
containing settings for male and female standards and thru
connection in the standard order.
Electronic Calibration Kit allows selecting the use of an
optional electronic calibration module to automate a full two
port calibration.
calibration type to be used for each channel of the network

Rev. A, P#399783

Calibration Type for Channel x allows the selection of the
desired calibration type for each channel. The user should
take care to insure that the selected calibration method is
applicable to the test measurement to be performed. Some
tests may override this setting automatically, while others
may provide the user the flexibility to control this setting,
even though the end result may not make sense. The
available calibration types include:
are compared to. The reference can be an Open, Short, or
Thru connection.
calibration.
This calibration is only valid if the analyzer is in S11 or S22
mode.
measurements.

Rev. A, P#399783

more information.
14.6.7 Agilent PNA Series
14.6.7.1 Configuration Settings, Agilent PNA Series

This is the configuration control panel for the Agilent PNA
series of vector network analyzers. The available settings
are as follows:

Rev. A, P#399783
Time domain capability indicates that the analyzer has the

Use PNA-L options instructs the driver to account for the
known differences between the PNA and PNA-L. Note: This
functionality has not been tested and is unsupported. True
support of the PNA-L is expected to require the introduction
of a new driver option for EMQuest.
unchecked.
Dual Channel Mode controls the way data is acquired and
recorded by the PNA.
Uncoupled Traces configures two separate channel
displays similar to traditional support in older Agilent (HP)
VNAs. However, in this case, the sweeps are uncoupled
between the two channels, increasing test time and causing
minor variations between the two sweeps.
Coupled Traces configures two traces representing the two
EMQuest measurement channels on one channel display of
the analyzer. This allows simultaneous sweeping of both
traces when properly configured and is the preferred setting.
Measurement Reference Port allows selecting the
appropriate reference signal to be used for all ratio
comparisons. The choices are R1 and R2.
14.6.7.2 Equipment Parameters, Agilent PNA Series

Agilent PNA series of vector network analyzers. These are
parameters have been spread across several tabbed

Rev. A, P#399783

this tab are:


range.
Man. Sweep Time allows entry of the desired sweep time in
milliseconds. The sweep time cannot be set shorter than the
time required based on the bandwidth and sweep mode
settings.

Rev. A, P#399783

power.
Time Gate settings allow the application of a time gate to

Rev. A, P#399783

gated area.
include:
calibration kits. The driver supports numbered cal kits
containing settings for male and female standards and thru
connection in the standard order.
Use Electronic Calibration Module allows selecting the
use of an optional electronic calibration module to automate
a full two port calibration.

Rev. A, P#399783

include:
thru connection.
calibration.
This calibration is only valid if the analyzer is in S11 or S22
mode.
measurements.
termination.
termination.

Rev. A, P#399783

and receive ports.
more information.
14.6.8 Rohde & Schwarz ZVC, ZVR, ZVM, ZVK Series
14.6.8.1 Configuration Settings, Rohde & Schwarz ZVC, ZVR,

ZVM, ZVK Series
This is the configuration control panel for the Rohde &
Schwarz ZVC/ZVCE, ZVR/ZVRE, ZVM, and ZVK series of
vector network analyzers (referred to here as ZVx). The

Rev. A, P#399783

Options B23/B24 indicates that the analyzer has the
external input ports b1 and b2 and associated input
attenuators installed.
Driver Options controls the way certain features of the ZVx
Preset Equipment: allows overriding the default preset
(reset) functionality. By default, the device is preset
whenever test parameters are different than those retrieved
from the equipment. This ensures a clean default
configuration of the equipment prior to setting up for the test.
Some options may increase the reset period significantly,
resulting in an inconvenient delay at the start of each test.
This allows the user to change the preset behavior to
reduce/eliminate this delay. Note, however, that eliminating
the preset could result in erroneous data should certain
analyzer settings be changed from their preset defaults. The
On Setup Change is the default behavior, which presets the
equipment on initialization and every time the parameter
settings differ from the equipment settings. This is the safest
mode since it starts from a known state prior to initializing
the instrument.
On Initial Setup Only will preset the equipment on the first
initialization only. On subsequent changes, and as long as
the driver remains in memory, the equipment will be
reconfigured without presetting to a default state. Note that
certain actions, such as displaying the equipment control
panel, cause all drivers to be removed from memory, so the
equipment will be initialized and preset again the next time it
is used.

Rev. A, P#399783
Never disables the equipment preset completely. The setup

is always configured from whatever state the instrument is
in. This mode should only be used if the user is confident
that the equipment will always be in a known, valid state
prior to its use by EMQuest.
Use External b1 For Port Definitions (Opt. B23) controls
the behavior of the external bypass switch in the Option B23
variable input attenuator for Port 1. When checked, the
driver will use the external b1 input for the port definitions
listed below. Otherwise, the bypass is always disabled.
Use External b2 For Port Definitions (Opt. B24) controls
the behavior of the external bypass switch in the Option B24
variable input attenuator for Port 2. When checked, the
driver will use the external b2 input for the port definitions
listed below. Otherwise, the bypass is always disabled.
Use Input Attenuator (Opt. B23/B24) enables the use of
the optional input attenuators when checked. The installed
options must indicate that these are installed.
Use Output Attenuator (Opt. B21/B22) enables the use of
the optional output attenuator(s) when checked. The options
must be available for the associated commands to work
correctly.
Absolute/Relative Port Definitions allows user definition of
standard ports. In order to standardize the interface
between the various test modules and equipment modules,
EMQuest supports a standardized set of custom
measurement configurations for network analyzers, beyond
the standard S-Parameter settings. These are based on
common two-port + reference port network analyzers, but
since the ZVx analyzers can support a more complicated set
of measurement ports, the user is allowed to configure each
of the standard types to be any port combination they desire.
These settings will be used to select the specified ratios, S-
parameters, or to customize the USER port definitions of the
ZVx analyzer as needed.
dual channel tests.

Rev. A, P#399783

dual channel tests.
each port definition. The available ports are b1 or b2 for
ratios and a1, a2, b1, or b2 for absolute magnitude ports.
drive power. The available ports are Port 1 or Port 2. For
the available ratios, the drive port can also be set to a
specific USER S-parameter definition. This allows an
internal calibration to be performed on that S-parameter, as
the ZVx does not support calibrating ratios directly. (For
simple response calibrations, its typically easier to use the
response correction in EMQuest.) In addition, a standard S-
parameter can be substituted for the given ratio. This is
beneficial for using S21 in place of one of the ratios for a
given test.
14.6.8.2 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz ZVC, ZVR,

ZVM, ZVK Series
Rohde & Schwarz ZVC/ZVCE, ZVR/ZVRE, ZVM, and ZVK
series of vector network analyzers (referred to here as ZVx).
These are equipment specific parameters that are not
directly related to the measurement process, but are
required to properly configure the equipment in order to
perform the test. These parameters have been spread
across several tabbed windows on the equipment pane, and
include:
this tab are:

Rev. A, P#399783


allowed settings are 1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 300, 1000, 3000,
10,000, and 30,000 (Max) Hz.

Rev. A, P#399783


Port 1 Input Attenuation allows setting of the optional input

attenuator for Port 1 of the analyzer if installed and enabled
in the control panel.
Port 2 Input Attenuation allows setting of the optional input
attenuator for Port 2 of the analyzer if installed and enabled
in the control panel.
Port 1 Output Attenuation allows setting of the optional
output attenuator for Port 1 of the analyzer if installed and
enabled in the control panel.
Port 2 Output Attenuation allows setting of the optional
output attenuator for Port 2 of the analyzer if installed and
enabled in the control panel.
Time Gate allows the application of a time gate to frequency
domain data if the analyzer has the time domain option
installed. These settings are only available if the Time
Domain Option is checked in the equipment configuration
panel. The time gate can be used to remove path
dependent effects from a frequency response measurement.
The user must make sure that the specified gating values
are valid for the requested frequency range. The Fast
Fourier Transform process used by the analyzer will also
introduce certain artifacts into the resulting measurements,
so users should consult their equipment documentation to
become familiar with the FFT process prior to using this
function. The available settings include:

Rev. A, P#399783

Sidelobe Suppress sets the level of additional sidelobe
suppression to be applied to the gate filter.
include:
PC 3.5 (3.5 mm), PC 7 (7 mm), 50 Ohm Type N, and 75
Ohm Type N / 2.92 mm (depending on ZVx version), and
SMA.

Rev. A, P#399783

include:
thru connection.
calibration.
measurements.
Rev. A, P#399783

termination.
termination.
and receive ports.
Calibration Options list other options related to calibration.
Allow Calibration Interpolation allows the measurement
range and number of points to vary from that used to
perform the calibration. This is normally undesirable but
certain firmware issues with the ZVx series may make it
necessary.
more information.

Rev. A, P#399783
14.6.9 Rohde & Schwarz ZVA, ZVB, ZVT Series
14.6.9.1 Configuration Settings, Rohde & Schwarz ZVA, ZVB,

ZVT Series
Schwarz ZVA, ZVB, and ZVT series of vector network
analyzers (referred to here as ZVB). Note: This driver offers
introductory support for the ZVB series of VNAs. It has had
limited testing on the ZVB only. This series of equipment is
new and subject to change. Support for all revisions of the
ZVB series cannot be guaranteed. The available settings
are as follows:
Driver Options controls the way certain features of the ZVB

Rev. A, P#399783

from the equipment. This ensures a clean default
Some options may increase the reset period significantly,
the instrument.
is used.
port network analyzers, but since the ZVB analyzers can
support 4 or more S-Parameter ports, the user is allowed to

Rev. A, P#399783

dual channel tests.
dual channel tests.
each port definition. The available ports are b1 or b2 for
ratios and a1, a2, b1, or b2 for absolute magnitude ports.

Rev. A, P#399783

drive power. The available ports are Port 1 or Port 2. For
the available ratios, the drive port can also be set to a
specific USER S-parameter definition. This allows an
internal calibration to be performed on that S-parameter, as
the ZVx does not support calibrating ratios directly. (For
simple response calibrations, its typically easier to use the
response correction in EMQuest.) In addition, a standard S-
parameter can be substituted for the given ratio. This is
beneficial for using S21 in place of one of the ratios for a
given test.
14.6.9.2 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz ZVA, ZVB,

ZVT Series
Rohde & Schwarz ZVA, ZVB, and ZVT series of vector
network analyzers (referred to here as ZVB). Note: This
driver offers introductory support for the ZVB series of VNAs.
It has had limited testing on the ZVB only. This series of
equipment is new and subject to change. Support for all
revisions of the ZVB series cannot be guaranteed.
These are equipment specific parameters that are not
directly related to the measurement process, but are
required to properly configure the equipment in order to
perform the test. These parameters have been spread
across several tabbed windows on the equipment pane, and
include:
this tab are:


Rev. A, P#399783


allowed settings are from 1 Hz to 500 kHz.
Power Level allows setting the source power level in dBm.
The range allowed by the analyzer will be dependent on the
analyzer type and installed options. It may not correspond to
the total range of values provided by this control. It is up to
the end user to verify the capabilities of their equipment to
insure that they dont specify a value that is outside its
operating range. Note that boosting the power level above
the recommended output level can affect flatness and may
result in non-linearity and/or harmonics in the measured
signal. The user should also take care to avoid overloading
the input(s) when increasing the output power.
Time Gate allows the application of a time gate to frequency
domain data if the analyzer has the time domain option
installed. These settings are only available if the Time

Rev. A, P#399783
Domain Option is checked in the equipment configuration

panel. The time gate can be used to remove path
dependent effects from a frequency response measurement.
The user must make sure that the specified gating values
are valid for the requested frequency range. The Fast
Fourier Transform process used by the analyzer will also
introduce certain artifacts into the resulting measurements,
so users should consult their equipment documentation to
become familiar with the FFT process prior to using this
function. The available settings include:
Sidelobe Suppress sets the level of additional sidelobe
suppression to be applied to the gate filter.
gated area.
Connector Types allows specifying the connector/port types
for each port pair.
Channel 1 allows selection of the desired calibration type
and standard to be used for each channel of the network

Rev. A, P#399783

include:
thru connection.
calibration.
measurements.

Rev. A, P#399783

more information.
14.7 Spectrum Analyzers
14.7.1 Equipment Parameters, Spectrum Analyzers

This pane provides the Equipment Parameters for most
spectrum analyzers. These are equipment specific
parameters that are not directly related to the measurement
process, but are required to properly configure the
equipment in order to perform the test. These parameters
are split across several tabbed pages:
The Analyzer Settings tab contains common parameter
settings of the spectrum analyzer. The available parameter
groups on this tab are:
Bandwidth Settings control the resolution and video
bandwidth settings of the spectrum analyzer. The available
settings include:
Resolution Bandwidth allows entry of the desired RBW
setting.
Video Bandwidth allows entry of the desired VBW setting.
Auto Coupled locks out the manual setting for the
corresponding bandwidth setting, when checked, and allows
the spectrum analyzer to set the bandwidth automatically
based on the frequency span.
Amplitude Control defines attenuation and reference level
settings of the spectrum analyzer. The attenuation and
reference level settings are typically linked so that both must
be adjusted to obtain the desired signal range. The

Rev. A, P#399783
Auto Attenuation uses the default attenuation setting of the

spectrum analyzer.
Attenuation sets the attenuation level of the spectrum
analyzer input. Increasing the attenuation will drop a
received signal closer to the instrument noise floor.
Reference Level sets the reference level of the spectrum
analyzers A/D converter. Changing this value changes the
location of a given signal level in the display window. For
most spectrum analyzers, the desired signal MUST stay in
the visible window to obtain a valid reading.
Sweep Time controls the variable sweep time capability of
the spectrum analyzer. The available settings include:
Auto Coupled locks out the manual setting for the sweep
time, when checked, and allows the spectrum analyzer to set
the sweep time based on the bandwidth setting. Manual
sweep time control is normally only used for zero-span
measurements.
The Sweep Time edit field allows setting of the desired
sweep time in milliseconds when the Auto Coupled
checkbox is cleared.
Triggering provides settings to control the sweep triggering
of the spectrum analyzer. The available settings include:
Trigger Mode selects the desired trigger mode. The
available trigger modes are:
Free Run is the default mode. The spectrum analyzer
triggers immediately upon a single sweep command, and in
continuous sweep mode, sweeps as fast as possible.
Video trigger mode is intended for zero-span measurements
and will trigger a sweep on the rising edge of an input signal
once it passes the video trigger level.
Line triggers the sweep off of the AC line.
External triggers the sweep off of an external trigger input
signal.

Rev. A, P#399783
Trigger Level sets the desired video trigger level. When set
to video trigger mode and told to sweep, the spectrum
analyzer will not start a sweep until the signal rises above
the trigger level. This allows synchronizing a zero-span time
based sweep with a pulsed RF signal.
Trigger Retry controls automatic retrying on trigger related
failures. If a video triggered sweep times out (fails to trigger
in the allotted or expected time frame), the driver will
automatically retry the sweep for the requested number of
attempts prior to displaying a dialog to request action from
the user. This will allow for occasional "missed" trigger
pulses without significantly affecting a test by requiring
constant user intervention.
Trigger Offset allows moving the trigger point forward or
backwards in time to move the location of the desired pulse
into the middle of the window. This can also be used for
complicated triggering schemes where the measured pulse
is not the one that caused the trigger to occur, but rather
comes before or after the pulse that caused the trigger.
Detector Selection allows selecting the desired detector
setting of the spectrum analyzer. Note that not all spectrum
analyzers support all detector settings, and the behavior of
analyzers that do not have a particular detector option
installed is undefined. Refer to the documentation for the
individual spectrum analyzer for more information on each
detector. The available detectors include:
Default Detector causes the driver to ignore the detector
setting and use whatever setting the analyzer has at
initialization or after preset.
Auto Peak Detector currently only supported on Rohde &
Schwarz spectrum analyzers; this detector displays both
positive and negative peaks simultaneously. The visible
behavior from software (i.e. the trace transferred back to the
software) is the same as the positive peak detector.
Negative Peak Detector displays the minimum level of the
IF envelope in the frequency band represented by each test
point.
Positive Peak Detector displays the maximum level of the
point.
Sample Detector displays a single sample of the IF
envelope in the frequency band represented by each test

Rev. A, P#399783
point. Ostensibly, this value could range between that

reported by the positive and negative peak detectors.
RMS Detector displays the RMS value of the IF envelope in
the frequency band represented by each test point. An RMS
detector typically operates by recording the average of many
samples represented as linear power. The sweep time, the
number of points per trace, and the sample rate of the
analyzer determine the number of samples taken per point.
Average Detector displays the average value of the linear
point. Unlike the RMS detector, an average detector
typically records the average voltage of a number of samples
at each point.
Quasi-Peak Detector is a peak detector for EMI
measurements with specific charge and discharge times
specified in the CISPR-16 emissions standard.
Calibration/Corrections provides control of various
calibration and correction features of the spectrum analyzer
driver. The available settings include:
Calibration Type selects the desired software based
calibration function. A Reference calibration will record a
reference trace during the calibration step and subtract that
reference from later measured traces. This results in a
relative result similar to that from a network analyzer.
Selecting No Calibration causes the spectrum analyzer to
return normal magnitude traces.
Frequency Offset provides a drift correction, in MHz, for
older spectrum analyzers. The input start and stop or center
frequencies will be adjusted by this offset amount prior to
configuring the spectrum analyzer. Note that this setting is
only used for configuration and, when queried, the analyzer
will return its actual frequency range, including offset, rather
than the range specified in the parameter file. Traces
captured from the analyzer are not corrected for the offset.

Rev. A, P#399783

to apply to the acquired data. Filters perform special
processing on a returned trace, typically returning a single
data point representing the result of the filtered trace. The
spectrum analyzer must be properly configured for the
desired signal. Most filters are designed for zero-span mode
with an appropriate sweep time based on the signal to be
filtered. For pulsed signals (GSM, TDMA), the sweep time
should be set just slightly (~10%) larger than the expected
pulse size to obtain the highest resolution average
measurement. For analyzers supporting a trigger offset, the
desired pulse can be moved into the center of the window.
Refer to the section on Mobile Phone Testing for typical
settings for different mobile phone technologies. A number
of the standard filters here are compatible with the
requirements of the CTIAs Mobile Station Over-the-Air
Performance Test Plan. Refer to Appendix D of the CTIA
Over-the-Air Test Plan for more information. The available
settings include:
Filter Select allows selection of one of the following filters:
Average performs a linear power average of the entire trace
to obtain the power measurement. Set the sweep time for
the spectrum analyzer to the desired dwell time to average
across. This selection is suitable for power measurement of
Analog/AMPS and CDMA signals as specified in V2.1 of the
CTIA OTA Test Plan.
TDMA Pulse averages the center 85% of a single TDMA
pulse. The spectrum analyzer should be set for video
triggered mode and the measured pulse width must be
within 10% of the expected 6.67 millisecond TDMA pulse
width. This selection is suitable for power measurement of
TDMA signals as specified in V2.1 of the CTIA OTA Test
Plan.
GSM Pulse averages the center 85% of a single GSM pulse.
The spectrum analyzer should be set for video triggered
mode and the measured pulse width must be within 10% of
the expected 0.577 millisecond GSM pulse width. This
selection is suitable for power measurement of GSM signals
as specified in V2.1 of the CTIA OTA Test Plan.
Peak takes the maximum value of the entire trace. Set the
sweep time for the spectrum analyzer to the desired dwell
time to perform the peak search across.

Rev. A, P#399783
Arbitrary Pulse Width averages the center 85% of a single

arbitrary communication pulse. The spectrum analyzer
should be set for video triggered mode and the measured
pulse width must be within 10% of the Filter Pulse Width in
milliseconds entered into the edit box below.
Sampling Average averages the entire trace to obtain the
power measurement. Set the sweep time for the spectrum
analyzer to the desired dwell time to average across. This
selection changes the way the Level Tolerance setting is
applied, compared to the Average filter. The tolerance is
applied to a running average of the data instead of each
individual point. This allows following the trend of a sample
detector curve rather than each individual sample, and
makes this filter suitable for the one of the methods for
measuring CDMA signals as specified in V2.1 of the CTIA
OTA Test Plan.
Integrated Channel Power performs an integration across a
specified channel bandwidth using the given resolution
bandwidth to determine the power/Hz relationship for each
data point. This filter is suitable for measurement of
continuous broadband signals such as CDMA and WCDMA.
The spectrum analyzer span will automatically be set to the
specified channel bandwidth around the current center
frequency. For manual/single channel tests using only the
analyzer (i.e. without a hybrid), the analyzer should be
configured for zero span initially.
Filter Retry specifies the number of times to automatically
retry the sweep and filter process when one of the filter
criteria fails.
Ceiling Level specifies the maximum allowed signal level for
a filtered trace. Trace values above this level result in a
sweep retry.
Floor Level specifies the minimum allowed signal level for a
filtered trace. Resultant values below this level result in a
sweep retry. This replaces the use of the trigger level for
this purpose.
Use Floor Level for Pulse Detect uses the floor level to
determine the start and end of a pulse, rather than the
trigger level. This allows for more complicated trigger
schemes, where the analyzer is set to trigger on a pulse that
is larger than the one to be measured. This option is only
available on the arbitrary pulse width filter.

Rev. A, P#399783
Filter Pulse Width specifies the required width, in

milliseconds, of an arbitrary pulsed signal. The measured
pulse must be within 10% of this value. This control is only
visible for pulse filters.
Allow Longer Pulse removes the restriction on pulse width
from a +/- tolerance to only a - tolerance, allowing the pulse
to be longer than the specified width. It is intended primarily
for multislot measurements where there may be more than
one pulse to measure and where those pulses run together.
GSM Timeslots specifies the number of GSM timeslots to
use for multislot GSM pulse measurements. The expected
pulse width is multiplied by the number of timeslots
indicated. This option is only visible for the GSM filter.
Moduln Envelope Check allows enabling a flatness check
for the evaluated portion of the pulse. This check can be
used to determine the type of pulse generated by requiring
the amplitude modulation to be less than or greater than the
specified envelope. This is especially necessary for EGPRS
(EDGE) testing, where the mobile generates both 8PSK
(EDGE) pulses and regular GMSK pulses. The 8PSK pulses
have a much larger amplitude modulation that GMSK.
Modulation Envelope specifies the size of the envelope for
a modulated pulse. When the modulation envelope check is
enabled, pulses will be rejected if the max to min ratio is
larger/smaller than this value.
Use Max Marker for Default Data Point allows disabling
the default behavior of the pulse filters when a bad pulse is
ignored by the user. Un-checking this box causes the
default value to be returned as the trigger level or the floor
level, depending on the setting of the Use Floor Level for
Pulse Detect checkbox.
Ignore All Under-Range Errors is a simple optimization for
the arbitrary pulse width filter when it is expected that pulses
may regularly approach the noise floor. After the specified
number of retries, the default value is returned.
Flatness Tolerance is visible for the average, sampling
average, peak, and integrated channel power filters and is
used to determine the quality of the waveform being filtered.
Set the level tolerance in dB to ensure that the trace meets a
minimum stability and flatness requirement. Variations
outside the specified tolerance from either the median or the
average (depending on the Tolerance Window setting
below) will result in a sweep retry.

Rev. A, P#399783
Tolerance Window Centered Around specifies whether to

compare the Flatness Tolerance to the Midpoint or Mean
(Average) of the data.
Center Flatness is used for the integrated channel power
filter to allow specification of the flat region of the band being
integrated. This allows for the band edge falloff at either
side of the window. The flatness tolerance described above
is only applied to this center portion of the trace.
Chan. Bandwidth specifies the expected bandwidth of the
channel being integrated.
Filter Average provides an average function to be applied
after a trace filter has been applied. The analyzer will be
swept as many times as necessary to obtain the specified
number of valid filtered results. The available settings
include:
Filter Trace Avg Count controls the number of sweeps that
are filtered and averaged to generate one result. When a
value greater than one is entered, the driver will measure
and filter the specified number of sweeps and return the
resulting average.
Averaging provides access to trace averaging functionality
of the spectrum analyzer. Note that not all spectrum
analyzers support trace averaging. For those that dont,
there is a limited software averaging implementation for
trace-based measurements. The available settings include:
averaged to generate one trace. When set greater than one,
the analyzer or driver will measure the specified number of
sweeps and display the resulting average. The actual
number of traces allowed for averaging will depend on the
particular spectrum analyzer and/or the implementation of its
driver.

Rev. A, P#399783
14.7.2 Configuration Settings, Agilent 85XX Spectrum

Analyzers
This is the configuration control panel for the Agilent 85XX
series of spectrum analyzers. The available settings are as
follows:
GPIB Configuration is used to identify and communicate with
a particular instance of the selected piece of equipment.
Options allow changing the behavior of the device driver to
account for various differences in revision level, installed
options, and user preferences.
Use Latest Command Set uses newer commands in place
of backwards-compatible commands where applicable. This
feature is provided to avoid possible firmware compatibility
problems should the equipment no longer support an original
command. Only set this flag if the driver does not appear to
work correctly as-is.
from the equipment. This insures a clean default
Some options increase the reset period significantly,

Rev. A, P#399783

the instrument.
is used.
Delay after Equipment Preset: allows forcing the driver to
delay for a specified period after a preset prior to sending
any additional commands to the equipment. There is a
known bug in the CDMA option for the Agilent spectrum
analyzers that causes the analyzer to miss GPIB commands
sent to it until the reset is complete. This can take as much
as thirty seconds or more. The user will have to test their
equipment to determine the appropriate delay period after a
preset.
14.7.3 Configuration Settings, Rohde & Schwarz FSP

Schwarz FSP series of spectrum analyzers. The available
settings are as follows:
GPIB Configuration is used to identify and communicate with
a particular instance of the selected piece of equipment.

Rev. A, P#399783

Options allow changing the behavior of the device driver to
account for various differences in revision level, installed
options, and user preferences.
View Display Window in Remote Mode, when checked,
will cause the FSP to show the display graticule when in
remote mode. This is the default behavior of the FSP driver,
although the FSP analyzer defaults to no display. Turning
off the display will slightly increase the FSPs speed of
operation since the display does not need to be updated
during a test.
14.7.4 Configuration Settings, Generic Spectrum

Analyzer
This is the configuration control panel for a generic spectrum
analyzer. This control panel allows the user to implement
basic functionality of any GPIB based spectrum analyzer,
provided the appropriate GPIB commands are available in
the equipments command set. The user must enter the
GPIB commands for each field in order to define the
necessary functionality. This driver is considered bonus
technology and is not guaranteed to work in all cases. The

Rev. A, P#399783

Timeout specifies the expected sweep time of a trace. This
value is padded with an additional ten seconds when
determining a sweep timeout error. This value is also used
in zero span mode to specify the time scale of the acquired
data.
Equipment Command Strings contains a range of fields for
entering the GPIB commands necessary to control the
analyzer. In general, all fields must be filled for full
functionality. Any field containing a question mark (?) is
automatically assumed to be a query and will be treated as
such.
Equipment Initialization is the initial command sequence
used to configure the device. At a minimum, it should
configure the analyzer for ASCII output of data. An
additional initialization string is provided in the equipment
parameters page to set test specific parameters such as
bandwidth, reference level, etc.
Sweep initiates a sweep of the receiver(s) and waits for
completion. This command should use an operation
complete query (*OPC?) or similar command that will only
execute upon completion of the sweep to synchronize the
driver with the sweep. Otherwise, the results may be
queried before completion of the sweep, resulting in
unpredictable behavior.
Start Frequency sets the start frequency of a trace. This is
Stop Frequency sets the end frequency of a trace. This is

Rev. A, P#399783
Frequency Unit specifies the command suffix for setting the

start and stop frequency. It is appended to the command
string after the frequency in MHz.
Write Operation Complete Query allows specifying an
optional operation complete query to be added after all GPIB
writes, in cases where a suitable query function containing a
question mark does not exist for synchronizing a sweep, etc.
Points Per Trace specifies the expected number of points
per trace. If needed, an appropriate command should be
sent in the equipment initialization to ensure that the sweeps
return this number of data points.
Return Trace is the command to read a trace. It is always
treated as a query.
Trace Delimiter is a hexadecimal value representing one or
two ASCII characters that are used as delimiters between
each field in the text string returned by the Return Trace
query. The delimiters should be represented in hex as either
0xNN or 0xNNMM, where NN and MM are the hexadecimal
ASCII values of the desired characters. Thus, a comma
would be 0x2C, and a carriage return/linefeed pair would be
0x0D0A. Use the Character Map utility in
Accessories/System Tools program group under the
Windows Start menu to determine other hex representations
of required characters.
Readings Skipped controls the number of trace elements to
ignore between each returned value. This is provided to
support instruments that return data in complex pairs.
Return Marker specifies the command to set and output the
marker for all marker calls. No distinction is made between
marker or max marker readings.

Rev. A, P#399783
14.8 Switches
14.8.1 Agilent 11713A Switch Driver
14.8.1.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, Agilent 11713A Switch

Driver
This panel provides control over the settings of the Agilent
11713A Attenuator/Switch Driver outputs for each ancillary
state available in the Ancillary Equipment Pane. The
available settings are:
Switch Settings controls the state of the two primary switch
drivers.
Switch 9 and Switch 0 controls the state of the associated
primary switch drivers for the associated switch state. The
available settings for each switch are:
OFF turns the corresponding switch driver output to off when
the switch changes to this state.
ON turns the corresponding switch driver output to on when
UNUSED leaves the corresponding switch driver output in its
current state when the switch changes to this state. Since
more than one switch instance can share the same set of
switch outputs, this feature allows other instances to use the
unused ports without interference. Care should be taken to
avoid having two switch instances switching the same port
during the same test, since there is no guarantee as to which
instance will take precedence.
Switch X Settings controls the state of the switch drivers of
the Attenuator X control block.
Switch 1 through Switch 4 control the state of the
associated switch drivers outputs of the Attenuator X control
block for the associated switch state. The available settings
for each switch are:

Rev. A, P#399783

Switch Y Settings controls the state of the switch drivers of
the Attenuator Y control block.
associated switch drivers outputs of the Attenuator Y control
Pause After Switching will hold the test sequence for the
specified period in milliseconds after switching to the
associated state. This allows for switch transition time and
bounce settling.
14.8.1.2 Configuration Parameters, Agilent 11713A Switch Driver

EMQuest provides control over the state of a variety of RF
relays or other switches connected to an Agilent 11713A
Attenuator/Switch Driver. The RF switches can be used to
route signals to and from different test equipment. This
configuration control panel allows selection of the desired
device and its options, as well as the number of states of the
switch. The available settings are:
Rev. A, P#399783

equipment. Refer to the documentation for the equipment
to determine the appropriate setting.
Switch Array controls the actual behavior of the switch,
determining the number of available states.
Number of Switch Array States specifies the desired
number of states for this switch. Each state will indicate a
different possible configuration of all relays. The switch
should be configured for the number of states (equivalent to
poles of a switch) expected in use. For instance, a dual
receiver/switch hybrid will require two states, one for each
channel. Other applications may require more states.
Options control configuration of each of the two attenuator
drivers as switch drivers. Through these options, the driver
can be configured to control a variety of single/double throw
or multi-position switches. The available selections are:
Use Attenuator X control as a switch enables the use of
the Attenuator X driver block as switch drivers in this
instance.
Use Attenuator Y control as a switch enables the use of
the Attenuator Y driver block as switch drivers in this
instance.
X switch positions are exclusive causes the driver to only
allow one of the four Attenuator X switch driver lines to be
active at a time. This is useful for safely controlling multi-
pole switches that have individual relay coils for each pole of
the switch.
Y switch positions are exclusive causes the driver to only
allow one of the four Attenuator Y switch driver lines to be
active at a time. This is useful for safely controlling multi-
pole switches that have individual relay coils for each pole of
the switch.

Rev. A, P#399783
Use Attenuators X and Y as a single 8-position switch

enables the combined use of both the Attenuator X and
Attenuator Y driver blocks as exclusive switch drivers in this
instance. In this mode, only one of the eight Attenuator X
and Attenuator Y switch driver lines to be active at a time.
This is useful for safely controlling larger (more than 4
position) multi-pole switches that have individual relay coils
for each pole of the switch.
Default Switch Settings allow the definition of the initial
settings of the two primary switch drivers in an initialization
preset. Since the 11713A doesnt support querying of the
switch state, this section allows configuring an initial state to
be used when initializing the unit. The available settings are:
Switch 9 and Switch 0 allow definition of the initial state of
each of the two primary switch drivers. The choices are:
OFF sets the corresponding switch driver output to off when
preset.
ON sets the corresponding switch driver output to on when
preset.
UNUSED indicates that the corresponding switch driver is
not used and will not be changed by the software when
preset. Queries of the state of an UNUSED switch (from the
exercise dialog, for example) are undefined until the switch
changes state. Note that setting this value to UNUSED does
not preclude using the associated driver output in a test or
exercise dialog.
Default Switch X Settings allow the definition of the initial
settings of the switch drivers of the Attenuator X control
block in an initialization preset. Since the 11713A doesnt
support querying of the switch state, this section allows
configuring an initial state to be used when initializing the
unit. This block will only be visible when the "Use Attenuator
X as a switch" checkbox is checked. The available settings
are:
Switch 1 through Switch 4 allow definition of the initial state
of each of the four switch driver outputs for the Attenuator X
control block. The choices are:
preset.
preset.

Rev. A, P#399783

exercise dialog.
Default Switch Y Settings allow the definition of the initial
settings of the switch drivers of the Attenuator Y control
block in an initialization preset. Since the 11713A doesnt
support querying of the switch state, this section allows
configuring an initial state to be used when initializing the
unit. This block will only be visible when the "Use Attenuator
Y as a switch" checkbox is checked. The available settings
are:
Switch 5 through Switch 8 allow definition of the initial state
of each of the four switch driver outputs for the Attenuator Y
control block. The choices are:
preset.
preset.
exercise dialog.
14.8.1.3 Equipment Parameters, Agilent 11713A Switch Driver

11713A Attenuator/Switch Driver outputs for each state of a
switch. The available settings are:
Switch Settings controls the state of the two primary switch
drivers.
Switch 9 and Switch 0 controls the state of the associated
primary switch drivers for the associated switch state. The
available settings for each switch are:

Rev. A, P#399783

Switch X Settings controls the state of the switch drivers of
the Attenuator X control block.
associated switch drivers outputs of the Attenuator X control
Switch Y Settings controls the state of the switch drivers of
the Attenuator Y control block.
associated switch drivers outputs of the Attenuator Y control

Rev. A, P#399783

bounce settling.
14.8.1.4 Exercise Dialog, Agilent 11713A Switch Driver

This dialog provides manual control over the state of the
switch driver outputs on an Agilent 11713A
Attenuator/Switch Driver. When used to control RF
switches, the switches can be used to route signals to and
from different test equipment. Note that the 11713A does
not provide switch setting feedback to allow querying the
state of the relays. Thus, the initial states shown by this
dialog represent the last state set by the driver, rather than
the guaranteed current state of the switch.
14.8.2 Agilent 3499 Switch Controller
14.8.2.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, Agilent 3499 Switch

Controller
3499 Switch Control Mainframe for each ancillary state
available in the Ancillary Equipment Pane. The available
settings will depend on which plug-in modules were selected
in the configuration control panel. The available settings
include:

Rev. A, P#399783
Slot x - 44476A Triple SPDT Switch Module Settings

control the state of each relay in a 44476A plug-in installed
in the indicated slot x, for the associated switch state.
There will be one of these groups for each 44476A plug-in
configured in the equipment control panel. The available
settings include:
Switch 00 Switch 02 control the state of each relay for the
associated switch state. The available settings for each
relay are:
Norm. Closed switches the relay to the normally closed
(NC) position when the switch changes to this state.
Norm. Open switches the relay to the normally open (NO)
position when the switch changes to this state.
Unused leaves this relay in its current state when the switch
changes to this state. Since more than one switch instance
can share the same set of relays, this feature allows other
instances to use the unused relays without interference.
Care should be taken to avoid having two switch instances
switching the same relay during the same test, since there is
no guarantee as to which instance will take precedence.
bounce settling.
14.8.2.2 Configuration Parameters, Agilent 3499 Switch

Controller
relays in an Agilent 3499 Switch Control Mainframe. The RF
switches can be used to route signals to and from different
test equipment. This configuration control panel allows
selection of the desired device and its options, as well as the
number of states of the switch. The available settings are:

Rev. A, P#399783

Switch Array States specifies the desired number of states
for this switch. Each state will indicate a different possible
configuration of all relays. The switch should be configured
for the number of states (equivalent to poles of a switch)
expected in use. For instance, a dual receiver/switch hybrid
will require two states, one for each channel. Other
applications may require more states.
Plug-In Module Selection allows selecting the plug-in relay
units that are installed in the 3499 mainframe. The available
selections are:
Slot 1 Slot 9 allow specifying the plug-in for each slot of a
mainframe. Note that different mainframes will have
different numbers of slots and some plug-ins may physically
occupy more than one slot. Unused or unavailable slots
should be left marked as Unused/Unsupported. The
currently supported plug-ins include:
44476A Triple SPDT RF Switch Module is a single slot
module containing three single-pole, double-throw RF
switches.
Refer to the Agilent documentation for more information on
the capabilities of each plug-in.

Rev. A, P#399783
14.8.2.3 Equipment Parameters, Agilent 3499 Switch Controller

3499 Switch Control Mainframe for each state of a switch.
The available settings will depend on which plug-in modules
were selected in the configuration control panel. The
in the indicated slot x, for the associated switch state.
There will be one of these groups for each 44476A plug-in
configured in the equipment control panel. The available
settings include:
relay are:
bounce settling.

Rev. A, P#399783
14.8.2.4 Exercise Dialog, Agilent 3499 Switch Controller

This dialog provides manual control over the state of the RF
relays in an Agilent 3499 Switch Control Mainframe. The RF
test equipment.
in the indicated slot x. There will be one of these groups for
each 44476A plug-in configured in the equipment control
panel. The available settings include:
relay are:
NC switches the relay to the normally closed (NC) position.
NO switches the relay to the normally open (NO) position.
Right clicking on the dialog will bring up the pre-configured
from the menu will set all relays to the corresponding state.
Pre-configurations can be defined in the device configuration
control panel.
14.8.3 ETS-Lindgren Model 2090 Auxiliary Ports
14.8.3.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, ETS-Lindgren Model

2090 Auxiliary Ports
This panel provides control over the settings of the Model
2090 auxiliary ports for each ancillary state available in the
Ancillary Equipment Pane. The available settings are:
Auxiliary Port Settings controls the state of each aux port
for the associated switch state.
Aux Port 1-4 controls the state of the associated aux port for
the associated switch state. The available settings for each
port are:
OFF turns the aux port off when the switch changes to this
state.

Rev. A, P#399783
ON turns the aux port on when the switch changes to this

state.
UNUSED leaves the aux port in its current state when the
switch changes to this state. Since more than one switch
instance can share the same set of aux ports, this feature
allows other instances to use the unused ports without
interference. Care should be taken to avoid having two
switch instances switching the same port during the same
test, since there is no guarantee as to which instance will
take precedence.
Options lists other options available for this state.
bounce settling.
14.8.3.2 Configuration Settings, ETS-Lindgren Model 2090

Auxiliary Ports
EMQuest provides control over the state of the four fiber-
optic auxiliary control ports on a Model 2090 Multi-Device
Controller, or the four SPDT RF switches on a Model 2090-
OPT1 Multi-Device Controller. The fiber-optic auxiliary ports
can be used to control a variety of simple on/off remote
devices, while the RF switches can be used to route signals
to and from different test equipment. This configuration
control panel allows selection of the desired Model 2090 and
the number of states of the switch. The available settings
are:
equipment. The factory default addresses for the 2090 are

Rev. A, P#399783
address 8 for device one, and 9 for device two. Note that
the auxiliary ports can be controlled from either device one
or device two of the 2090, so the default address is usually
sufficient. Refer to the documentation for the Model 2090 for
more information on determining the GPIB address if
necessary.
configuration of all four auxiliary ports. The switch should be
configured for the number of states (equivalent to poles of a
switch) expected in use. For instance, a dual receiver/switch
hybrid will require two states, one for each channel. Other
14.8.3.3 Equipment Parameters, ETS-Lindgren Model 2090

Auxiliary Ports
This panel provides control over the settings of the Model
2090 auxiliary ports for each state of a switch. The available
settings are:
Auxiliary Port Settings controls the state of each aux port
for the associated switch state.
Aux Port 1-4 controls the state of the associated aux port for
port are:
OFF turns the aux port off when the switch changes to this
state.
ON turns the aux port on when the switch changes to this
state.
UNUSED leaves the aux port in its current state when the
instance can share the same set of aux ports, this feature
allows other instances to use the unused ports without
interference. Care should be taken to avoid having two
switch instances switching the same port during the same
test, since there is no guarantee as to which instance will
take precedence.

Rev. A, P#399783

bounce settling.
14.8.3.4 Exercise Dialog, ETS-Lindgren Model 2090 Auxiliary

Ports
This dialog provides manual control over the state of the four
fiber-optic auxiliary control ports on a Model 2090 Multi-
Device Controller, or the four SPDT RF switches on a Model
2090-OPT1 Multi-Device Controller. The fiber-optic auxiliary
ports can be used to control a variety of simple on/off remote
devices, while the RF switches can be used to route signals
to and from different test equipment. Note that the auxiliary
ports can be controlled from either device one or device two
of the 2090. Also, more than one switch instance may use
the same controller, providing access to all four auxiliary
ports in the exercise dialog. The dialog checks the state of
the ports on a regular basis, so changes made in the
exercise dialog for one switch will be reflected in the display
of the exercise dialog for the second device after a second
or so. However, if the state has not been updated to match,
toggling the state in the second dialog will always set the
auxiliary port to the newly indicated state.
Auxiliary Port 1-4 controls the state of the associated aux
port. Checking the box turns the aux port on and clearing it
turns it off.
control panel.
14.8.4 LPT Parallel Port

Rev. A, P#399783
14.8.4.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, LPT Parallel Port

Switch
This panel provides control over the settings of the LPT
Parallel Port data bits for each ancillary state available in the
Data Bit (Pin) Settings controls the state of each data bit for
the associated switch state.
Data Bit 0-7 (Pin 2-9) controls the state of the associated
data bit (connector pin) for the associated switch state. The
available settings for each port are:
OFF turns the bit off (pin low) when the switch changes to
this state.
ON turns the bit on (pin high) when the switch changes to
this state.
UNUSED leaves the bit (pin) in its current state when the
instance can share the same parallel port, this feature allows
other instances to use the unused bits without interference.
switching the same bit during the same test, since there is
bounce settling.
14.8.4.2 Configuration Settings, LPT Parallel Port Switch

EMQuest provides control of the eight data I/O bits of a
standard PC parallel line printer (LPT) port as a low cost
switch controller. The 5V digital signals of the parallel port
can be used to drive additional control circuitry to switch
relays, change IUT settings, or perform other tasks. This
configuration control panel allows selection of the desired
port and number of states of the switch. The available
settings are:
Parallel Port Selection is used to identify the desired LPT
port for this switch.
Parallel Port selects the parallel port. The available choices
are LPT1 and LPT2.

Rev. A, P#399783

configuration of all eight bits of the port. The switch should
be configured for the number of states (equivalent to poles of
a switch) expected in use. For instance, a dual
receiver/switch hybrid will require two states, one for each
channel. Other applications may require more states.
14.8.4.3 Equipment Parameters, LPT Parallel Port Switch

This panel provides control over the settings of the LPT
Parallel Port data bits for each state of a switch. The
Data Bit (Pin) Settings controls the state of each data bit for
the associated switch state.
data bit (connector pin) for the associated switch state. The
available settings for each port are:
OFF turns the bit off (pin low) when the switch changes to
this state.
ON turns the bit on (pin high) when the switch changes to
this state.
UNUSED leaves the bit (pin) in its current state when the
instance can share the same parallel port, this feature allows
other instances to use the unused bits without interference.
switching the same bit during the same test, since there is
bounce settling.

Rev. A, P#399783
14.8.4.4 Exercise Dialog, LPT Parallel Port Switch

This dialog provides manual control over the state of the LPT
Parallel Port data bits for the associated switch instance.
The 5V digital signals of the parallel port can be used to
drive additional control circuitry to switch relays, change IUT
settings, or perform other tasks. Note that more than one
switch instance may use the same parallel port, providing
access to all eight bits in the exercise dialog. Changes
made in the exercise dialog for one switch will not be
reflected in the display of the exercise dialog for the second
device until the Refresh button is pressed. However,
toggling the state in the second dialog will always set the
auxiliary port to the newly indicated state.
data bit (connector pin). Checking the box turns the bit on
(pin high) and clearing it turns it off (low).
Pressing the Refresh button will query the parallel port to
obtain the current bit settings.
control panel.
14.8.5 PMJ TVi9901
14.8.5.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay

This panel provides control over the settings of the PMJ
TVi9901 RF Relay for each ancillary state available in the
RF Relay One Settings controls the state of each position
(bit) of relay one for the associated switch state.
Position 1-6 controls the state of the associated position for
position are:
OPEN turns the drive for this position off when the switch
changes to this state.
CLOSE turns the drive for this position on when the switch
changes to this state. If the switch has been configured as

Rev. A, P#399783
an exclusive position relay (i.e. a SP6T switch) then only one

of the available positions can be closed at any time. For a
matrix switch, the relay should be configured non-exclusive
to allow more than one position closed at the same time.
UNUSED leaves the drive for this position in its current state
when the switch changes to this state. Since more than one
switch instance can share the same set of relays, this
feature allows other instances to use the unused relays
without interference. Care should be taken to avoid having
two switch instances switching the same relay during the
same test, since there is no guarantee as to which instance
will take precedence.
RF Relay Two Settings controls the state of each position
(bit) of relay two for the associated switch state.
position are:
bounce settling.

Rev. A, P#399783
14.8.5.2 Configuration Parameters, PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay

EMQuest provides control over the state of the two RF
relays on a PMJ TVI9901 GPIB RF Relay Unit. The RF
test equipment. This configuration control panel allows
selection of the desired device and its options, as well as the
number of states of the switch. The available settings are:
configuration of both relays. The switch should be
configured for the number of states (equivalent to poles of a
switch) expected in use. For instance, a dual receiver/switch
hybrid will require two states, one for each channel. Other
Options allows control over additional features of the switch
driver.
Preset Switch controls behavior on initialization of the
switch driver. The TVI9901 does not allow querying of the
actual state of the switch settings, so a reset command can
be used to return the switch to a known state before
configuration. Otherwise, switch positions with Unused bit
settings may result in invalid states.
On Initial Setup presets the switch the first time the switch
driver is used in an EMQuest session.

Rev. A, P#399783
Never never presets the switch, leaving it in whatever state it

was originally upon initialization.
Relay positions are exclusive for: allows control of the
behavior of the relay drive bits to support different switch
types. Most relays (SP4T and SP6T) should be set to
exclusive mode, but matrix relays, which allow connecting
any port to any other port, must be able to close two
positions simultaneously to make the connection.
None causes both relays to allow any bit to be set (matrix
mode).
Relay One Only places relay one in exclusive (single pole)
mode and relay two in matrix mode.
Relay Two Only places relay two in exclusive (single pole)
mode and relay one in matrix mode.
Both Relay One and Relay Two places both relays in
exclusive (single pole) mode.
14.8.5.3 Equipment Parameters, PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay

This panel provides control over the settings of the PMJ
TVi9901 RF Relay for each state of a switch. The available
settings are:
RF Relay One Settings controls the state of each position
(bit) of relay one for the associated switch state.
position are:

Rev. A, P#399783

RF Relay Two Settings controls the state of each position
(bit) of relay two for the associated switch state.
position are:
bounce settling.

Rev. A, P#399783
14.8.5.4 Exercise Dialog, PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay

This dialog provides manual control over the state of the two
RF relays on a PMJ TVi9901 GPIB RF Relay Unit. The RF
test equipment. Note that the TVi9901 does not provide
switch setting feedback to allow querying the state of the
relays. Thus, the initial states shown by this dialog represent
the last state set by the driver, rather than the guaranteed
current state of the switch.
RF Relay One controls the state of each position (bit) of

relay one.
Position 1-6 controls the state of the associated switch
position. Checking the box will close the contact for that
position. If the relay is configured as an exclusive relay, the
contacts for the remaining positions will be opened.
RF Relay Two controls the state of each position (bit) of
relay two.
Position 1-6 controls the state of the associated switch
position. Checking the box will close the contact for that
position. If the relay is configured as an exclusive relay, the
contacts for the remaining positions will be opened.
Reset sends a reset command to the TVi9901, opening all
switch positions.
Close closes the dialog.
control panel.

Rev. A, P#399783
14.8.6 Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP
14.8.6.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz TS-

RSP RF System Platform
Schwarz TS-RSP RF System Platform for each ancillary
state available in the Ancillary Equipment Pane. The
available settings will depend on which plug-in modules were
selected in the configuration control panel. The available
settings include:
RSP-EMI Plug-in tab controls the state of each relay in an
RSP-EMI plug-in for the associated switch state. This tab
will only be visible if the RSP-EMI plug-in was enabled in the
equipment control panel. The RSP-EMI Relay Settings
include:
K20-K25 control the state of each relay for the associated
switch state. The available settings for each relay are:
RSP-EMS Plug-in tab control the state of each relay in an
RSP-EMS plug-in for the associated switch state. This tab
will only be visible if the RSP-EMS plug-in was enabled in
the equipment control panel. The RSP-EMS Relay Settings
include:
K1-K7 and K10-K13 control the state of each relay for the
relay are:

Rev. A, P#399783
RSP-BRF Plug-in tab control the state of each relay in an
RSP-BRF plug-in for the associated switch state. This tab
will only be visible if the RSP-BRF plug-in was enabled in the
equipment control panel. The RSP-BRF Relay Settings
include:
Position 1-6 switches the relay to the selected position
when the switch changes to this state.
bounce settling.
14.8.6.2 Configuration Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP RF

System Platform
relays on a Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP RF System Platform.
The RF switches can be used to route signals to and from
different test equipment. This configuration control panel
allows selection of the desired device and its options, as well
as the number of states of the switch. The available settings
are:
Rev. A, P#399783

TS-USM Address sets the address for the TS-USM
Universal Switch Matrix, which is a plug-in relay driver and
I/O board. It controls the functionality of all relay plug-ins.
Refer to the documentation on the TS-RSP for more
information.
GPIB Delay allows insertion of a communication delay
between calls to the TS-RSP. The TS-RSP does not
respond to multiple GPIB commands in rapid succession,
and does not provide a mechanism for querying switch state
or operation complete. Thus, to ensure proper operation, a
delay is required between subsequent commands to the
switch. The default setting of 30 mS appears to be sufficient
for the units tested. The user should take care to do
additional diagnostics before reducing this value.
configuration of all relays. The switch should be configured
for the number of states (equivalent to poles of a switch)
expected in use. For instance, a dual receiver/switch hybrid
will require two states, one for each channel. Other
Options allows control over additional features of the switch
driver.

Rev. A, P#399783
Preset Switch controls behavior on initialization of the

switch driver. The TS-RSP does not allow querying of the
actual state of the switch settings, so the driver supports an
option to return the switch to a known state before
configuration. Otherwise, switch positions with Unused bit
settings may result in invalid states.
On Initial Setup presets the switch the first time the switch
driver is used in an EMQuest session.
Always presets the switch every time the driver is initialized
(i.e. at the start of every test).
Installed Relay Plug-in Options allows selecting the plug-in
relay units that are installed in the TS-RSP. The available
selections are:
RSP-EMI Plug-in, which, when checked, enables the tab for
the RSP-EMI relay plug-in. The standard RSP-EMI contains
four DC-18 GHz SPDT RF relays and two DC-40 GHz SPDT
RF relays.
RSP-EMS Plug-in, which, when checked, enables the tab
for the RSP-EMS relay plug-in. The standard RSP-EMS
contains seven DC-12 GHz (or optional DC-18 GHz) SPDT
RF relays and four optional DC-12.4 GHz SPDT RF power
relays. This plug-in cannot be enabled if the RSP-BRF is
enabled.
RSP-BRF Plug-In, which, when checked, enables the tab
for the RSP-BRF relay plug-in. The standard RSP-BRF
contains four DC-18 GHz SP6T RF relays. This plug-in
cannot be enabled if the RSP-EMS is enabled.
The Initial Relay Settings tabs allow the definition of the
initial settings of the relays in an initialization preset. Since
the TS-RSP doesnt support querying of the relay state, this
section allows configuring an initial state to be used when
initializing the unit. The available tabs are:
RSP-EMI Plug-in tab contains the Initial RSP-EMI Relay
Settings. They are:
K20-K25 control the initial state of each relay at preset. The
available settings for each relay are:
NC switches the relay to the normally closed (NC) position
when preset.
NO switches the relay to the normally open (NO) position
when preset.

Rev. A, P#399783
RSP-EMS Plug-in tab contains the Initial RSP-EMS Relay

Settings. They are:
K1-K7 and K10-K13 control the initial state of each relay at
preset. The available settings for each relay are:
NC switches the relay to the normally closed (NC) position
when preset.
NO switches the relay to the normally open (NO) position
when preset.
RSP-BRF Plug-in tab contains the Initial RSP-BRF Relay
Settings. They are:
K30-K33 control the state of each relay at preset. The
when preset.
14.8.6.3 Equipment Parameters, Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP RF

System Platform
Schwarz TS-RSP RF System Platform for each state of a
switch. The available settings will depend on which plug-in
modules were selected in the configuration control panel.
RSP-EMI Plug-in tab controls the state of each relay in an
RSP-EMI plug-in for the associated switch state. This tab
will only be visible if the RSP-EMI plug-in was enabled in the
equipment control panel. The RSP-EMI Relay Settings
include:

Rev. A, P#399783
RSP-EMS Plug-in tab control the state of each relay in an

RSP-EMS plug-in for the associated switch state. This tab
will only be visible if the RSP-EMS plug-in was enabled in
the equipment control panel. The RSP-EMS Relay Settings
include:
K1-K7 and K10-K13 control the state of each relay for the
relay are:
RSP-BRF Plug-in tab control the state of each relay in an
RSP-BRF plug-in for the associated switch state. This tab
will only be visible if the RSP-BRF plug-in was enabled in the
equipment control panel. The RSP-BRF Relay Settings
include:
when the switch changes to this state.
bounce settling.
Rev. A, P#399783

14.8.6.4 Exercise Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP RF System

Platform
This dialog provides manual control over the state of the RF
relays on a Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP RF System. The RF
test equipment. Note that the TS-RSP does not provide
switch setting feedback to allow querying the state of the
relays. Thus, the initial states shown by this dialog represent
the last state set by the driver, rather than the guaranteed
current state of the switch.
RSP-EMI Relay Settings group controls the state of each
relay in an RSP-EMI plug-in. This group will only be visible if
the RSP-EMI plug-in was enabled in the equipment control
panel. The settings include:
K20-K25 control the state of each relay. The available
settings for each relay are:
RSP-EMS Relay Settings group controls the state of each
relay in an RSP-EMS plug-in. This group will only be visible
if the RSP-EMS plug-in was enabled in the equipment
control panel. The settings include:
K1-K7 and K10-K13 control the state of each relay. The
RSP-BRF Relay Settings group controls the state of each
relay in an RSP-BRF plug-in. This group will only be visible
if the RSP-BRF plug-in was enabled in the equipment control
panel. The settings include:
K30-K33 control the state of each relay. The available
settings for each relay are:
Position 1-6 switches the relay to the selected position.

Rev. A, P#399783

control panel.
14.9 Throughput Testers
14.9.1 Equipment Parameters, NetIQ Chariot

This panel contains settings for the Chariot API driver for
NetIQs Chariot throughput testing software. This driver is
designed to work with the API for a specific version of
Chariot and may not be compatible with the API for other
versions. These settings define the configuration
parameters used to control Chariot in setting up the
endpoints and establishing a throughput test to measure
throughput vs. time. There are also settings to control the
behavior of the throughput vs. attenuation hybrid. The
Measurement Settings include:
IP Address For Endpoint 1 specifies the IP address of the
computer to be identified to Chariot as Endpoint 1. This
could be the IUT or some other computer with the Chariot
endpoint software on the network. The combination of the
choice of endpoints and the direction specified in the Chariot
script will determine whether throughput is being tested to or
from the IUT.
IP Address For Endpoint 2 specifies the IP address of the
computer to be identified to Chariot as Endpoint 2. This
could be the IUT or some other computer with the Chariot
endpoint software on the network, but should be different
from Endpoint 1. The combination of the choice of endpoints
and the direction specified in the Chariot script will determine
whether throughput is being tested to or from the IUT.
Network Protocol specifies the desired network protocol
(TCP, IPX, etc.) to use for the throughput test. This list
contains all modes supported by Chariot, which may or may
not be supported by the given endpoints.
Chariot Script or Test specifies the script or pre-configured
test to perform in Chariot to generate a throughput vs. time
curve for parsing by the driver.

Rev. A, P#399783
Out Of Tolerance Data Path specifies a storage location for

throughput vs. time sweeps not meeting the tolerance
requirements specified below.
End Trace When Throughput Falls Below is used by the
throughput vs. attenuation hybrid to determine when to stop
recording a throughput vs. attenuation trace. When the
average throughput of any throughput vs. time sweep falls
below the specified level, the trace will end at that
attenuation level, whether or not thats the maximum
attenuation level specified for the trace.
Throughput Variation Tolerance is used to determine the
quality of an individual throughput vs. time sweep. This
setting attempts to ensure a stable throughput measurement
by controlling how constant the throughput sweep must be
over time. Deviations from the average by more than this
tolerance value for longer than the specified window will
cause a retry on the throughput sweep.
Minimum Time Within Tolerance is used as a qualifier to
the throughput variation tolerance. When set to 100%, all
throughput points must be within the tolerance window.
When set to 0%, any amount of variation is allowed. At
50%, as many as half of the measured throughput
transactions may be outside the specified tolerance.
Automatic Retry Attempts specifies the number of times to
retry a throughput vs. time sweep in the event of a tolerance
error or measurement timeout.
Chariot Measurement Timeout Period specifies the
amount of time to wait for a throughput vs. time sweep to be
completed by Chariot. This setting is used to detect when
the connection is lost or the throughput falls below some
expected level.
Network Reconnection Delay specifies the amount of time
to wait before attempting to re-establish communication with
the remote server in the event of a loss of communication.
14.9.2 Equipment Parameters, EMQuest Windows

Sockets Client
This panel contains settings for the EMQuest Windows
Sockets Client provided with the EMQ-105 Network
Throughput Test Package. These settings define the link
between the computer running EMQuest and the remote

Rev. A, P#399783
server application used to generate the traffic and measure

the throughput. There are also settings to control the
behavior of the throughput vs. attenuation hybrid. The
Measurement Settings include:
IP Address of Instrument Under Test specifies the IP
address of the computer hosting the EMQuest remote server
application. This allows the EMQuest client to connect to the
remote computer and test the throughput of the path
between that and the EMQuest client.
Configure IUT Endpoint As determines which link direction
will be evaluated with the data transfer.
Receiver sets the instrument under test to act as the
receiver for the throughput test data. Data will be
transmitted from the EMQuest throughput driver to the test
endpoint server on the IUT.
Sender sets the instrument under test to act as the source
for the throughput test data. Data will be transmitted from
the test endpoint server on the IUT to the EMQuest
throughput driver.
Measurement Mode specifies how the duration of a
throughput vs. time sweep is determined.
Total Size indicates that throughput data will be measured
until a specified amount of data has been transferred.
Total Time indicates that throughput data will be measured
until a sweep time limit is exceeded.
Number of Transactions specifies the total number of
transactions (individual throughput measurements) to be
made for each throughput vs. time sweep when in Total Size
mode. The total amount of data sent will be the transaction
size times the number of transactions, plus whatever
overhead is involved in the TCP/IP communication.
Throughput data will be taken for the specified number of
transactions, however long that takes.
Sweep Time specifies the minimum amount of time to spend
measuring throughput data when in Total Time mode.
Throughput data will be taken for at least the specified time
period, but may be as much as one transaction (individual
throughput measurement) period longer than the specified
sweep time. The total amount of data sent will vary based
on the actual throughput rate vs. the time specified.
Transaction Size specifies the desired size of each block of
data sent to or from the remote server. The amount of time
Rev. A, P#399783
required to send a transaction is measured and used to

convert (data sent)/(time taken) to the throughput of that
transaction.
Send/Receive Buffer Size provides additional granularity to
each throughput transaction. The buffer size defines the
amount of data to be sent in a single send operation of the
TCP/IP stack. (Note that the TCP/IP stack may still
subdivide the data further at the packet level). This allows
simulation of a more interactive communication process,
where application level data is sent in small blocks rather
than one large chunk. Setting the buffer size equal or larger
than the transaction size will cause the transaction data to
be sent all at one time.
End Trace When Throughput Falls Below is used by the
throughput vs. attenuation hybrid to determine when to stop
recording a throughput vs. attenuation trace. When the
average throughput of any throughput vs. time sweep falls
below the specified level, the trace will end at that
attenuation level, whether or not thats the maximum
attenuation level specified for the trace.
Throughput Variation Tolerance is used to determine the
quality of an individual throughput vs. time sweep. This
setting attempts to ensure a stable throughput measurement
by controlling how constant the throughput sweep must be
over time. Deviations from the average by more than this
tolerance value for longer than the specified window will
cause a retry on the throughput sweep.
Minimum Time Within Tolerance is used as a qualifier to
the throughput variation tolerance. When set to 100%, all
throughput points must be within the tolerance window.
When set to 0%, any amount of variation is allowed. At
50%, as many as half of the measured throughput
transactions may be outside the specified tolerance.
Automatic Retry Attempts specifies the number of times to
retry a throughput vs. time sweep in the event of a tolerance
error or measurement timeout.
Measurement Timeout Period specifies the amount of time
to wait for a throughput vs. time sweep to complete. In Total
Time mode, this value must be set larger than the Sweep
Time setting by at least one transaction period. In Total Size
mode, this setting is used to detect when the connection is
lost or the throughput falls below some expected level.

Rev. A, P#399783
Network Reconnection Delay specifies the amount of time

to wait before attempting to re-establish communication with
the remote server in the event of a loss of communication.
14.10 Variable Attenuators
14.10.1 Configuration Parameters, Agilent 11713A

Variable Attenuator
EMQuest provides separate control over the state of each
attenuator channel of an Agilent 11713A Attenuator Driver
connected to a variety of available variable RF attenuators.
This configuration control panel allows selection of the
desired channel of a given device and specifying the
attenuator type that is connected. The available settings
are:
Attenuator Selection defines which channel of the 11713A
will be configured for this device driver. The available
selections of Attenuator X or Attenuator Y match the
indications on the front and back panels of the 11713A.
Attenuator Configuration allows specification of the type of
attenuator module attached to the specified channel of the
11713A. The available attenuators are defined by
attenuation range and number of switch sections included in
the attenuator. The available attenuator types and
corresponding model numbers are listed.

Rev. A, P#399783
14.10.2 Equipment Parameters, Variable Attenuator

This panel contains settings for a variable attenuator driver.
These settings define the range control used for a
measurement value vs. attenuation data acquisition process.
RF Attenuation Range Settings controls the behavior of a
measurement vs. attenuation data acquisition:
Attenuation Start specifies the starting value of the
attenuation. Each data acquisition loop starts with the
attenuation set to this value.
Attenuation Step specifies the attenuation step size to add
at each measurement step.
Attenuation End specifies the ending value of the
attenuation. When the attenuation reaches this level, the
sweep completes or switches to a fine step search mode.
Attenuation Fine Step specifies an alternate step size to
used for a fine search. This setting is primarily used to fill in
between attenuation values in a controlled search process.
Settling Time allows entering a delay time to be applied after
every change in the attenuation before proceeding to a
measurement step.

Rev. A, P#399783
14.10.3 Exercise Dialog, Variable Attenuator

This dialog provides manual control over a standard variable
attenuator. It allows setting the fixed attenuation level of the
attenuator from the available range of settings. Simply
select the desired attenuation level from the Attenuation
combobox.
14.11 Hybrids
14.11.1 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Dual Receivers

A Dual Receiver Hybrid combines two identical or different
receivers with similar capabilities into one dual-channel
receiver. This capability is typically used to satisfy the dual
channel requirements for dual polarized measurements.
The equipment parameters frame for a hybrid contains a
number of tabbed pages for selecting and setting
parameters of the equipment making up the hybrid, as well
as any hybrid specific settings. These pages include the
following:
The Hybrid Equipment Select tab of the parameter page
allows the selection of the two receivers required to create
the hybrid. The available settings are:
Channel 1 selects the receiver to use as channel 1 of the
dual receiver hybrid.
The remaining tabs are Equipment Parameter tabs that are
labeled for each selected piece of equipment and contain the
equipment parameter frames for each device. Use the
context sensitive help on each page to obtain more
information about that particular component of the hybrid.

Rev. A, P#399783
14.11.2 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Positioner and

Switch
A Positioner/Switch Hybrid allows automated switching to
different switch states as a function of position. As the
positioner is monitored, the current position is compared to a
range of values corresponding to different switch states and
the appropriate state is set.
following:
allows the selection of the positioner and switch required to
create the hybrid. The available settings are:
Positioner selects the positioner to use for the hybrid.
Switch selects the switch driver to make dependent on the
positioner location.
The Switch Positioner Range Settings tab allows
configuring the desired ranges of the positioner location that
will select a specific switch state. It contains a State Range
Selection table that allows entry of Start and End positions
for each range as well as an associated State for that range.
State 1 is the default state for all undefined segments of the
positioners range of motion.
14.11.3 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Receiver and Switch

A Receiver/Switch Hybrid provides a dual-channel receiver
by using a single receiver and an RF switch to create two
signal channels. While less costly than a dual receiver
hybrid, it can be significantly slower since all measurements
must be performed sequentially, and settling time must be
allowed between channel switching.

Rev. A, P#399783

following:
allows the selection of the receiver and switch required to
Network/Spectrum Analyzer selects the receiver to use for
the dual receiver hybrid.
Switch selects the RF switch driver to use to switch the
receiver between two input channels.
14.11.4 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Communication

Tester and Receiver
A Communication Tester/Receiver Hybrid provides the
capability of acquiring frequency dependent transmitted
power from a wireless device. It controls maintenance of the
call by the communication tester/base station simulator and
tracking the traffic channel and receiver to each requested
frequency to create a single frequency dependent trace. For
spectrum analyzers, each frequency point is measured using
a filtered trace with one of the available trace filters that can
be set in the spectrum analyzer driver. This hybrid can be
used anywhere a single channel receiver/analyzer can be
used.
following:
allows the selection of the receiver and communication
tester required to create the hybrid. The available settings
are:

Rev. A, P#399783
Spectrum Analyzer selects the receiver to use for the dual

receiver hybrid.
Communication Tester selects the RF communication
tester (base station simulator) to use to establish and
maintain communication with the wireless device under test.

Tester and Dual Receivers
A Communication Tester/Dual Receiver Hybrid provides the
capability of acquiring dual channel frequency dependent
transmitted power from a wireless device. It uses the
functionality of a Hybrid Dual Receivers driver to combine
two similar receivers into one dual channel device that is
synchronized with a communication tester. It controls
maintenance of the call by the communication tester/base
station simulator and tracking the traffic channel and receiver
to each requested frequency to create a single frequency
dependent trace. For spectrum analyzers, each frequency
point is measured using a filtered trace with one of the
available trace filters that can be set in the spectrum
analyzer driver. This hybrid can be used anywhere a dual
channel receiver/analyzer can be used.
following:
allows the selection of the receivers and communication
are:
Spectrum Analyzer selects the receiver to use for the dual
receiver hybrid.
receiver between two input channels.

Rev. A, P#399783


Tester, Receiver, and Switch
A Communication Tester/Receiver/Switch Hybrid provides
the capability of acquiring dual channel frequency dependent
transmitted power from a wireless device. It uses the
functionality of a Hybrid Receiver and Switch to create two
signal channels from a single receiver and RF switch. It
controls maintenance of the call by the communication
tester/base station simulator and tracking the traffic channel
and receiver to each requested frequency to create a single
frequency dependent trace. For spectrum analyzers, each
frequency point is measured using a filtered trace with one of
the available trace filters that can be set in the spectrum
analyzer driver. This hybrid can be used anywhere a dual
channel receiver/analyzer can be used.
following:
allows the selection of the receiver, switch, and
communication tester required to create the hybrid. The

Rev. A, P#399783

14.11.7 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Throughput

Tester and Attenuator
A Throughput Tester/Attenuator Hybrid provides the
capability of acquiring throughput vs. attenuation curves for
performance testing of wireless network devices (Wi-Fi,
Bluetooth, etc.). The hybrid uses input parameters from both
the attenuator and throughput tester parameter pages to
perform the measurement, stepping at the specified
attenuation step size from the starting to ending attenuation
level or until the measured throughput falls below a specified
level. Once the end point is reached, the acquired data is
analyzed to determine the vector maximum of the measured
data and attempt to narrow in on any "knee" in the
throughput vs. attenuation curve by taking smaller steps
around the vector maximum.
The vector maximum is defined as the maximum root sum of
squares (RSS) of the normalized throughput and attenuation
values:
2
Throughput i Attenuationi
2
Vector Max = max +
Throughput Max Attenuation Max

The normalization process can be visualized by plotting the
data on a Cartesian graph scaled so that both X and Y axes
are equal sized. The vector maximum is then the point
farthest from the origin. Figure 1 below illustrates the
relationship of the vector maximum with a data set clearly
exhibiting a "knee". For data where the normalized RSS of
intermediate points is less than one (represented by the
dashed arc), the endpoint(s) of the curve are the vector
maximum(maxima), as shown in Figure 2. In this case,
there is no clearly defined "knee", and the fine search
algorithm fills in after the first data point.

Rev. A, P#399783
Vector Maximum
X
Figure 1. Illustration of vector maximum for data exhibiting a knee.
Y
V ecto r M axim um
X Image not available, see software.

Figure 2. Illustration of vector maximum for data without a knee.

following:
are:
Throughput Tester selects the throughput tester to use for
the hybrid.
Attenuator selects the RF attenuator to use for varying the
path loss between the reference endpoint and the IUT.

Rev. A, P#399783
14.11.8 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Series-Combined

RF Attenuators
The series attenuator hybrid allows combining two variable
RF attenuators into one continuously variable attenuator with
the full range and minimum step size provided by the two
attenuators. For example, one 11 dB attenuator with a 1 dB
step size can be combined with a 90 dB attenuator with a 10
dB step size to produce a 101 dB attenuator with a 1 dB step
size. The attenuators must be physically connected in series
to produce the desired attenuation range.
are:
Attenuator 1 selects one of the two attenuators to combine.
Attenuator 2 selects the second of the two attenuators to
combine.
RF Attenuation Range Settings controls the behavior of a
measurement vs. attenuation data acquisition:
Attenuation Start specifies the starting value of the
attenuation. Each data acquisition loop starts with the
attenuation set to this value.
Attenuation Step specifies the attenuation step size to add
at each measurement step.
Attenuation End specifies the ending value of the
attenuation. When the attenuation reaches this level, the
sweep completes or switches to a fine step search mode.
Attenuation Fine Step specifies an alternate step size to
used for a fine search. This setting is primarily used to fill in
between attenuation values in a controlled search process.
Settling Time allows entering a delay time to be applied after
every change in the attenuation before proceeding to a
measurement step.
Attenuator Setting Order allows control over which
attenuator changes first. This can be an issue if recording
the behavior of an attenuation ramp where changing the
larger attenuation before the smaller one, or vice versa,
could result in a momentarily large (or small) attenuation
value that might affect the measurement system. This is
primarily of use when the manual attenuator driver is used,

Rev. A, P#399783
since significant delays can exist between each change in

attenuation setting.
14.11.9 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid Throughput

Tester, Attenuator, and Switch
The Throughput Tester/Attenuator/Switch hybrid combines
the functionality of the Throughput Tester/Attenuator hybrid
with that of the Receiver/Switch hybrid to produce a dual
channel throughput vs. attenuation tester.
are:
Throughput Tester selects the throughput tester to use for
the dual channel hybrid.
Attenuator selects the RF attenuator to use for varying the
path loss between the reference endpoint and the IUT.
reference endpoint between two input channels.
14.12 Manual Drivers
14.12.1 Equipment Parameters, Manual Entry Analyzer

The manual entry driver does not actually communicate with
real hardware, but rather, provides a dialog to allow manual
entry or copy/pasting of data into a table in place of reading
from a spectrum or network analyzer. This parameter frame

Rev. A, P#399783
allows specifying the desired number of Points Per Trace to

be queried with the manual entry dialog. The dialog will
accept the number of values indicated here at each
measurement point.
14.12.2 Manual Entry Dialog

The manual entry dialog allows entering or copy and pasting
of data into a table in place of reading from a spectrum or
network analyzer. This can be used to enter data measured
outside EMQuest (i.e. antenna gain or attenuator calibration
values) into a response file for use as corrections in other
tests, or to allow manual data acquisition and logging from
equipment not supported by an EMQuest driver. The dialog
will show up to two columns (for dual channel tests) for entry
of data at each required trace point. For single channel
tests, there is no need to enter data into the second column.
Once all the necessary data has been entered into the table,
press the Save Points button to proceed to the next test
step.
14.12.3 Manual Positioner Dialog

The manual positioner allows the available tests to interface
to positioning equipment that doesnt have automated
support. By configuring and selecting a manual positioner
as the positioner for a test, the user can manually perform
positioning tasks as required by the selected test. At each
required motion, the manual positioner will prompt the user
to make the required position adjustment and press OK
when done. Note: Certain test or data acquisition modes
(such as continuous data acquisition during motion) cannot
be supported properly from a manual positioner, since there
is no positioning feedback during the motion. Attempts to
use these acquisition modes will produce undefined results.
14.12.4 Configuration Parameters, Manual Variable

Attenuator
The manual variable attenuator allows automated control of
manual (mechanical) variable attenuators through user
intervention. At each point where the attenuation needs to
be changed, EMQuest will display a dialog prompting the
user to make the necessary change. This configuration
Rev. A, P#399783
control panel allows specification of the capabilities of the

attenuator to be used. The available settings are:
Manual Attenuator Definition allows the user to define the
capabilities of the manual attenuator to be used.
Maximum Attenuation indicates the maximum attenuation
that the variable attenuator is capable of. The attenuator is
assumed to be capable of a range from 0 dB to this value.
Attenuation Resolution indicates the step size of the
attenuator. The attenuator must be able to vary from 0 dB to
the maximum attenuation in even steps equal to this setting.
14.13 Data Table Generator

The Data Table Generator is a tabular data selection dialog for
creating a data table template used to report tabular data. The
dialog allows navigation of the available data set to select the
desired output table view as well as specifying the number of
columns of data to display per page. Currently, this feature can
only create tables of a pre-defined size, which means that the size
of the desired output table must be known at design time. Dynamic
table generation, which will automatically add the required number
of pages at report generation time will be added in future revisions.
The left hand side of the dialog contains a Data Navigation Tree,
which shows the structure of the available dataset. The selected
node of the tree shows as a Data Table on the right hand side of
the dialog. This table contains the contents of the table that will be
generated in the document if OK is pressed. At the bottom of the
page is a field for entering the number of Y-Axis Columns Per
Page. This controls the number of columns of actual measured
data that will be generated per table. This is in addition to any
columns required to display the X-axis or any higher dimensions of
the data set. Upon pressing OK, the dialog will insert a series of
groups and bands of table fields for enough pages to cover the total
number of columns in the selected data segment. The required
number of rows will be determined at report generation and each
band group will be repeated as necessary to output all of the data.
Refer to the Main Menu for more information on bands and band
groups.
14.14 Data Selector

The Data Selector is a tabular data selection dialog for inserting a
single data point field. The dialog allows navigation of the available

Rev. A, P#399783
data set to select the desired data point to be inserted into the
current document location. Note that this field only records the
location of the desired data point in the data set. The actual value
will be inserted from the associated dataset upon report generation.
The left hand side of the dialog contains a Data Navigation Tree,
which shows the structure of the available dataset down to each
individual element. Tabular, navigation-only nodes are indicated by
grid icons, while nodes containing a valid data field are indicated by
a checkmark. The selected tabular node of the tree shows as a
Data Table on the right hand side of the dialog. This table contains
the contents of the segment of the dataset along that branch of the
tree. At the top right of the page is a Selection: readout indicating
the contents of the currently selected data field. This represents
the field that will be inserted into the document upon pressing OK.
14.15 Trace Information Settings, 8510

Smoothing Factor controls the smoothing window applied to the
received trace. When enabled, the analyzer will average points
from the specified percentage of the trace to generate each
frequency point. This feature is useful for eliminating sharp noise
spikes, etc., but may lose measurement details. To enable, select
the checkbox and enter the desired smoothing factor, from 0 to
20%.
Averaging Factor controls the number of sweeps or points that are
averaged to generate one trace. When enabled, the analyzer will
measure the specified number of sweeps or points and display the
resulting average. This function will reduce the random noise level
in the resulting data. The method of averaging is dependent upon
the sweep type selected. In Ramp mode, the analyzer will average
repeated sweeps to generate the resulting trace, while in Step
mode, each data point will be measured the specified number of
times before stepping to the next point. To enable, select the
checkbox and enter the desired number of sweeps or points to
Points Per Trace controls the number of points measured per
trace displayed or returned. Selecting more points will increase the
frequency resolution, but will slow the sweep speed accordingly.
Select from 1, 51, 101, 201, 401, or 801 points per trace.
Note: Selecting 1 point per trace will automatically put the analyzer
in the single point mode, regardless of the Sweep Mode setting.

Rev. A, P#399783
Sweep Mode allows the selection of the desired sweep mode for
analyzer configurations that support more than one mode. This
selection will only be visible if the Synthesized Source option is
checked in the equipment configuration panel. The available
choices are Ramp, which uses an analog synchronization signal
between the analyzer and the signal source, and Step, which uses
the system interface to step the signal source to each frequency.
Ramp mode is typically faster unless a number of traces are being
averaged, but frequency accuracy will suffer due to the analog
sweep signal. Step mode takes longer between each step due to
the digital communication required, but does not slow down much
as averaging is increased since the same frequency point is
measured repeatedly.
14.16 Calibration/Measurement Port Settings

There are two sets of Port Settings, one for the calibration step, and
one for the measurement step. This allows the output power level
or port attenuation levels to be changed between the calibration
step and measurement step. This feature is useful in cases where
the requirements of the measurement may cause an overload
condition during the calibration, or where linearity concerns require
similar insertion losses during calibration and measurement.
Output Power Level allows setting the source power level in dBm.
The range allowed by the analyzer will be dependent on the
analyzer type and installed options. It may not correspond to the
total range of values provided by this control. It is up to the end
user to verify the capabilities of their equipment to insure that they
dont specify a value that is outside its operating range.
Port 1 Attenuation allows setting of a built in attenuator for Port 1
of the analyzer when so equipped.
Port 2 Attenuation allows setting of a built in attenuator for Port 1
of the analyzer when so equipped.
14.17 Calibration Settings, 8510

These settings allow the selection of the desired analyzer
calibration type, if any, prior to initiating a measurement. Prior to
starting a test, the test parameter settings will be compared to
those already in the analyzer, and, if they differ, the analyzer will be
reset and the new parameters downloaded prior to initiating the
requested calibration.

Rev. A, P#399783
Calibration Kit allows selection of one of the standard calibration

kits available.
Calibration Type allows the selection of the desired calibration
type. The user should take care to insure that the selected
calibration method is applicable to the test measurement to be
performed. Some tests may override this setting automatically,
while others may provide the user the flexibility to control this
setting, even though the end result may not make sense.
14.18 Time Gate Settings

These settings allow the application of a time gate to frequency
domain data if the analyzer has the time domain option installed.
These settings are only available if the Time Domain Option is
checked in the equipment configuration panel. The time gate can
be used to remove path dependent effects from a frequency
response measurement. The user must make sure that the
specified gating values are valid for the requested frequency range.
The Fast Fourier Transform process used by the analyzer will also
introduce certain artifacts into the resulting measurements, so
users should consult their equipment documentation to become
familiar with the FFT process prior to using this function.
Use Time Gating will setup and enable the time domain gating
when checked.
Gate Shape allows entry of the desired gate shape. The available
selections are Maximum, Minimum, Normal, and Wide. Refer to
the network analyzer documentation for more information on these
settings.
14.19 Equipment Parameters, Generic Receivers

This pane provides the Equipment Parameters for generic
analyzers. These fields allow defining GPIB commands for
equipment specific parameters that are not directly related to the
measurement process, but are required to properly configure the
equipment in order to perform the test. This driver is considered
bonus technology and is not guaranteed to work in all cases.
Equipment Settings contains fields for entering the GPIB
commands necessary to control the analyzer. In general, all fields
must be filled for full functionality. Any field containing a question

Rev. A, P#399783
mark (?) is automatically assumed to be a query and will be treated

as such.
Initialization String is the final command sequence used to
configure the device prior to performing a test. It is intended to set
test specific parameters such as bandwidth, reference level, etc.
14.20 GPIB Configuration Settings

Use these settings to identify and communicate with a particular
instance of the selected piece of equipment. Each piece of
equipment must have unique GPIB settings, but EMQuest can
support more than one identical piece of equipment. Currently,
EMQuest only supports the National Instruments line of GPIB
interfaces.
Board Id indicates the National Instruments GPIB board number to
use to communicate with this equipment. On most systems, the
default of zero will be correct. However, for systems with more
than one GPIB card, or with special settings in the NI drivers, select
the board number that the equipment will be attached to.
GPIB Address is the primary GPIB address of the test equipment.
Refer to the documentation for the equipment to determine the
appropriate setting.

Rev. A, P#399783
14.21 Installed Options, 87XX

These settings allow the driver to take advantage of options that
may be installed in your equipment. Care should be taken not to
enable options that are not installed as GPIB errors may occur
which may not be detected, resulting in erroneous data.
Time Domain Capability indicates that the analyzer has the time
domain option installed. Checking this box will allow time gating to
be used.
HP 85047-A Frequency Doubler indicates that the 8753 series
analyzer has the frequency doubler installed and can function to 6
GHz when enabled.
14.22 Installed Options, 8510

These settings allow the driver to take advantage of options that
may be installed in your equipment. Care should be taken not to
enable options that are not installed as GPIB errors may occur
which may not be detected, resulting in erroneous data.
Time Domain Capability indicates that the analyzer has the time
domain option installed. Checking this box will allow time gating to
be used.
Synthesized Source (Step Mode) indicates that the signal
generator used with the 8510 supports step mode sweeps in
addition to ramp mode sweeps.
14.23 Absolute/Relative Port Definitions

In order to standardize the interface between the various test
network analyzers, beyond the standard S-Parameter settings.
These are based on common two-port + reference port network
analyzers, but since the 8510 can support a more complicated set
of measurement ports, the user is allowed to configure each of the
standard types to be any port combination they desire. These
settings will be used to customize the USER port definitions of the
8510 as needed.
A/R is used to define the relative ratio measurement defined as port
A divided by the reference port. This port setting is typically used
for single channel tests and as channel 1 for dual channel tests.

Rev. A, P#399783
B/R is used to define the relative ratio measurement defined as port

B divided by the reference port. This port setting is typically used
as channel 2 for dual channel tests.
A/B is used to define the relative ratio measurement defined as port
A divided by port B.
A is used to define the absolute magnitude measurement of port A.
This port setting is typically used for single channel tests and as
channel 1 for dual channel tests.
B is used to define the absolute magnitude measurement of port B.
This port setting is typically used as channel 2 for dual channel
tests.
Numerator allows the selection of the measurement port for each
port definition. The available ports are a1, a2, b1, or b2.
Denominator allows the selection of the reference port for each
port definition. The available ports are a1, a2, or b1. The reference
port selection is not available for the absolute magnitude port
settings.
Phase Lock allows the selection of the port to phase lock the
received signal(s) to. The available ports are a1, a2, or None.
Drive Port allows the selection of the main port to apply drive
power to on units equipped with the S-Parameter test set. The
available ports are Port 1, Port 2, or None.
14.24 Equipment Parameters, Switch Array

The switch array provides a tabbed window view of all of the
available states of a switch as specified by the Switch Array States
setting of the switch in the control panel. Each tab will provide an
equipment parameter setting window for the associated switch.
Use the context sensitive help inside the panel for documentation
on the particular switch settings.

Rev. A, P#399783
14.25 Equipment Parameters, Hybrid

Communication Tester and Switch
A Communication Tester/Switch Hybrid provides the capability of
acquiring dual channel frequency dependent data from a wireless
device. It uses functionality similar to that of a Hybrid Receiver and
Switch to create two signal channels from a single communication
tester/base station simulator and RF switch. The communication
tester driver controls maintenance of the call and tracking the traffic
channel to each requested frequency in order to create a single
frequency dependent trace. The hybrid switches between the two
available RF signal paths, performing a frequency/channel sweep
at each switch position. This hybrid can be used for tests requiring
dual channel communication tester capability (primarily automated
active pattern measurements and sensitivity testing). The test type
determines the appropriate measurement setting of the
communication tester.
The equipment parameters frame for a hybrid contains a number of
tabbed pages for selecting and setting parameters of the equipment
making up the hybrid, as well as any hybrid specific settings.
These pages include the following:
The Hybrid Equipment Select tab of the parameter page allows
the selection of the communication tester and switch required to
Communication Tester selects the RF communication tester
(base station simulator) to use to establish and maintain
communication with the wireless device under test and perform the
required measurement process.
communication tester between two RF signal paths (channels).
equipment parameter frames for each device. Use the context
sensitive help on each page to obtain more information about that
particular component of the hybrid.

Rev. A, P#399783
14.26 Corrections Pane, Vector Response Test

The Corrections Pane for the vector response tests allows the
entry of constant and/or frequency dependent corrections to be
applied to measured data and provides control over the final format
of the data after the corrections have been applied. A given test
may have one or more correction sets to be applied to different
portions of the data. Each set of corrections will have its own pane
in the parameter tree. The available settings are as follows:
Output Format controls the representation of the measured vector
quantities. One or more resultant terms may be output. The
available choices include:
Real Part adds a trace representing the real component of the
vector quantity.
Imaginary Part adds a trace representing the imaginary
component of the vector quantity.
Log Magnitude adds a trace representing the log magnitude of the
vector quantity in dB.
Linear Magnitude adds a trace representing the linear magnitude
of the vector quantity.
Phase adds a trace representing the phase of the vector quantity in
degrees.
VSWR adds a trace representing voltage standing wave ratio. The
data must be a reflectivity measurement for this to be a valid
format.
The Corrections list box holds a list of response file names for
frequency dependent corrections. The response files can be either
.RSP files or raw data files (.RAW) from a response or vector
response measurement. Each file name will have a "+" or "-" in
front of it to indicate that the corresponding data will be either
added to or subtracted from the measured data. This notation
follows the standard corrections notation for familiarity. The
corrections are treated as complex corrections that are converted to
complex (real and imaginary) numbers before applying to the data.
The data is then either multiplied (+) or divided (-) by each complex
correction. This allows the use of a variety of correction data types
that can be properly expressed as valid complex numbers. These
types include vector response files containing real and imaginary
pairs, or any combination of magnitude, log magnitude, and/or
phase information in either vector or scalar response files. It is not
possible to apply real or imaginary components separately.

Rev. A, P#399783
Note: The user must ensure that the files in the list match the
expected format, units, and required frequency range to avoid
unpredictable results. Otherwise extrapolation or other errors may
result. While it is possible to apply specialized corrections to
intentionally change the data type and meaning of the resulting
data (i.e. apply a correction of +107 dB to convert from dBm to
dBV), the data will still maintain the original labeling information.
Therefore, while the expert user can take advantage of this
capability, appropriate measures should be taken to provide
comments or other indications to document the intended effect of
the special corrections.

Add displays the file open dialog box to search for a response
file to add to the measured data. The path to the selected file will
be appended to the end of the list with a "+" in front of it to indicate
that the data will be added to the measured result.
selected file will be appended to the end of the list with a "-" in front
of it to indicate that the data will be subtracted from the measured
result.
complex correction (log magnitude and phase) to be applied to all
data points.
14.27 Ancillary Equipment Selection Pane

The Ancillary Equipment Selection Pane allows the selection of
ancillary support equipment to enhance the functionality of the test.
The equipment drivers of specific device types may support
ancillary functionality, allowing them to be used to enhance the
capabilities of a particular test.
The Ancillary Equipment Selection listbox contains a checklist of
all available configured equipment with ancillary support. Checking
the box beside the equipment will add an Ancillary Equipment Pane
for the selected equipment to the parameter tree below the
Ancillary Equipment node.

Rev. A, P#399783
Note: While there may be cases where the same equipment can
be used for both the required test equipment and ancillary
equipment, this practice is not recommended, and unexpected
behavior may result.

Rev. A, P#399783
15 Ancillary Equipment
Ancillary equipment refers to test equipment not specifically required by a
test parameter file in order to be able to perform the test functionality itself,
but which may provide an additional level of automation external to the
main functionality of the test.
Examples include positioners and switches that may be used to position a
device under test or select a signal path prior to performing a test.
15.1 Correction Preferences Frame, Vector Patterns

The Corrections node for vector pattern measurements expands
to provide corrections for each polarization of a vector pattern test.
The Correction Preferences Frame appears in the parameter
pane for the corrections node and provides control over the final
format of the data after the post-processing calculations have been
performed. These parameters include:
Display Final Data As: controls the format of the resultant data.
The available formats include:
Pattern the default setting, leaves the measured and corrected
data as is and labeled as measured.
Normalized Pattern finds the maximum magnitude point of the
pattern and normalizes all vector data to that point. After
normalization, the maximum linear magnitude is one (zero dB log
magnitude) with a phase of zero degrees. All other values are
expressed relative to that point, with magnitudes less than one
(less than zero dB log magnitude). Normalization is not allowed for
patterns of frequency dependent data, however, after transposing,
Resultant Output Quantities controls the representation of the
measured vector quantities. One or more resultant terms may be
output. The available choices include:
Real Part adds a trace representing the real component of the
vector quantity.
Imaginary Part adds a trace representing the imaginary
component of the vector quantity.
Log Magnitude adds a trace representing the log magnitude of the
vector quantity in dB.
Linear Magnitude adds a trace representing the linear magnitude
of the vector quantity.

Rev. A, P#399783
Phase adds a trace representing the phase of the vector quantity in

degrees.
Linearized Phase adds a trace representing the phase of the
vector quantity in degrees, where discontinuous transitions
between +/- 180 degrees have been removed, creating a
continuous phase trace. Ideally, when coupled with the
wavelength, this trace represents the variation in path length as a
function of angular position. Note, however, that the linearization
algorithm, while powerful, cannot differentiate between "artificial"
discontinuities due to rotation past the negative real axis (i.e. +/-
180 degrees) and actual discontinuities in a pattern (such as
passing through the polar null of a dipole pattern) that result in true
180 degree phase shifts.
Axial Ratio adds a trace representing the axial ratio of a vector
pattern when both polarizations are available. This box is not
visible for single polarization measurements.
Other Options allow additional formatting. The available choices
include:
Transpose Frequency Dependent Data, when checked, will
transpose patterns of frequency dependent data (produced using
the Frequency Range data acquisition mode) to frequency
dependent patterns. This will allow viewing pattern graphs for each
frequency using the reduced dimension depth option of the graph
control.
Transpose Frequency Dependent Antenna Attributes, when
checked, will transpose the antenna attributes table of frequency
dependent data (produced using the Frequency Range data
acquisition mode) to frequency dependent attributes. This will allow
viewing frequency dependent graphs for each attribute. Note that
the attributes will share one graph, so scaling and labeling will be
mixed. By reducing the dimension depth of the graph, each
attribute can be viewed separately.

calculate the antenna attributes table for each polarization of a
dual-polarized pattern test.

Rev. A, P#399783
16 Performing Range Calibrations using EMQuest

In order to perform traceable measurements of active and passive
antenna attributes such as total radiated power (TRP), total isotropic
sensitivity (TIS), effective isotropic radiated power or sensitivity (EIRP,
EIS), antenna gain, and efficiency, it is necessary to not only use
calibrated test equipment, but also to calibrate the antenna test range.
This is done by measuring the path loss of the range, including the effects
of the range length, measurement antenna, cables, switches, etc. included
in the test system, using a reference antenna (typically either a dipole or
standard gain horn) with known gain characteristics and appropriate
calibrated test equipment. The reference antenna is mounted at the center
of the quiet zone to serve as the substitution antenna under test (AUT).
The reference measurement is repeated for each variation of the
measurement system (i.e. each polarization of the receive antenna, and
each possible signal path to the measurement equipment.). The range
calibration measurement is combined with the gain of the reference
antenna to determine a correction to be applied to power or sensitivity
measurements made using the system in order to express them in terms
relative to a theoretical isotropic transmitter or receiver.
16.1 Theoretical Background

Each individual data point in a radiated power or sensitivity
measurement is referred to as the effective isotropic radiated power
or effective isotropic sensitivity at that point. That is, the desired
information is an indication of how the measured quantity relates to
the same quantity from an isotropic radiator. Thus, the reference
measurement must relate the power received or transmitted at the
calibrated test equipment used to measure the test AUT (i.e.
spectrum analyzer, network analyzer, signal generator, or
communication tester) back to the power transmitted or received at
a theoretical isotropic radiator. The total path loss then, is just the
difference in dB between the power transmitted or received at the
isotropic radiator and that seen at the test equipment (see Figure 1
below).

Rev. A, P#399783
Total Path
PISO
PMA
clMA-TE Test
Equipment
r
GMA PTE
Isotropic
Radiator
Figure 1 Theoretical Case for Determining Path Loss
In equation form, this becomes:

PL = PISO PTE
where PL is the total path loss in dB, and PISO is the power
radiated by the theoretical isotropic radiator and PTE is the power
received at the test equipment port, both in dBm. As can be seen
in Figure 1, this quantity includes the range path loss due to the
range length r, the gain of the measurement antenna, and any loss
terms associated with the cabling, connections, amplifiers, splitters,
etc. between the measurement antenna and the test equipment
port.
Figure 2 shows a typical real world configuration for measuring the
path loss. In this case, a reference antenna with known gain is
used in place of the theoretical isotropic source. The path loss may
then be determined from the power into the reference antenna by
adding the gain of the reference antenna. That is:
PISO = PRA + GRA
where PRA is the power radiated by reference antenna, and GRA
is the gain of the reference antenna, so that:
PL = PRA + GRA PTE

Rev. A, P#399783
Total Path Loss
PRA PMA
clMA-TE
r
GRA PISO GMA PTE clTE-RX
PSG clSG-RA PRX
Signal
Receiver
Generator
Figure 2 Typical Configuration for Measuring Path Loss
In order to determine PRA, it is necessary to perform a reference

measurement (calibration) of the cables to remove the effects of the
cable loss between signal generator and reference antenna, and
between the test equipment port and the receiver. This establishes
a reference point at the input to the reference antenna. Figure 3
illustrates the cable reference measurement configuration.
Assuming the power level at the signal generator is fixed, it is easy
to show that the difference between PRA and PTE in Figure 2 is
given by:
PRA PTE = PRX ' PRX
where PRX is the power measured at the receiver during the cable
reference test, and PRX is the power measured at the receiver
during the range path loss measurement in Figure 2. Thus, the
path loss is then just given by:
PL = G RA + PRX ' PRX
.
Note that this formulation assumes that the effects of the reference
antenna VSWR are accounted for in the gain of the reference
antenna. For more information on this subject, refer to the topic on
Pattern Measurement Basics.

Rev. A, P#399783
PRA=PTE
clSG-RA clTE-RX
PSG PRX
Signal
Receiver
Generator
Figure 3 Cable Reference Calibration Configuration
16.2 Calibrating an Active Antenna Measurement

Range
Figure 4 illustrates a typical pattern measurement system for active
antenna measurements. The measurement signal paths to be
calibrated are indicated in green. This includes the radiated
propagation path through the chamber and the conducted path
through any cables, switches, amplifiers, etc. all the way to the
measurement port of the test equipment. For radiated power
measurements, this is the input port to the spectrum analyzer or
other calibrated receiver used to measure the radiated power of the
AUT. For sensitivity measurements, this is the output of the signal
generator for the communication tester used to generate the
communication traffic. Note that there are two paths inherent in the
system, one for each polarization. A range calibration must be
performed for each path, as well as for each path combination
necessary to reach the test equipment. Thus, if there are two
equipment configurations, one for power measurements and one
for sensitivity, then a total of four different range calibrations must
be performed.

Rev. A, P#399783
Fully Anechoic
Chamber
Measurement Propagation Path AUT

(Cables, Switches, Amps, etc.)
Measurement Signal Path
Dual Polarized
Conducted Portion of
Measurement
Antenna
Positioner
Measurement
Port
Test
Equipment
Figure 4 Typical Active Pattern Measurement System showing

measurement path in green.
Figure 5 illustrates a typical range calibration configuration,

highlighting the components that must be added to the system to
perform the measurement. The reference antenna (yellow) is
oriented in the center of the quiet zone parallel to the polarization of
the measurement antenna to be calibrated. The cables needed to
reach from the vector network analyzer (or other
transmitter/receiver pair used to perform the range calibration) to
the reference antenna (red cable), and from the end of the cable
that would normally connect to the measurement port back to the
VNA (purple cable) are not part of the range path to be calibrated
(green) and must be removed. This is done by connecting the
cables in a loop as shown in Figure 6 and measuring (or calibrating
out) their path loss. The effects of the reference antenna gain are
also not part of the measurement system and must be removed as
part of the corrections applied to any measurements performed on
the range. Note that the direction of propagation for the range

Rev. A, P#399783
calibration is configured for transmission from the reference

antenna. While this is correct for the radiated power measurement
path, it may be necessary to reverse the connections to the ports of
the VNA (and thus the corresponding propagation direction) for
calibrating the sensitivity path if there are any active components
(i.e. amplifiers) in the signal path to be calibrated. If not, the same
propagation direction may be used for both transmit and receive
range calibrations due to reciprocity.
Fully Anechoic
Chamber
Reference
Antenna
(in center of
Measurement Propagation Path quiet zone)
Dual Polarized
Conducted Portion of
Measurement Reference
Antenna Antenna
Cable
Measurement RX Port
Port Vector
Network
Analyzer TX Port
Flexible Loopback Cable
Figure 5 Typical Range Calibration Configuration showing additional

components.

Rev. A, P#399783
Fully Anechoic
Chamber
Flexible Loopback Cable
Reference
Antenna
Cable
Vector
Network
Analyzer TX Port
RX Port
Figure 6 Example of Loop-back Configuration for Cable Calibration.
16.2.1 Procedure for Calibrating an Active Antenna

Measurement Range
The following sections define the procedure for calibrating an
active antenna measurement range. A slightly modified
version of this procedure, including portions of the
introductory text above, was submitted and incorporated into
the CTIA Test Plan for Mobile Station Over-the-Air
Performance.
16.2.1.1 Equipment required

1. EMQuest software configured for response
measurements.
2. Anechoic chamber meeting desired quiet zone
performance.

Rev. A, P#399783
3. Reference antenna(s) with valid calibrations to cover

the required range of test frequencies. Low
uncertainty precision calibrated sleeve dipoles are
recommended as the reference antenna up to 2.5
GHz. Standard gain horns are recommended above
2.5 GHz. Other antennas may be used, however, the
uncertainty contribution to the resulting
measurements due to calibration and phase center
issues may be significant.
4. Low dielectric constant support structure (e.g.
Styrofoam) for positioning the reference antennas.
5. Measurement antenna(s) (e.g. horn or dipole used to
perform measurements of the mobile station). Note:
If multiple antennas are used to cover the required
frequency range, the reference measurement must be
repeated each time the antennas are repositioned,
unless a permanent mounting fixture is used to
guarantee repeatable performance.
6. Network analyzer, spectrum analyzer with tracking
generator, or stable signal generator and
measurement receiver (spectrum analyzer, power
meter, etc.) having a wide dynamic range and high
linearity, all with current calibration(s).
7. All RF cabling, splitters, combiners, switches,
attenuators, etc. required to connect the
measurement antenna(s) to the test equipment
required for measuring radiated power and sensitivity
of the AUT. The connection to the receiver or
communication tester used to perform the AUT
measurement shall be referred to as the "test port" in
this section. These components will be characterized
along with the range length and measurement
antenna contributions.
8. Additional cabling to reach from the signal source to
the reference antenna (the reference port), and from
both the reference antenna location and the test port
to the receiver input. The source cabling to the
reference antenna should be treated with ferrite
beads and routed to minimize its influence on the
reference measurement. The effects of these cables
will be removed from the reference measurement,
however, cable lengths should be kept as short as
possible to reduce the associated path loss.

Rev. A, P#399783
9. Low loss cable adapters for performing various

interconnects. These should be characterized to
determine their influence on the measurements. That
influence may be corrected for if measured, or applied
to the measurement uncertainty if estimated.
10. Optional 3 to 10 dB fixed attenuators for reducing
standing wave effects in cables.
11. Optional 50 terminations.
16.2.2 Test Procedure

The range calibration is performed in a two-step process
whereby the effects of the cables and equipment external to
the normal operation of the range are removed from the
resulting reference values. By performing the measurement
in this manner, the measurement uncertainty is reduced,
since the result relies on the linearity of the receiver rather
than its absolute value accuracy. Additionally, measuring all
components of the signal path at once results in only one
measurement uncertainty contribution to the total
measurement uncertainty of the path loss measurement; as
opposed to measuring the loss of each component and
combining them for a total loss, which increases the
uncertainty by the square root of the number of
measurements required.
There are a variety of ways to capture and apply this data
using EMQuest. The exact method chosen will depend on
the test equipment used, the type of cable calibration
performed, and the desired mode of operation for applying
corrections to measured antenna pattern data. The common
method is to use a vector network analyzer and use its built-
in calibration function to record the loss of the reference
antenna and loop-back cable and automatically remove
those effects from subsequently measured data (i.e. the
range calibration). Thus, EMQuest would be configured to
perform a response measurement, using the calibration
function in the equipment driver to measure and
automatically apply the cable calibration. This method
allows more advanced calibrations, including the full two-port
calibration option, to be used. However, using this method,
the value of the cable loss involved is not recorded for later
review. It is often a good idea to qualify the loss of the cable
loop separately to verify the quality of the cable. A response

Rev. A, P#399783
measurement can be performed with no calibration applied

to determine this path loss.
The procedure given for performing pattern measurements
using EMQuest assumes that the corrections for antenna
gain and range calibration are applied separately. However,
it is possible to combine these into one correction by
applying the gain as a negative correction to the range
calibration measurement. Similarly, if the cable calibration is
measured using EMQuest, it can be applied as a correction
to the range calibration in place of using the built-in
calibration functionality of the VNA.
The steps below are written in a generic format and can be
used in any case. EMQuest can automatically perform all of
the trace math involved in calculating and applying these
corrections.
16.2.2.1 Measurement Step 1: Cable Calibration

The first step involves measuring the frequency response of
all cabling, connectors, and equipment that is not a part of
the test system. This step is normally only done once,
provided all required test frequencies can be covered with
one set of cables. If different cabling configurations are
required for each polarization of the reference antenna, etc.,
this step must be repeated for each configuration. The two
steps should be performed sequentially for each
configuration to avoid additional uncertainty contributions
due to changes in connections, etc.
For each configuration, perform the following steps:
1. Route the source cable(s) from the signal generator
or output port of the network analyzer to the mounting
location of the reference antenna. A minimum of 3 dB
(preferably 10 dB) pad is recommended at the output
(reference antenna side) of the cable to minimize
standing waves. This output connection is defined as
the reference port.
2. Connect the output of the source cable to the receiver
or input port of the network analyzer, either directly (if
the receiver can be moved to accommodate this
connection) or through another cable. An additional
pad is recommended at the input port of the receiver.
3. Ensure all equipment has been powered on long
enough to have stabilized.

Rev. A, P#399783
4. Perform a frequency scan or sweep to cover the

required test frequencies and record the result. The
power level of the signal source must remain fixed for
all measurements. Ensure that the received signal is
below the compression point of the receiver (linear
region) and sufficiently far above the noise floor of the
receiver to account for the expected range path loss.
It is recommended that all receivers be set to narrow
bandwidth to obtain the lowest possible noise floor.
Depending on the equipment used, refer to the
following procedure:
5. For a vector network analyzer, first record the swept
frequency response curve with no calibration applied.
This will be used for verifying that the analyzer is in
the appropriate linear region (not overloaded) and has
enough dynamic range. Perform a calibration of the
analyzer to normalize out the response of the cable
loop. This calibration will serve as the source
reference test. While a full two-port calibration is
desirable to provide the lowest measurement
uncertainty and account for standing wave issues,
etc., flexing of cables, movement of rotary joints, and
other variations may make the calibration less
accurate in practice. A through response
normalization, while having a higher level of
uncertainty specified by the manufacturer, may
actually be more accurate in practice due to the cable
variations involved. Refer to step 5 below for
information on estimating these effects.
a. For scalar swept frequency devices (scalar
network analyzers, spectrum analyzers with
tracking generators, etc.) record the swept
frequency response curve of the cable loop. If
the analyzer contains a scalar calibration or
trace math function, it may be used to subtract
this reference curve from subsequent
measurements.
b. For discrete signal generator and receiver
combinations, tune the receiver and signal
generator to each frequency and record the
reading of the receiver.
c. Prior to proceeding to the next test step, move
the cables around and monitor the frequency
response. Any gross changes in response

Rev. A, P#399783
indicate bad cables or connections and should

be rectified prior to continuing. Minor
variations (fractions of a dB) are expected and
should be accounted for in the measurement
uncertainty of the reference measurement.
16.2.2.2 Measurement Step 2: Range Calibration

The second step measures the frequency response of the
reference antenna, range, and all cabling, connectors,
switches, etc. between the reference port and the test port,
as well as the cabling and equipment included in step 1.
This step is required for each polarization of the receive
antenna and for each separate signal path between the
antenna under test (AUT) and any different test ports
connecting to test equipment used for the AUT
measurement. Only the paths used to record data (i.e. the
paths to the receiver used for TRP measurements, or the
output path from the communication tester for TIS
measurements) need to be measured.
For each polarization and configuration, perform the
following steps:
1. Connect the receiver or input port of the network
analyzer to the test port connection to be
characterized using the same cable configuration
used to attach it to the reference port. Any cable
adapters added or removed from the system to make
the required connections must be accounted for as
mentioned previously. Terminate any unused
connections to the appropriate test equipment or by
using 50 loads.
2. Prior to connecting the source to the reference
antenna, attach a 50 termination to the reference
port (or otherwise ensure no output from the signal
generator) and record the noise floor of the analyzer
or receiver at each frequency point. Use a frequency
response sweep or discrete points as necessary
based on the configuration. If available, use a max-
hold function to obtain the maximum noise level for
several sweeps.
3. Connect the reference antenna to the reference port
and use a low dielectric support to hold the antenna in
the middle of the quiet zone, boresight with the
measurement antenna, and parallel to the polarization

Rev. A, P#399783
being characterized. For directional reference

antennas, ensure that both the reference and
measurement antennas are boresight to each other.
Ensure that the support structure is out of the
measurement path such that it has a minimal impact
on the reference measurement.
4. Ensure all equipment has been powered on long
enough to have stabilized. The equipment should
normally have been left on from the cable calibration
step. All settings of the equipment should be identical
to those for the cable calibration. The power level of
the signal generator must be the same as that for the
reference sweep (unless a vector network analyzer is
used to obtain relative power data) and must remain
stable over time in order to obtain valid data.
5. Perform a frequency scan or sweep to cover the
required test frequencies and record the result.
Ensure that the received signal is below the
compression point of the receiver (linear region) and
at least 20 dB above the noise floor as measured in
step 2 above in order to have less than 1 dB
measurement uncertainty due to the noise.
Depending on the equipment used, refer to the
following procedure:
a. For a vector network analyzer, record a
frequency response curve with the calibration
applied. This curve is the desired range
response measurement.
b. For scalar swept frequency devices (scalar
network analyzers, spectrum analyzers with
tracking generators, etc.) record the swept
frequency response curve of the cable loop. If
the analyzer has been configured to
automatically subtract the cable calibration
reference curve, then the resulting curve is the
desired range response measurement. If not,
the resulting curve is the range response plus
the cable contribution, which will be subtracted
out later.
c. For discrete signal generator and receiver
combinations, tune the receiver and signal
generator to each frequency and record the
reading of the receiver. The resulting curve is

Rev. A, P#399783
the range response plus the cable contribution,

which will be subtracted out later.
16.2.2.3 Calculating the Range Path Loss

Once the data has been acquired as described above, its
necessary to convert it to a loss value and combine it with
the reference antenna gain in dBi to obtain the total path loss
to be used as the reference correction. Once this value has
been determined, it can be added to the power readings of
the AUT test equipment to represent the reading relative to
an isotropic source. This math is normally performed using
the trace math functionality provided by the Corrections
nodes in EMQuest.
16.2.3 Calibrating a Passive Antenna Measurement

Range
An antenna range intended for measuring passive antennas
will have a slightly different configuration than that shown in
Figure 4. Figure 7 illustrates a typical pattern measurement
system for passive antenna measurements. The
measurement signal paths to be calibrated are indicated in
green. As before, this includes the radiated propagation
path through the chamber and the conducted path through
any cables, switches, amplifiers, etc. all the way to the
receive port of the test equipment. However, now it also
includes a cabled path from the transmit port of the test
equipment to the AUT. This path would commonly include
rotary joints for the cable to be routed through the axes of
the positioner. Again, there are two return paths inherent in
the system, one for each polarization. A range calibration
must be performed for each path. A vector network analyzer
is the common test equipment of choice, allowing for
accurate scalar and vector pattern data to be acquired. For
VNAs with access to both receiver ports, an alternate cabling
configuration is shown in Figure 8. This allows both
polarizations to be measured simultaneously with the VNA,
without the need of a polarization switch. Note that this
assumes that all signal paths, including that through the
AUT, are passive. In the case of active components
(amplifiers, etc.), the signal path direction must be adjusted
to conform to the active direction of the components.

Rev. A, P#399783
Fully Anechoic
Chamber

Positioner
Conducted Portion of RX
Dual Polarized
Measurement
Antenna
Conducted Portion of TX
RX Port
Vector
Network
Analyzer TX Port
Figure 7 Typical Passive Pattern Measurement System showing

measurement path in green.

Rev. A, P#399783
Fully Anechoic
Chamber

Positioner
Measurement Signal Paths
Dual Polarized
Measurement
Antenna
RX Port A
Vector
Network
Analyzer TX Port
RX Port B
Figure 8 Typical Passive Pattern Measurement System using Dual

Channel Receiver.
Figure 9 illustrates the typical range calibration configuration

for the passive test system. With the exception of any
adapter or jumper cables used to attach the reference
antenna, the cable configuration is identical to that for the
passive antenna measurement. In addition, the test
equipment is also the same. As before, the reference
antenna (yellow) is oriented in the center of the quiet zone
parallel to the polarization of the measurement antenna to be
calibrated. Since both the cables and instrumentation are
the same, the simplest range calibration corresponds to a
simple substitution test, where the gain of the reference
antenna is substituted for the unknown AUT. Assuming the
VNA is stable between tests, it is not necessary to perform a
cable loop calibration on the VNA. If such a calibration were
performed, it would have to be performed again each time a
passive antenna measurement was performed in order to
calibrate the internal behavior of the VNA, in addition to the
cables in the loop. EMQuest can be used to record the un-

Rev. A, P#399783
calibrated response of the VNA, cables, range, and

reference antenna into one range correction. Thus, provided
the VNA remains stable, this measurement will be a valid
correction for any passive measurements performed with the
system. Using EMQuest, a vector response measurement
may be performed in place of a (scalar) response
measurement in order to capture magnitude and phase
normalization data for the range. This vector range
calibration can then be applied to vector pattern tests as the
appropriate range calibration for vector data. Follow the
steps in Measurement Step 2: Range Calibration, above, to
acquire the passive range calibration for each signal path.
Fully Anechoic
Chamber
Reference
Antenna
(in center of
Measurement Propagation Path quiet zone)
Dual Polarized
Measurement
Antenna
RX Port
Vector
Network
Analyzer TX Port
Figure 9 Range Calibration Configuration for Passive Pattern

Measurement System.

Rev. A, P#399783

Rev. A, P#399783
17 Equipment Instance
An instance of an equipment driver represents a single piece of equipment
of that type that is attached to the computer. The configuration
information associated with that instance will be used to establish
communication with that device and define any optional capabilities the
equipment may have installed. There can be any number of instances of
a device (up to the limits of the memory and communication capabilities of
your computer), each with their own communication and options
configuration.
For example, if two identical spectrum analyzers are required for a test,
two instances of the associated driver would be configured, each with the
GPIB address of one of the two analyzers.
Switch drivers are a special case, where more than one instance may be
required to control the same device. Since switch controllers may have
more switches than are needed for a particular application, each instance
of a switch driver can be used to control a different portion of the available
switches from a single switch controller.
17.1 Fields
A field is a marker or tag that is used to indicate the source of
desired information to be inserted into a document when a report is
generated. Rather than inserting the information directly, a field
acts as a place holder in a document template, and contains
information on the source and formatting of the desired information.
That way, the same template can extract the same information out
of a variety of test data files. Available field types include
parameter fields, data fields, and document fields.
17.2 Antenna Property Calculations

The antenna pattern measurements will automatically calculate a
number of common antenna properties from the measured pattern
data. These include values such as antenna gain, directivity, front-
to-back ratio, beamwidth, and more.
17.3 Antenna Attributes

The antenna attributes are the list of post-processed values
generated at the end of a pattern test, and typically include values
like directivity, gain, efficiency, total radiated power, EIRP, etc.

Rev. A, P#399783
17.4 Correction File Generator Tool

This tool provides a simple and efficient way to create response
files for use as corrections and/or reference files. With this tool,
data from external sources such as antenna gain calibrations or
cable loss measurements can be added to a file as a function of
frequency. Once generated, the resulting file can then be used for
frequency dependent corrections in a test parameter file. The
available inputs and controls are spread across a number of tabs.
Identification tab contains fields for identifying the source of the
data.
Instrument Under Test fields allow identifying the instrument or
object to which this data belongs.
Manufacturer allows entry of the IUT manufacturer or selection
Model allows entry of the IUT model number or selection from a
predefined list.
Serial Number allows entry of the IUT serial number or selection
Type allows entry of the IUT device type information or selection
Operator/Comments tab is used to enter additional information
about the data, including the test operator and any other incidental
information not covered by other parameters in the parameter tree.
The available fields include:
Operator allows entry of the test operator or selection from a
predefined list. The data for the predefined list can be entered
using Tools : Options.
Comments provides a large text field for entering any user
comments or setup description information not addressed
elsewhere.
Frequency Response Data tab contains a table and fields for
entering and identifying the correction data.
Y Axis Definition fields allow identifying the data type and units of
the Y axis data.
Data Type allows selection of any of the pre-defined EMQuest data
types or specification of a custom user defined type.
Units allows selection of a standard base unit for any standard data
type.

Rev. A, P#399783
Multiplier specifies the unit modifier for SI units. For example,

defining the unit milliwatts (mW) would be accomplished by
selecting Watts for the units and the multiplier milli.
dB checkbox indicates that the unit has a dB modifier. Thus,
checking this box for the example above would use units of dBm.
User Defined Label specifies the label (including units) to be used
for the custom user defined data type.
Data Table allows entry of the tabular data to be used for the
correction response file. Right clicking on the table provides a
menu to fill or clear a range in the table, and toggle the Wireless
Channel Tool on or off. The columns of the table include:
Channel is only visible when the Wireless Channel Tool is enabled
and allows entering frequency information by forward or reverse
channel number for the specified band.
Freq (MHz) is where each frequency of the response data should
be entered.
Y Axis is where the response data should be entered in the format
and units specified under Y Axis Definition.
Wireless Channel Tool allows entering frequency information by
forward or reverse channel number for the specified band. The tool
can be toggled on or off by right clicking on the data table and
selecting the appropriate menu option. It can be enabled by default
in the Tools:Options menu under Preferences.
Wireless Band Selection is used to specify the band for use in the
corresponding channel lookup.
Link Direction Selection selects the link direction used to
determine the appropriate frequency for the given channel and
band selection.
Graph tab shows a plot of the current data in the data table for
review prior to storing the correction response file.
Pressing the Create File button will bring up the Save As dialog
allowing the user to specify the location and name of the new
response file. More than one file can be created without closing the
tool. Pressing Close closes the tool window.

Rev. A, P#399783

Rev. A, P#399783
18 License Certificate
A license certificate is a block of text representing encrypted binary
information necessary to enable the operation of the EMQuest package. It
must be entered into the License Certificate dialog to enable EMQuest. A
certificate will look similar to the sample below.
------SLokPK AppInfo Begin------

EMQuest.exe-1001----------------
----SLokPK Certificate Begin----
QFjiDl79Scq+E2xCMFGqWtkus3mGwpuM
OvjC3vYuiQGVsTe6A6kVeVEmcvUcjpoJ
od2v-rj8MYNMEJXX0yobw4lqn7+WT0dD
3uskPgtNba-NjZLX73AwV+h6fEkim-bN
XLlbjehUFhdZFFfVfpW3bU
-----SLokPK Certificate End-----

Rev. A, P#399783

Rev. A, P#399783
19 Wireless Channel Tool

The Wireless Channel Tool is an option on list frequency tables that allows
entering channel numbers, as well as frequencies, into the list. The
desired wireless band and link direction is selected and then valid channel
numbers are automatically converted to the appropriate frequency.
Right clicking on tables supporting the tool will display a menu item
allowing the tool to be toggled on or off. The tool can also be enabled by
default in the Tools:Options... menu.

Rev. A, P#399783

Rev. A, P#399783
Index
A
Absolute/Relative Port Definitions.....................................................................418
Ancillary Equipment Frame...............................................................................101
Ancillary Equipment Parameters Agilent 11713A Switch Driver ......................368
Ancillary Equipment Parameters Agilent 3499 Switch Controller .....................374
Ancillary Equipment Parameters ETS-Lindgren 2090 Auxiliary Ports ..............378
Ancillary Equipment Parameters LPT Parallel Port Switch ..............................382
Ancillary Equipment Parameters PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay .......................384, 390
Ancillary Equipment Selection Pane .................................................................422
Ancillary Parameter Frame ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth
Positioner .......................................................................................................291
C
Configuration Parameters Agilent 11713A Switch Driver.................................369
Configuration Parameters Agilent 11713A Variable Attenuator .......................401
Configuration Parameters Agilent 3499 Switch Controller ...............................375
Configuration Parameters Agilent ENA Series.................................................326
Configuration Parameters Manual Variable Attenuator....................................413
Configuration Parameters PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay..................................386, 391
Configuration Settings Advantest R376x .........................................................301
Configuration Settings Agilent 8510.................................................................307
Configuration Settings Agilent 85XX Spectrum Analyzers ...............................363
Configuration Settings Agilent PNA Series ......................................................333
Configuration Settings Dual Receiver Hybrid...................................................403
Configuration Settings ETS-Lindgren 2090 Auxiliary Ports..............................379
Configuration Settings ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth Positioner
.......................................................................................................................292
Configuration Settings Generic Dual Receiver.................................................299
Configuration Settings Generic Receiver .........................................................365
Configuration Settings LPT Parallel Port Switch ..............................................382

Rev. A, P#399783
Configuration Settings Positioner/Switch Hybrid ..............................................404

Configuration Settings Receiver/Switch Hybrid................................................404
Configuration Settings Rohde & Schwarz FSP ................................................364
Configuration Settings Rohde & Schwarz ZVA ZVB ZVT Series ...................348
Configuration Settings Rohde & Schwarz ZVC ZVR ZVM ZVK Series .........339
Copyright Statement ...........................................................................................47
Correction File Generator Tool .........................................................................445
Correction Preferences Frame Radiated Patterns ...........................................214
Correction Preferences Frame Sensitivity Patterns .........................................215
Correction Preferences Frame Vector Patterns ...............................................423
Corrections Frame Vector Response Test.......................................................421
Corrections Pane ................................................................................................97
Corrections Pane Vector Pattern Tests............................................................217
D
Data Selector ....................................................................................................414
Data Table Component.......................................................................................75
Data Table Generator .......................................................................................413
E
EMQuest License Agreement .............................................................................47
EMQuest Revision History ..................................................................................17
Entering License Certificates ..............................................................................83
Entering Registration Information........................................................................83
Equipment Configuration Pane ...........................................................................82
Equipment Control Panel ....................................................................................80
Equipment Pane Pattern Measurement Test ...................................................213
Equipment Pane Response Measurement ......................................................225
Equipment Panel Pattern Measurement Test ..................................................213
Equipment Parameters 87XX ..........................................................................322
Equipment Parameters Advantest R376x ........................................................303
Equipment Parameters Agilent 11713A Switch Driver .....................................372
Equipment Parameters Agilent 3499 Switch Controller ...................................377
Equipment Parameters Agilent 8510 ...............................................................309

Rev. A, P#399783
Equipment Parameters Agilent 8720 ...............................................................316

Equipment Parameters Agilent ENA Series.....................................................328
Equipment Parameters Agilent PNA Series.....................................................334
Equipment Parameters EMQuest Windows Sockets Client .............................399
Equipment Parameters ETS-Lindgren 2090 Auxiliary Ports ............................380
Equipment Parameters ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth Positioner
.......................................................................................................................296
Equipment Parameters Generic Receivers......................................................417
Equipment Parameters Hybrid Communication Tester Receiver and Switch 407
Equipment Parameters Hybrid Communication Tester and Dual Receivers....406
Equipment Parameters Hybrid Communication Tester and Receiver ..............405
Equipment Parameters Hybrid Communication Tester and Switch .................420
Equipment Parameters Hybrid Series-Combined RF Attenuators ...................410
Equipment Parameters Hybrid Throughput Tester Attenuator and Switch.....411
Equipment Parameters Hybrid Throughput Tester and Attenuator ..................408
Equipment Parameters LPT Parallel Port Switch.............................................383
Equipment Parameters Manual Entry Analyzer ...............................................412
Equipment Parameters NetIQ Chariot .............................................................397
Equipment Parameters PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay ..............................................387
Equipment Parameters Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 AMPS ...........................238
Equipment Parameters Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 CDMA...........................240
Equipment Parameters Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 CDMA 2000 ..................245
Equipment Parameters Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 GSM .............................252
Equipment Parameters Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 TDMA ...........................266
Equipment Parameters Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 WCDMA .......................268
Equipment Parameters Rohde & Schwarz NRVD Power Meter ......................297
Equipment Parameters Rohde & Schwarz TS-RSP RF Relay.........................394
Equipment Parameters Rohde & Schwarz ZVA ZVB ZVT Series ..................351
Equipment Parameters Rohde & Schwarz ZVC ZVR ZVM ZVK Series........342
Equipment Parameters Spectrum Analyzers ...................................................355
Equipment Parameters Switch Array ...............................................................419
Equipment Parameters Variable Attenuator.....................................................402
Equipment Types ..............................................................................................230
Rev. A, P#399783
Establish Call Dialog Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 ..........................................276

Exercise Dialog Agilent 11713A Switch Driver.................................................374
Exercise Dialog Agilent 3499 Switch Controller ...............................................378
Exercise Dialog ETS-Lindgren 2090 Auxiliary Ports ........................................381
Exercise Dialog ETS-Lindgren Model 2005 Light Duty Azimuth Positioner .....293
Exercise Dialog LPT Parallel Port Switch ........................................................384
Exercise Dialog PMJ TVi9901 RF Relay..................................................389, 396
Exercise Dialog Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 ..................................................278
Exercise Dialog Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 CDMA.......................................279
Exercise Dialog Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 CDMA 2000..............................280
Exercise Dialog Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 GSM .........................................281
Exercise Dialog Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 WCDMA ...................................283
Exercise Dialog Variable Attenuator ................................................................403
F
Frequency Range Pane ......................................................................................95
G
Getting Started......................................................................................................9
GPIB Configuration Settings .............................................................................417
Graph Component ..............................................................................................65
Graph Control Bar...............................................................................................66
Graph Page ........................................................................................................79
Graph Settings Dialog.........................................................................................69
I
Installed Options 8510 .....................................................................................418
Installed Options 87XX ....................................................................................418
Introduction ...........................................................................................................5
IUT Panes...........................................................................................................93
L
Limitation of Liability............................................................................................47
Limited Warranty.................................................................................................47

Rev. A, P#399783
M
Making Pattern Measurements using EMQuest................................................145
Making Response Measurements using EMQuest ...........................................220
Manual Entry Dialog..........................................................................................412
Manual Positioner Dialog ..................................................................................412
Measurement Progress Page .............................................................................79
N
Notification Frame.............................................................................................100
O
Operator/Comments Pane ..................................................................................94
Options Dialog ....................................................................................................87
Output Pane........................................................................................................99
P
Parameters Frame Two-Axis Dual-Polarization Pattern Measurement............180
Parameters Pane Communication Tester Frequency Response Measurement
.......................................................................................................................229
Parameters Pane Dual-Axis Vector Pattern Measurement ..............................207
Parameters Pane Response Measurement .....................................................224
Parameters Pane Single-Axis Dual-Polarization Pattern Measurement...........167
Parameters Pane Single-Axis Sensitivity Pattern Measurement......................187
Parameters Pane Single-Axis Single-Polarization Pattern Measurement ........161
Parameters Pane Single-Axis Throughput Pattern Measurement ...................195
Parameters Pane Single-Axis Vector Pattern Measurement ...........................202
Parameters Pane Time Dependent Response Measurement..........................226
Parameters Pane Two-Axis Sensitivity Pattern Measurement .........................190
Parameters Pane Two-Axis Single-Polarization Pattern Measurement ...........172
Parameters Pane Two-Axis Throughput Pattern Measurement.......................198
Paths Pane .........................................................................................................98
Pattern Measurement Basics ............................................................................105
Performing Range Calibration using EMQuest .................................................426
Positioner Acillary Frame ..................................................................................285
Positioner Equipment Frame ............................................................................286

Rev. A, P#399783
Positioner Excercise Dialog ..............................................................................287

Preliminary Releases ..........................................................................................49
R
Running Batch Tests Using EMQuest...............................................................102
S
Submitting Registration Information ....................................................................85
T
Table Page .........................................................................................................79
Tabular Data Graphing Tool ...............................................................................91
Template Editor.............................................................................................76, 77
Test Information Pane Batch Test Measurements ...........................................104
Test Parameters Page ........................................................................................77
Time Gate Settings ...........................................................................................416
Tips for using the Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 ................................................234
Tips of the Day....................................................................................................43
U
Upgrades and Revisions.....................................................................................49
W
Welcome...............................................................................................................1
Wireless Channel Tool......................................................................................450

Rev. A, P#399783

EMQuest 399783 A

Cargado por

Información del documento

Título original

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

EMQuest 399783 A

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Antenna Measurement Software

ETS-Lindgren, August 2006 Revision A, Part # 399783

Revision Description Date

ETS-Lindgren, August 2006

2 Help File Organization 3

7 License, Copyright, and Warranty 47

ETS-Lindgren, August 2006

8.1.1.1 Graph Component............................................................. 65

ETS-Lindgren, August 2006

11.3.2 Measurement Techniques ...................................................... 106

ETS-Lindgren, August 2006

13.1.5.1 Parameters Pane, Two-Axis Sensitivity Pattern Measurement 190

ETS-Lindgren, August 2006

14.3.6 Exercise Dialog, Rohde & Schwarz CMU-200 CDMA............ 278

ETS-Lindgren, August 2006

14.6.7 Agilent PNA Series ................................................................. 332

ETS-Lindgren, August 2006

14.8.4.1 Ancillary Equipment Parameters, LPT Parallel Port Switch381

ETS-Lindgren, August 2006

14.15 Trace Information Settings, 8510................................................... 413

19 Wireless Channel Tool 449

ETS-Lindgren, August 2006

ETS-Lindgren, August, 2006 1

This page intentionally left blank.

2 ETS-Lindgren, August 2006

2 Help File Organization

ETS-Lindgren, August, 2006 3

This page intentionally left blank.

4 ETS-Lindgren, August 2006

ETS-Lindgren, August, 2006 5

Parameter Entry and Data Acquisition

3.1 Graphing and Report Generation

3.2 Test Packages

6 ETS-Lindgren, August 2006

3.3 Equipment Drivers

ETS-Lindgren, August, 2006 7

This page intentionally left blank.

8 ETS-Lindgren, August 2006

Minimum System Recommended System

4.1.1 License Certificates

ETS-Lindgren, August, 2006 9

Demonstration Certificate This certificate enables

10 ETS-Lindgren, August 2006

licenses may be purchased without data acquisition

Note: Registration is only required if you have purchased a fully licensed

Note: Registration certificates are only provided after receipt of payment

ETS-Lindgren, August, 2006 11

4.3 Equipment Setup

12 ETS-Lindgren, August 2006

4.4 Test Parameters

ETS-Lindgren, August, 2006 13

Output allows the entry of selected data points for

4.5 Running a Test

14 ETS-Lindgren, August 2006

4.6 Output Templates

ETS-Lindgren, August, 2006 15

This page intentionally left blank.

16 ETS-Lindgren, August 2006

5 EMQuest Revision History

5.1 Changes to Version 1.06 Since Version 1.05

ETS-Lindgren, August, 2006 17

Added a warning message box to alert the user if correction

18 ETS-Lindgren, August 2006